Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
Reference
Guide
Trademark Notice
3D Drill View, 3D Drill View KM, 3Dview, Active Field Surveillance, Active Reservoir Surveillance, ADC,
ARIES, Asset Development Center, Asset Development Centre, Automate, BLITZ, BLITZPAK, CasingSeat,
CDDM, COMPASS, Contouring Assistant, Corporate Data Archiver, Corporate Data Store, DataStar, DBPlot,
Decision Suite, Decisionarium, DecisionDesktop, DecisionSpace, DecisionSpace AssetPlanner, DecisionSpace
Atomic Meshing, DecisionSpace PowerModel, DecisionSpace PrecisionTarget, DecisionSpace TrackPlanner,
DecisionSpace Well Seismic Fusion, DepthTeam, DepthTeam Explorer, DepthTeam Express, DepthTeam Extreme,
DepthTeam Interpreter, DESKTOP-PVT, DESKTOP-VIP, DEX, DFW, DIMS, Discovery, Drillability Suite,
DrillModel, DrillVision, DSS, Dynamic Reservoir Management, Dynamic Surveillance System, EarthCube,
EdgeCa$h, eLandmark, Engineer's Desktop, EOS-PAK, EPM, Executive Assistant, FastTrack, FZAP!,
GeoDataLoad, GeoGraphix (stylized), GeoGraphix Exploration System, GeoLink, GES, GESXplorer, GMAplus,
GRIDGENR, Handheld Field Operator, I2 Enterprise, iDIMS, IsoMap, Landmark, Landmark and Design,
Landmark logo and Design, LandScape, Lattix, LeaseMap, LMK Resources, LogEdit, LogM, LogPrep,
Make Great Decisions, MathPack, MIRA, Model Builder, MultiWell, MyLandmark, MyWorkspace, OpenBooks,
OpenExplorer, OpenJournal, OpenOrigin, OpenSGM, OpenVision, OpenWells, OpenWire, OpenWorks,
OpenWorks Well File, PAL, Parallel-VIP, PetroBank, PetroWorks, PlotView, Point Gridding Plus,
Pointing Dispatcher, PostStack, PostStack ESP, PowerView, PRIZM, PROFILE, ProMAGIC, ProMAX,
ProMAX 2D, ProMAX 3D, ProMAX 3DPSDM, ProMAX MVA, ProMAX VSP, pSTAx, QUICKDIF,
QUIKCDP, QUIKDIG, QUIKRAY, QUIKSHOT, QUIKVSP, RAVE, RAYMAP, Real Freedom,
Real-Time Asset Management Center, Real-Time Asset Management Centre, Real Time Knowledge Company,
Reservoir Framework Builder, RESev, ResMap, RMS, SafeStart, SCAN, SeisCube, SeisMap, SeisModel, SeisSpace,
SeisVision, SeisWell, SeisWorks, SeisWorks MultiView, SeisWorks PowerSection, SeisXchange, Sierra,
Sierra (design), SigmaView, SimResults, SIVA, SpecDecomp, StrataMap, StrataModel, StrataAmp, StrataSim,
StratWorks, StressCheck, STRUCT, Surf & Connect, SynTool, SystemStart, SystemStart for Clients,
System Start for Servers, SystemStart for Storage, T2B, TDQ, Team Workspace, TeamView, TERAS,
Total Drilling Performance, TOW/cs The Oilfield Workstation, Trend Form Gridding, Turbo Synthetics, VIP,
VIP-COMP, VIP-CORE, VIP-DUAL, VIP-ENCORE, VIP-EXECUTIVE, VIP-Local Grid Refinement,
VIP-THERM, WavX, Web Editor, Web OpenWorks, Wellbase, Wellbore Planner, WELLCAT, WELLPLAN,
WellXchange, WOW, Xsection, Xsource, You're in Control. Experience the difference, ZAP!, and Z-MAP Plus
are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of Landmark Graphics Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Note
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a
commitment by Landmark Graphics Corporation. Landmark Graphics Corporation assumes no responsibility for any
error that may appear in this manual. Some states or jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of expressed or implied
warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
R2003.12.0 ii
Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
Contents
Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
Introduction
Z-MAP Plus Overview ........................................................................................ 1
Guide Purpose and Organization ............................................................... 1
Documentation ............................................................................................. 2
Introduction continued
OpenWorks ........................................................................................................ 13
Overview of OpenWorks .............................................................................. 13
Z-MAP Plus Connection to OpenWorks ..................................................... 14
Starting Z-MAP Plus with an OpenWorks Connection ........................ 14
SeisWorks .......................................................................................................... 24
StratWorks ......................................................................................................... 26
Stratamodel ........................................................................................................ 27
TDQ ..................................................................................................................... 28
PetroWorks ........................................................................................................ 29
R2003.12.0 Contents iv
Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
R2003.12.0 Contents v
Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
R2003.12.0 Contents vi
Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
Info ...................................................................................................................... 89
Master File Directory .................................................................................... 90
Report ...................................................................................................... 91
File continued
Input and Output Files for the Import Option ....................................... 120
R2003.12.0 Contents ix
Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
R2003.12.0 Contents x
Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
R2003.12.0 Contents xi
Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
Features
Overview ............................................................................................................. 219
R2003.12.0 Contents xv
Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
Features continued
R2003.12.0 Contents xx
Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
Modeling
Overview ............................................................................................................. 385
Shared Gridding Parameters ...................................................................... 388
Control Grids ................................................................................................ 389
Data Hulls ...................................................................................................... 390
Setting the Radius of the Ball used to Create the Convex Hull .......... 391
Using Point Gridding Plus with Vertical Separation Faults ................ 401
Modeling: Trend Fit Gridding: Output Grid Name, Primary Parameters continued
Minimum and Maximum Z Values ......................................................... 505
Operations
Overview ............................................................................................................. 531
Operations continued
Macros
Overview ............................................................................................................. 737
User Macros .................................................................................................. 737
Quick-look ..................................................................................................... 738
Graphics ........................................................................................................ 739
Operations .................................................................................................... 739
Geophysics ................................................................................................... 740
Utilities .......................................................................................................... 740
CARM
Overview ............................................................................................................. 743
CARM continued
Tools
Overview ............................................................................................................. 771
R2003.12.0 Contents xl
Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
Tools continued
Appendix E. Import/Export
Transferring Data In or Out of an MFD ............................................................ 827
Introduction .................................................................................................. 827
Common Terms ...................................................................................... 828
Importing ASCII Files Into Z-MAP Plus and OpenWorks ............................... 860
Disk File to MFD/OW .................................................................................... 860
Grid File to MFD/OW .................................................................................... 861
Other Tools ................................................................................................... 861
Example 1:
Loading an ASCII Dataset into OpenWorks ASCII (Import) ..................... 862
Example 2:
Loading ASCII Grid to OpenWorks with Grid File to MFD/OW ................ 863
Files That Dont Affect the Operation of Z-MAP Plus .......................... 903
Glossary
Z-MAP Plus Glossary ........................................................................................ 905
Introduction
Documentation
The Z-MAP Plus documentation set includes the following PDF-format
documents.
Z-MAP Plus User Guide Introductory information about
gridding, MFDs, ZGFs, workflows, and many commonly used
procedures.
Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL Reference
information about the Landmark-supplied macros.
Z-MAP Plus Utilities Reference Guide Reference information
about the Z-MAP Plus utilities: Pointset Builder, Flowlines/
Orthogonal Contours, Overpost Resolution (New), Source Priority,
Hardcopy, Hardcopy Batch, and Convert a ZGF to a DXF.
Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide (this document) Reference
information about Z-MAP Plus menus and optionsorganized to
match the Z-MAP Plus menu structure. Appendixes contain
information about topics that include: codes for graphics features,
files, fields, symbols, fonts, line patterns, state planes; formats for
import and export files, basics about color systems, mapping
projections, auxiliary files, and customizing title blocks.
Z-MAP Plus Installation and Configuration Guide System
administration information for installing the Z-MAP Plus product
suite, such as Z-MAP Plus, ZCL, and utilities, plus detailed license
management information.
ZCL Operators Manual, Volumes 1 and 2 Process definitions
and parameter requirements for ZCL processes, which you can
customize and use to expedite workflows.
Z-MAP Plus Release Notes Summaries of new features,
outstanding issues, and essential notes.
Pointset Builder Reference Guide Information about the
Pointset Builder utility, which you can use to extract OpenWorks
data and create pointsets from it (x,y,z data files).
Pointset Builder Release Notes Installation and other important
information about Pointset Builder.
Browser-based online help is also available for tabbed dialog boxes. To
display browser-based help about the parameters in a tabbed dialog box,
click the Help button in the dialog box.
The status area is located below the display area. Watch the status
area for helpful prompts and parameter values for current
processes.
The following illustration shows the menus in the Z-MAP Plus menu
bar.
Inactive Options
The Edit and View options are initially inactive and appear dimmed. These
options control the display of graphics. The options become active if you attach
or create a graphics file.
Shortcut Icons
Workflow Icons
The icons in the workflow toolbar are shortcuts to some frequently used
functions. The icons are organized from left to right in a rough
approximation of a typical Z-MAP Plus workflow.
Basemap Point Gridding Save to
Attach ZGFs Picture Open Features Plus SeisWorks
Attach
MFDs
Master File Directory File Info Master File Directory (page 93)
2. You can now select Z-MAP Plus or a related application from the
Applications menu of the Z-MAP Plus Command Menu.
OpenWorks
If you use OpenWorks with Z-MAP Plus, Z-MAP Plus has a direct
connection with the data stored for the OpenWorks project. You do not
need to perform special import and export operations to retrieve and
send data to OpenWorks. This topic contains a brief overview of
OpenWorks, and examines the connection between OpenWorks and
Z-MAP Plus.
Overview of OpenWorks
OpenWorks is a computer environment built on a comprehensive
exploration and production database. You can use various OpenWorks
utilities to import, export, manage, and display data.
An Oracle relational data structure sits at the foundation of OpenWorks.
The Oracle database is composed of tables that group related
information. OpenWorks stores four kinds of data that you can use in
Z-MAP Plus:
Pointsetssimilar to Z-MAP Plus DATA files. They contain X, Y,
and Z-VALUE fields.
Gridssimilar to Z-MAP Plus GRID files. They are evenly
distributed points that are estimates of an attribute over an area.
Faultssimilar to Z-MAP Plus FALT files. They are fault
polygons or lines associated with a surface in OpenWorks.
Deviated Well Tracesdeviated well traces are read-only.
All Z-MAP Plus operations can be performed using data from either the
traditional binary MFD data files, or using data directly from the
OpenWorks database.
You can use MFDs with the OpenWorks database in the following
ways:
If you use the OpenWorks database as a central repository, you can
use MFDs as temporary storage project databases.
To optimize data access and retrieval speeds, you can copy data
from OpenWorks to an MFD for temporary storage.
The MFD datatypes (such as DATA and FALT) are stored with the data
so Z-MAP Plus can filter the data for display in dialog boxes.
The instructions in this section assume that your project data is already
loaded into the OpenWorks database. For more information about data
loading, see the OpenWorks Geodata Loading guide.
Once you select a project and interpreter, the Z-MAP Plus Command
Menu reflects the settings, as shown in the following example:
The upper part of the dialog box refers to data stored in a Z-MAP Plus
MFD. The lower part of the dialog box lists all the available grids in the
current OpenWorks project. The column headings are described in the
following table:
Column Explanation
If you use a function in Z-MAP Plus that requires faults or pointsets, the
input dialog box is similar, except that faults and pointsets are shown as
options instead of grids.
Once you select OpenWorks for output, the OW button next to the
Output File Name option. When you click the OW button, the following
dialog box appears:
With this dialog box, you can fill out the information that OpenWorks
requires to properly store your grid, pointset, or fault data in the
database. This dialog box uses default values based on the input
parameters specified.
Once stored in the database, you have immediate access to the data. the
previous dialog box showed an example of storing a pointset in the
OpenWorks database. As you can see from the following picture, the
pointset becomes immediately available as potential input for a gridding
operation.
Typical Workflows
There are really no typical workflows for Z-MAP Plus. How you use
this versatile program depends on your data, your objectives, and your
work style. You might consider the approaches suggested in the
following diagram and adapt them when you are ready. This work flow
assumes that you have already created the project and loaded data into
the database.
Start OpenWorks.
When you start subsequent sessions with the same project, fewer steps
are required. You already have an interpreter designation in the project,
and your prioritized list of interpreters remains in effect.
What Is a Project?
A project is a logical collection of data. Assuming that you have created
a project and have loaded your well data, all you have to do is select a
project from a list of the available projects on your system.
For information about creating projects, see the OpenWorks Data
Management guide. For information about data loading, see the
Geodata Loading guide.
What Is an Interpreter?
So that several people can work in the same project and use each others
interpretations without corrupting them, OpenWorks assigns
interpreters initials to such data as:
surface and fault picks and profiles
pointsets
grids
For example, if you pick Top A, other interpreters can see the pick and
use it to create gridded surfaces. However, only you can alter the pick.
If no interpreters are defined in a project, the interpreter LGC is
automatically created and selected as the current interpreter.
Pointset Builder
SeisWorks
StratWorks
Access pointsets, grids, horizons,
Use grids created with advanced
faults, and shot points.
Z-MAP Plus gridding algorithms.
Access zone attribute grids.
PetroWorks
Stratamodel
Access zone attributes created from
Transfer MFD grids, pointsets, and faults.
calculated logs for gridding in Z-MAP Plus.
TDQ
Access grids and polygons.
SeisWorks
OpenWorks
MFD
database
Save in Open in
SeisWorks
database Z-MAP Plus
Of the data types SeisWorks can export, Z-MAP Plus can use the
following ones:
Horizon files Data from seismic interpretation in SeisWorks
2D/3D.
SeisWorks/2D exports x, y, z, line names, and shotpoint numbers.
SeisWorks/3D exports x, y, z, line number, and shotpoint number.
Fault Heave Data is stored in the FALT data type and includes
fault heave or fault throw information associated with the horizon.
This file contains the following fields: x, y, segment ID, delta z
throw, and fault gap (heave).
Computed Contour Dataset is generated by the SeisWorks
mapping software using triangulation or gridding algorithms. On
export, this file is separated into three pieces: control point data,
shotline data, and fault polygons.
Control points file contains isolated data points, such as well log
picks, and includes x, y, and z values. (You can use the data in this
file as an Additional Well Control File in Z-MAP Plus.)
Shotline points file contains shotline data created by sampling the
horizon file in SeisWorks and includes x, y, z, and line name.
(Because this file does not contain shotpoint identification,
Z-MAP Plus can only read the contents as well data.)
Fault polygons file contains polygons that were either hand drawn
or calculated from fault heaves by the SeisWorks software and
includes x, y, and segment ID.
Fault Segment files contain all assigned and unassigned fault
segments in the working project and are stored in one DATA file.
The file has the following format: x, y, z, segment ID, and fault
plane number.
StratWorks
Z-MAP Plus
maps
grids
pointsets grids
well traces
centerline faults
fault polygons
pointsets
centerline faults
fault polygons
pointsets
centerline faults
fault polygons
grids
pointsets
well traces
centerline faults grids
fault polygons
maps
StratWorks
Of the variety of data that StratWorks can export, Z-MAP Plus can use
the following:
Pointsets, which are stored in a DATA file type in the MFD,
include control points and are stored as x, y values, well ID, and
one z value.
Fault polygons, which are stored in a FALT file type in the MFD,
include (x, y, and segment ID) and are created with the StratWorks
MapView editing function.
Regular fault data, which is stored in a FALT file type in the
MFD, includes (x, y, segment ID, heave, and vertical separation)
and is created from information stored with the fault polygons and
associated fault cuts.
The fault polygons and center line fault files are given the same
name, except that the latter is preceded by cline.
Stratamodel
Z-MAP Plus
grids
OpenWorks well traces
database
grids
read only
well traces
Stratamodel
TDQ
Z-MAP Plus
grids
grids fault polygons
centerline faults
grids
fault polygons
grids
centerline faults
TDQ
You can import data from or export data to TDQ through the
OpenWorks database, or exchange grids and fault polygon data directly
through data files.
TDQ sees only depth or time grids, all other grid types are invisible. Be
sure you set the Depth Type and Depth Units by using the OpenWorks
Grid Output Specification dialog box.
PetroWorks
In addition to the data you can write to and read from the OpenWorks
database, you can import reservoir production parameter data the
PetroWorks Summation module generates. Examples of reservoir
production parameter data include net pay and net reservoir rock, which
PetroWorks saves as zone attributes and stores in the OpenWorks
database. You can import this data from OpenWorks into an MFD and
use it to create grids and contour maps in Z-MAP Plus. (For more
information about PetroWorks, see the PetroWorks User Guide set.)
Z-MAP Plus
grids
pointsets
well traces
MFD
OpenWorks
database
reservoir
production
parameters
grids
pointsets
well traces
PetroWorks
New Icons
Three shortcut icons have been added to the top of the Z-MAP Plus
window and one icon has been updated to be more recognizable:
File Manager To start the File Manager, click the new
File Manager icon (or select File Manager in the Z-MAP Plus
window). Use the File Manager to quickly copy, move, and delete
virtually any type of file you create in Z-MAP Plus. You can also
use the File Manager to compress MFDs and ZGFs.
Open SeisWorks Data To display the dialog box for opening a
SeisWorks horizon as a grid, click the new Open SeisWorks Data
icon (or select File Open SeisWorks in the Z-MAP Plus
window).
Save to SeisWorks To display the dialog box for saving grids
as SeisWorks horizons, click the new Save to SeisWorks icon (or
select File Save As SeisWorks File in the Z-MAP Plus
window).
Open Picture To display the dialog box for opening a picture,
click the newly designed Open Picture icon (or select File
Open Picture Open in the Z-MAP Plus window).
True Color
Z-MAP Plus now displays images in true color, no matter which
platform you use, provided your system is set to display true color.
When you print images or save them as CGM files, a standard 256-color
palette is still used.
Overview
Use File menu options in the Z-MAP Plus window to manage
Z-MAP Plus files in the following ways:
New Create Master File Directories (MFDs), session files,
maps, and cross sections (page 32).
Open Attach existing MFDs and a Z-MAP Graphics File
(ZGF) to the current session. Open session files, pictures, and
SeisWorks horizon files (page 48). You can reopen saved session
files to restore session settings.
Manager Start the File Manager utility (page 60). Use the File
Manager to cut, copy, paste, move, delete, and rename member
files in MFDs, pictures in ZGFs, Systems files, and OpenWorks
files. You can also compress and rename MFDs and ZGFs.
(Equivalent to the File Manager icon.)
Save Session As Save session settings (page 68). You can
reopen session files later to reload the saved settings.
Save As Save MFD contents as ASCII, CPS-1, or ZGF Flat
Files (page 70). Save grids as horizons for use in SeisWorks
(page 85).
Info Display information in the system window (page 89)
about the following elements: file directory, file listing, grid
listing, data statistics, grid statistics, file or picture, graphics file
summary, and list of CPS-1 files.
Directory Paths Set directory paths (page 108). These settings
determine which directories are searched to create lists of available
filessuch as MFDs and ZGFs you can attach.
Import Import various types of data into Z-MAP Plus and save
the data in an MFD or ZGF (page 116).
Print Print a picture to a CGM or other file type (page 132).
Session
To create a blank session file (parameter file), select File New
Session. The CREATE a BLANK Session File dialog box appears.
Enter a name in the Enter Name for Blank Session File box. If you use
an existing file name, the original file is overwritten.
To create the blank session file, click OK. The next time you select
File New Open Session to display the SELECT Session File
dialog box, the session file name appears in the list. If you select a blank
session file, all the parameter settings revert to the default values.
For information about the target directory for the blank session file, see
Location for Saving Session Files on page 69.
Master File
Select File New Master File (MFD) to display the CREATE
MASTER FILE dialog box, which you use to create a Master File
Directory (MFD). In the CREATE MASTER FILE dialog box, set the
parameters described in the following text.
Basemap
Select File New Basemap to display the NEW MAP Creation
dialog box, which you use to create a new basemap. The following
workflow shows the main steps.
Click the first button, Picture Name, AOI Types and Scale Types.
Specify parameters in the Picture NAME, AOI & Scale Type dialog box.
Existing data,
User input Define AOI picture, contours
from...
Enter X and Y minimums and maximums Select AOI from grid, data, picture contours
Enter values for map offsets and scale Select AOI type
Is this a
Yes projected No
map?
Select projection parameters
Activate projection
Apply
Scale Type
You must set a scale for drawing the map so it corresponds
proportionally with real world distances. Use the Scale Type option to
specify how you plan to set the scale. You define the actual scale
measurements when you specify the AOI.
Click the Scale Type button in the Picture NAME, AOI & Scale Type
dialog box. From the drop-down list, choose an option to use as a basis
for the map scale:
UNITSPERINCH (default value) Use map units per inch.
ABSOLUTE Use map units per data.
MAPTOGROUND Use different types of units, such as feet
and centimeters.
Y maximum Y minimum
Y scale = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
desired number of inches or centimeters in Y
Projection Parameters
You must specify projection parameters for the map. Click the
Projection Parameters button to display the Set up a Projection dialog
box. Use this dialog box to create projections for the new map from one
of the following sources:
a data file
an existing picture
user input
state plane
Projection Code
To use a projection code to define the projection, click the Projection
Code button in the Projection Parameter SETUP dialog box. Select a
projection code from the list of codes that appears. The projection can
be Cylindrical, Conic or Planar Azimuthal. The available projections are
listed in the following text. For a complete description of each available
projection, see Map Projections on page 875.
Spheroid
Once you select a projection code, select a spheroid code. Each spheroid
code corresponds to a reference spheroid a theoretical geometric
figure whose dimensions closely resemble the dimensions of the earth
for a particular area.
Click the Spheroid button in the Projection Parameter SETUP dialog
box. The Select Spheroid CODE list appears, which you use to choose
a defined reference spheroid or to select the USER-DEFINED option
and specify custom axes for the spheroid. Spheroid options are shown in
the following illustration.
For a complete description of each of the reference spheroids (including
the dimensions for the semi-major axis and the semi-minor axis of each
one), see Reference Spheroid on page 893. The program uses the two
axes to calculate the ellipticity for the map projection.
.
Projection Parameters
Once you select a projection code and spheroid, click the Projection
Parameters button in the Projection Parameter SETUP dialog box to
display the Set Projection Parameters dialog box appears. The Set
Projection Parameters dialog box contains parameters required for the
specified projection. The parameters are context-specific, and may
include the following options:
Unit Code
Unit Factor
Reference Latitude
Latitude Scale Factor
Reference Longitude
Longitude Scale Factor
False Northing and False Easting
Central Meridian
Mapping Across the Dateline
Unit Code
You can choose the units of measurement for the projection from the
Unit Code list, unless you are using a UTM Projection (in which units
are always defined in meters). The available units of measurement may
include these options: USER-SUPPLIED, METERS, FEET, YARDS,
INCHES, KILOMETERS, NAUTICAL MILES, STATUTE MILES,
and US SURVEY FEET.
Reference Longitude
Reference Longitude, or Central Meridian, is the line of longitude
located at the center of a projection on which the projection is generally
based.
False Easting
A value assigned a central meridian of a coordinate system to avoid the
inconvenience of using negative coordinates.
False Northing
A value assigned to the origin of Northings, or grid coordinates to avoid
the inconvenience of using negative coordinates.
Central Meridian
The line of Longitude located at the center of a projection on which the
projection is generally based. This parameter is also known as the
Reference Longitude.
If you click either NAD27 or NAD83, a list appears that consists of all
50 states, Samoa, Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands and the Old and New
regions for Michigan. Select the option you want.
Select Region
A list of regions associated with the selected state appears. Depending
on the state, regions are listed as East, West, North, South, Central, or
by number, such as Region 1, Region 2, and Region 3.
Activate Projection
Select this option to activate the currently defined projection
parameters. These parameters remain in effect until you select the
Deactivate Projection option or reactivate and change the current
projection parameters by reselecting the Activate Projection option.
Deactivate Projection
Select this option to deactivate a projection when you wish to generate
a picture using northing/easting parameters.
Cross Section
Horizons, baseline AOI from existing picture AOI from user input
Select horizon AOI parameters Select AOI graphics file Enter x,y minimums
and maximums
Apply
Picture Name
Enter the name of the new cross section. You can use a maximum of 24
characters to assign a descriptive and meaningful name. You can
include blanks in the name.
Line Number
If a file contains more than one line, enter the line number to use as the
baseline.
Session
Select Open Session to display the SELECT Session File dialog box,
which you use to select and open a .ZCLPARM (or .zclparm) file.
Parameter values are reset from the selected file.
The SELECT Session File dialog box contains a list of the previously
created parameter files contained in the directories specified in the
Session tab of the Directory Paths dialog box. If the list is empty, check
the settings in the Directory Paths dialog box, as described on page 112.
MFD Open/Close
You can select MFDs to open or close from a list of the MFDs located
in paths specified by the Directory Paths for Master Files setting. (For
more information about this setting, see Directory Paths on
page 108.)
You can have a maximum of four MFDs attached to a session at a time.
If you select more than four MFDs to attach, only the first four are
attached, and an error statement appears in the system window.
ZGF Open/Close
Select Open Graphics File to attach a graphics file (ZGF) and
automatically detach the currently attached ZGF. The program searches
for all ZGFs in the directories specified by the Directory Paths setting.
As soon as you select a file, the list disappears and the selected file is
attached. You can attach only one graphics file at a time.
Picture Open
Select Open Picture Open to select a picture (map or cross section)
you want to view and modify. If the picture you want is not listed in the
dialog box that appears, check the status area to verify that the
appropriate ZGF is attached. Once you select a picture, the status area
displays the picture name.
If this is the first time you have selected the File Open
Picture Open option, the Edit and View menus are inactive. Once you
select or create a map or cross section, these menus are activated and no
longer appear dimmed.
If the Tools System Switches Display Picture When Opened
option is set to Yes, the selected map or cross section is drawn
automatically. If not, you must select View Full Display or click the
Full Display icon.
SeisWorks
If you use Z-MAP Plus with OpenWorks, you can import and
automatically grid SeisWorks horizons (.hzd, .hts, or .hzd_glb files) so
they are accessible in Z-MAP Plus.
To open a SeisWorks horizon as a grid in Z-MAP Plus, click the Open
SeisWorks Data icon or select File Open SeisWorks in the
Z-MAP Plus window.
Two dialog boxes are associated with the SeisWorks Open option:
Seismic Project Selection The first dialog box that appears,
which you use to specify the SeisWorks project that contains the
horizons you want to import (next topic).
Import From SeisWorks The follow-up dialog box, which you
use to select the input horizons and specify the output files and
settings (page 86).
Import From
SeisWorks
dialog box,
configured to
save a horizon to
an MFD and
automatically
generate a grid.
Use the Import from SeisWorks dialog box to specify which horizons to
import, the types of output to create, and the conversion settings.
The Import from SeisWorks dialog box contains three sections:
Horizons next topic
Mapping Files page 57
OpenWorks Output or MFD Output page 58
Horizons Section
The Horizons section of the Import from SeisWorks dialog box contains
the following options:
Select Horizons
Required: Create a list of one or more horizons to import. The seismic
line data in horizon files will be converted and stored in the specified
MFD or in the OpenWorks project as one or more DATA files. A
separate DATA file is created for each selected horizon. (Separate files
may also be created for the various types of output you select.)
Click the Select Horizons: List button and use the Multiple Horizon
Selection dialog box that appears for selecting horizons to importin
much the same way you would select horizons if you were working in
SeisWorks. The Horizon Choices list contains all the horizons in the
selected seismic project. For 3D seismic projects, the listed file types are
.hzd or .hts files. In 2D seismic projects, the listed files are of type
.hzd_glb.
To create a horizon list from scratch, move one or more horizons to the
Horizon Selection list (on the right side of the dialog box) by clicking
horizon names in the Horizon Choices list, then clicking the top arrow
icon between the two lists. The selected horizon names move to the
Horizon Selection list and the values in the counter boxes above both
lists are updated.
To automatically select the horizons in a previously saved list, click the
Open List button. In the Horizon Set File Open dialog box that appears,
complete the following steps:
1. Select a horizon list (.hst) file to use from the list.
2. Select the Append or Replace radio button to specify which items
are highlighted in the Horizon Choices list:
Append Adds the list's horizons to the group of already
highlighted items.
Replace Highlights only the horizons from the list. (Clears
the selection of any already highlighted horizons that are not
on the list.)
The selection mode affects which horizons are highlighted in the
Horizon Choices list. Horizons you have already moved to the list
are unaffected.
To view the contents of a list, highlight it and click the View
button.
Saving the Current List To save the current Horizon Selection list,
click the Save List button. In the Horizon Set File Save dialog box that
appears, enter a new list name or select a list file to overwrite.
Output Options
The lower part of the Horizons section of the Import from SeisWorks
dialog box contains options for specifying the types of output to
generate.
Select all the check boxes that correspond to output types you want to
generate. You must select at least one output type. The output options
are described in the following text:
Output as Control Points and Output ZNONS To generate a
control points file from the horizon data, select the Output as
Control Points check box. To include trace locations for
uninterpreted areas in the horizon, also select the Output ZNONs
check box. You can use this setting to output all the x,y
coordinates of uninterpreted or partially interpreted horizons. All
trace locations are output, so uninterpreted locations are given a
ZNON (null) value.
Generate Grid To create a grid file each imported horizon file,
select the Generate Grid check box. When you click the Apply or
OK button, the system window reports which grids were created.
Output Fault Heaves (Fault Center Lines) To import all the
fault heave files associated with the horizon data, select the
Output Fault Heaves (Fault Center Lines) check box. Fault
heave information is derived from the fault heave entries in the
OpenWorks database and are written to a series of regular
Z-MAP Plus fault files. Each regular fault file contains the heave
information for a specific horizon and is named for the horizon
with a FALT designation.
The contents of a SeisWorks mapping file are separated by data type and
written to three files during the conversion. All three file types are
named after the original .dts file name. For example, if you import a
mapping file named lowsand, the following three Z-MAP Plus files are
generated:
Shot point numbers are not imported, but you can use shot lines files to
perform line gridding or to post lines on basemaps.
Output Manual Contours
To import data from SeisWorks manual contour files (.mcf) into a
Z-MAP Plus CNTR file, select the Output Manual Contours check
box and click the List button.
Icon bar
Tabs
File Listing
pane
Directory
pane
File Detail
pane
Pane size
controls
Buttons
In the File Manager, you can easily manage almost every type of file you
create in Z-MAP Plus. Macro files (.ZCLMAC files) are the exception.
You can use File Manager to manipulate the following file types:
OpenWorks, MFDs, ZGFs, .FMT, .TBL, .ZEQ, and DATA files.
The remainder of this topic describes the components of the
Z-MAP Plus File Manager dialog box. For detailed information about
File Manager operations and tabs, use the context-sensitive help system
accessible by clicking the Help button in the Z-MAP Plus File Manager
dialog box.
If you position the cursor over an icon, its name appears. All the icons
have counterpart options in MB3 menus.
Drag-and-Drop
Use drag-and-drop to move or copy files from the File Listing pane to
the directory tree. You can drag-and-drop the following file types to
these locations:
MFD component files to a different MFD, or
A selected picture to a different ZGF.
Directory Pane
The Directory pane is the tree display at the left side of the Z-MAP Plus
File Manager dialog box. The Directory pane display changes as you
switch tabs, to display the related objects at the highest level of the file
system.
If you select an icon in the Directory pane, the items contents are listed
in the File Listing pane at the dialog boxs upper right.
The following table describes the contents of the Directory pane for each
tab:
OpenWorks When you first select the OpenWorks tab, the tree is collapsed and
only the current project folder icon is visible. If you select the
project folder icon, the tree expands to show the project
subdirectories. To display the contents of a subdirectory in the File
Listing pane, select the subdirectory folder icon. (For example,
subdirectory contents may include faults, grids, contour sets,
control points, polylines, deviated wells, and lattices.)
ZGF All ZGFs in the defined directory paths are listed (not just the
currently attached ZGF). Each ZGF is represented by a folder
icon. To display a ZGFs pictures in the File Listing pane, select
the ZGF icon.
If you select an MFD or ZGF in the Directory pane, the Compress and
Rename MFD/ZGF icons become active, enabling you to display a
dialog box for compressing or renaming a selected MFD or ZGF.
To select a file or picture in this pane, click the row once with MB1.
Triangle Map is the selected picture in the sample above. When you
have selected an OpenWorks, ZGF or MFD, the File Detail pane
becomes active and displays information about the selected file or
picture. The Rename File, Cut, Copy, Paste (after a Cut or Copy
operation), and Delete icons also become active when a file is selected
in this pane.
Resizing Panes
Resize To resize the height of the panes in the Z-MAP Plus File Manager dialog box,
icon use the small square Resize icon between the panes. Drag the Resize icon up or
down with any mouse button until the panes are the appropriate height.
Save As Command
You can use the File Save As options to save Z-MAP Plus data in
disk filesmaking the data accessible in other Landmark programs.
The Save As options are:
ASCII (Export) Copies data from a component file in an MFD
to an ASCII file (next topic).
CPS-1 File Copies the contents of one internal file in an MFD
to a CPS Save file. CPS Save files are binary files that you can use
with the CPS-1 mapping program (page 73).
ZGF Flat File Copies the contents of a ZGF to a formatted
ASCII file (page 74).
SeisWorks File Saves one or more grids as SeisWorks horizon
file(s) (page 85). (Corresponds to the Save to SeisWorks icon.)
ASCII (Export)
Use the ASCII (Export) option to save a file from an attached MFD as
a formatted ASCII file. You most often use this option to make data
available for import to other programs, but you can also use it to convert
data between file types. (In most cases, however, you can perform
file-type conversions by using the Operations File Conversion
option.)
You have a choice of formats for the output file: Use either a previously
created format or automatically generated formats (derived from the
formats of the source file fields). You can also automatically create
formats for grids. Additionally, you can include a format description
header at the top of the output file. Files created with automatically
generated formats and introductory format description headers can be
re-imported into Z-MAP Plus in their original form.
To use the ASCII (Export) option as the first step in converting data
between file types, use the default values to create the export file and
include a format description header at the top of the file. Edit the file
type specified in the header and use the edited format to import the file.
(For more information, see Appendix E. Import/Export on page 827.)
File
From the list of files that appears, select a file to transfer to a formatted
disk files. You can export any file stored in an MFD.
Format File
A list of formatted disk (ASCII) files whose names end with .FMT or
.fmt appears.
The format file is a standard text file consisting of one or more formats.
A format is a series of lines describing what is to be exported and in what
format. Each field that is to be output is described in the format. To learn
more about the format (format group in ZCL), see Appendix E. Import/
Export on page 827 or Import on page 116. You do not need a
format file to export a Z-MAP Plus file. The format can be created
automatically.
If your format file is not listed, make sure the Format tab of the
Directory Paths dialog box points to its location.
Format Name
From the list of formats that appears, select the format that defines the
the output file and the fields included in the file.
Group ID Character
The group ID or format ID character is used to define the beginning and
end of the format information that goes on top of the output file when
Header is selected. The default character is @.
For a discussion of what formats and the group ID character are, see
Appendix E. Import/Export on page 827 or Import on page 116.
Comment ID Character
The comment ID character is used to identify lines of text that are treated
as comments if the header format is used to import a file. The default
character is !. When the header format is generated automatically,
comments describing the date and time and file from which it was
created are output to the header. If an existing format is used, whatever
comments it contains are output to the header.
For a discussion of what formats and the comment ID character are, see
Appendix E. Import/Export on page 827 or Import on page 116.
History ID Character
The history ID character is used to identify lines of text that are stored
as history information if the header format is used to import a file. When
the format is generated automatically, no lines of history are output to
the header. If an existing format is used, whatever history information it
contains is output to the header. The default character is +.
For a discussion of what formats and the history ID character are, see
Appendix E. Import/Export on page 827 or Import on page 116.
CPS-1 File
Use the CPS-1 File option to execute the EXPORT-CPS-FILE macro.
This macro exports a member file from an MFD to a CPS SAVE file.
You can export an original or extended file.
For more information about this macro, see the Help
Online Manuals Macros Manual EXPORT-CPS-FILE or
the Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL.
Purpose This macro exports a member file out of an MFD to a CPS SAVE file.
You can export an original file or an extended file.
Description As input, you must specify a member file of the type GRID, DATA,
VERT, FALT, or CNTR.
Header Record
Each picture has a header record. ZGF flat files have 16 types of header
records, described in the following table.
Record
Column Format Description
Type
Record
Column Format Description
Type
Record
Column Format Description
Type
Record
Column Format Description
Type
Group Record
Group records mark the start of a particular category of records (for
example, contours and well data). The next occurrence of a group record
closes the previous group, so groups cannot be nested. The three types
of group records are described in the following table.
Record
Column Format Description
Type
Primitive Record
Primitive records are used to describe information about four types of
graphics features. Graphics primitive records contain information about
hidden tags, including LGB type codes, lines, symbols, and text. Each
of the four primitive record types is explained in the following table.
Record
Column Format Description
Type
Record
Column Format Description
Type
Color Table
Immediately following the picture name record is a $HT record that
defines the color representation table.
$HT 30 NO COLOR TABLE shows that the picture has no color
representation table associated with it.
$HT994 COLOR TABLE precedes records that contain integer
codes for the color representation table. The integer codes can be
decoded into floating point RGB values by the following method:
%Blue = (ICODE/1048576) / 1023
%Green = (MOD(ICODE/1024), 1024) / 1023
%Red = (MOD(ICODE,1024)) / 1023
The color codes can be read with the FORTRAN format
((9(8I12/1,/) starting on the first line following the $HT record.
Graphic
Code Changes
Element
Text $HT 30ZGTSTC Changes the color of all text until you
enter another color index for the graphic
element.
Line $HT 30ZGTSLC Changes the color for all lines until you
enter another color index for this graphic
element.
Polygon Fill $HT 30ZGTSFC Changes the color of polygon area. Used
in conjunction with the code identifying
each of the polygons present on the ZGF
picture.
For each of the four elements in the table above, the FORTRAN format
is 1x,13.
Colorfilled Polygon
This color code identifies the polygon whose index is being set. It has
the following format:
$HTNNNZGTCUL
where NNN is an integer from 1 to 999 that represents a colorfilled
polygon. It is read with the following FORTRAN format, where
ICOLOR is the color index. NPTS is the number of vertices on the
polygon, and ZMIN and ZMAX are not used.
READ (LTEMP, 750) ICOLOR, ZMIN, ZMAX, NPTS
750 FORMAT (20X, I10, 2F15.5, 7X, I3)
The polygon vertices following are read with the format (10F10.0).
Each hidden tag can have a maximum of 40 points stored. Larger
polygons are stored in a series of $HT groups.
Clipping Window
This code determines whether the posted graphics on the ZGF picture
are clipped. You can use this code to limit posted graphics to a given
areafor example, to keep contours inside the map border or to limit
posted border labels to a small area outside the map border. The code
has the following format:
$HTNNNZGTWND
where NNN is an integer from 1 to 999 that flags the activated or
deactivated status of a clipping window for posted graphics. It is read
with the following FORTRAN format:
READ(LTEMP,210)MODE, NUMVTX, IPLOT
210 FORMAT (14X, I1, 1X, I15, 1X, I10)
READ(LTEMP,230)(XCORS(I),YCORS(I),I=ISTART,IEND)
230 FORMAT (14X, 8F10.0)
Modal Record
Modal records set parameters for lines or text, as described in the
following table.
Record
Column Format Description
Type
Non-Command Records
Two types of records are not commands: continuation and point records.
A continuation record can only occur immediately following a hidden
tag ($HT), text ($T), or another continuation record. It is FORTRAN
format A100 and uses columns 1100.
A point record can occur only immediately after a hidden tag ($HT), text
($T), or continuation record, and follows this format:
Descriptio
Column Format
n
SeisWorks File
If you run Z-MAP Plus with OpenWorks, you can save grids as horizons
for use in SeisWorks. To begin this operation, click the Save to
SeisWorks icon or select Save As SeisWorks File in the
Z-MAP Plus window.
To complete this operation, you use the following two dialog boxes:
Seismic Project Selection (next topic)
Transfer Grid to Seismic (page 86)
Grid Selection
Grid Required: Specify the name of the source grid to convert to a
horizon. Click the Grid: Select button to display a list of grids in
currently attached MFDs or in the current OpenWorks project.
Highlight the name of the grid you want to convert. The dialog box
closes immediately. You return to the Transfer Grid to Seismic dialog
box, which displays the name of the selected grid file in the Grid box.
Fault To include the data from a fault file associated with the target
grid, click the Fault: Select button. Use the Select A Fault File dialog
box that appears for specifying the fault file. The Select A Fault File
dialog box displays a list of all the faults in the attached MFDs and in
the OpenWorks project. Highlight the name of the associated fault
whose data you want to include. The dialog box closes immediately.
You return to the Transfer Grid to Seismic dialog box, which displays
the name of the selected fault file in the Fault box.
When you finish specifying the source grid name, target horizon name,
and any other options you want to use, click OK or Apply in the
Transfer Grid to Seismic dialog box. If you specified an existing horizon
name, a confirmation message box appears and asks if you want to
overwrite the original file. Once the file is created, a message appears in
the system window.
Info
Use the File Info options to view information about Z-MAP Plus
files, grids, and graphics.
The options include:
Master File Directory Displays information about files on the
currently attached OpenWorks files, MFDs and the scratch file.
File Listing Displays the contents of any nongrid file in the
currently attached OpenWorks files, MFDs and the scratch file.
Grid Listing Displays the contents of a grid on the screen.
Data Statistics Generates data statistics on a field for any
currently attached data file.
Grid Statistics Generates grid statistics for any currently
attached grid file.
File/Picture Information Generates a report describing the
contents of a graphics file.
Graphics File Summary Enables you to execute the
ZGF-SUMMARY macro, which generates a report for each
picture in the graphics file (ZGF).
List CPS-1 File Enables you to execute the LIST-CPS-FILE
macro, which lists the contents of a CPS SAVE file.
Report
Report choices refer to the extent of information you would like
presented about the files listed. The Summary option tells you how may
records are allocated for the scratch file and for each MFD, and how
many of the (allocated) records have been used. The Partial option lists
the following information about each file: When the file was created, the
number of fields, the number of words per record, the number of data
records, and the minimum and maximum X and Y Coordinates. In
addition to the information in the Partial listing, the Full option lists the
field name, the data type, the default format, the first word, the number
of words, and the ZNON value for each field.
File Summary
Full Report Partial Report
Type Report
Match on Characters
Use this feature to enter a character string to match to the first characters
in a file name. The File Directory utility lists all the matching file names
in the currently attached OpenWorks files, MFDs and scratch file.
This feature matches the first characters in the first word of a file name.
You can enter one or more unique characters to view the data or grid
statistics for a subset of the available files.
For example, if you enter W, file directory information appears in your
process window for all files that start with W.
Unix is Case-Sensitive
Unix names are case-sensitive. You must enter capitalize characters correctly.
File Listing
Input File
Select the file to list.
Listing Type
Use the Listing Type parameter to control whether the listing is
automatically generated, and, if not automatically generated, which
method to use for subsetting the listed records. Possible choices include:
Automatic (default value) List all records and all fields of the
dataset. The Automatic listing uses the print formats stored with
each field of the file, unless you have just changed the formats in a
previous listing. If you have changed the print formats in a
previous listing, Automatic file listing uses the changed formats.
While in Automatic file listing, you cannot select fields, formats,
column headings and widths. You also cannot window data fields.
Full List all the records, but maintain control over which fields
are listed and their format.
Line Name List all records whose names in the Line Name
Field match the name you enter in the Line/Area Name parameter.
You control which fields are listed and their format.
Area Name List all records whose names in the Area Name
Field match the name you enter in the Line/Area Name parameter.
You control which fields are listed and their format.
Window List all records whose values in the fields selected for
windowing fall inside specified minimum and maximum values for
those fields. You can use the intersection of a maximum of ten
window fields. You control which fields are listed and their format.
Exception List all records whose values in the fields selected
for windowing fall outside specified minimum and maximum
values for those fields. You can use the intersection of a maximum
of ten window fields. You control which fields are listed and their
format.
Line/Area Name
Enter a Line name or Area name. This name may be up to 40 characters
long, contain internal blanks, and should match some of the names used
in the Line or Area Name field in the file to be listed. All records having
a name in the line or area name field that match this name are listed. The
first line or area name field in the file is used for the comparison.
Starting Record
Enter the sequential number of the first record that you want to appear
in the listing. All earlier records are ignored.
Ending Record
Enter the sequential number of the last record that you want to appear in
the listing. All following records are ignored. The default is the last
record on the file.
Append
To place a field on the Destination List, the Append button must be
depressed. Simply click the fields you want on the output file. They
appear on the Destination List (default value).
Delete
You can delete any field in the Destination list. With the Delete button
depressed, click the fields you want to delete from the output file.
Insert
To use the Insert button, pick a field in the Destination List and click
the button. The currently selected field in the Source List is inserted
above the targeted field in the Destination List.
Field Formats
Enter the print format to use for each selected field. The print formats
are specified in FORTRAN format notation. The defaults are taken from
the width and number of decimal places specified for each field in the
file being listed. The default values are usually acceptable. However, if
you want a specific look for each column, you must change the default
formats.
Valid FORTRAN format notation includes:
Character Field (A Format) Use the number of words, the letter A,
then the maximum number of characters allowed in the column. The
number of characters must be a multiple of four. The text in an A format
field is left justified.
Example:
Example:
Example:
Example:
Example:
Example:
Example:
Windowed Data
Up to ten fields can be windowed when selecting records to be listed.
Windowing on a field means that a maximum and minimum value is
selected for a field and if that fields values fall either inside those limits
(Listing Type = Window) or outside those limits (Listing Type =
Exception), the data record associated with those values are listed.
When more than one field is used, the records listed are the intersection
of the windowsthat is, a record must be found in all windows.
Grid Listing
Select
listing
type
Enter Fortran format Set printer positions Specify all grid listing
and contour levels and printer contour
parameters
Select labeling mode
Set windowing
parameters? N
Yes
Enter minimum and maximum
row and column values
Apply
Grid Listing displays the contents of a grid on the screen. The fields and
their associated values are listed. You control the names of columns and
the order in which values are displayed. File Listings and Grid Listings
can also be routed to an ASCII file.
Use Grid Listing to perform these tasks:
List and view grid values.
Create a printer contour of the grid.
List grid values and create a printer contour.
You can display the grid report to the monitor or save it as a disk file.
The Grid Listing menu contains of these options, discussed in the
following topics:
Input Grid
Listing Type, Format
Windowing Parameters
Input Grid
Select an grid to be listed from the list of grids that appears.
Listing Type
Use this parameter to choose how the grid is displayed.
The options are:
Grid Listing Print only the grid report.
Printer Contour Print only the contours using print characters.
Both Print both the grid listing and the printer contour.
Printing the grid listing to an output disk file is optional. However, the
listing is always displayed to the screen.
Format
For each field you have selected to list, you should specify the print
format. This parameter is expressed in FORTRAN format notation. (See
the discussion on FORTRAN format notation under Field Formats on
page 97.)
Labeling Mode
This parameter refers to labeling rows and columns, and is needed when
the listing type is Grid Listing. There are two options:
do not label the rows and columns of the gridonly output the
grid node values
label the rows and columns of the grid
Contour Interval
This parameter must be supplied when the listing type is Printer
Contour. The parameter refers to the interval between adjacent contours.
Windowing Parameters
Use the Window capability to look at a part of the grid instead of the
entire grid. As mentioned earlier, minimum and maximum row and
column numbers are used to determine the limits of the windowed area.
You can select the grid size by identifying:
the top edge of the window (minimum row number)
the bottom edge of the window (maximum row number)
the left edge of the window (minimum column number)
the right edge of the window (maximum column number)
Minimum Row
Refers to the top edge of the window (minimum row number).
Maximum Row
Refers to the bottom edge of the window (maximum row number).
Minimum Column
Refers to the left edge of the window (minimum column number).
Maximum Column
Refers to the right edge of the window (maximum column number).
Data Statistics
You can generate data statistics for a field in any currently attached data
file. The statistics you can display include number of Y locations and
ZNONs, minimum and maximum X-, Y-, and Z-values, the range, mean,
standard deviation, and root mean square of the Z-values, and the fields
ZNON value.
Select Field
From the list of fields presented, select a field to use as input for
displaying data statistics.
Grid Statistics
You can generate statistics for any available grid. The statistics you can
generated include X and Y grid increment, number of rows, number of
columns, ZNON nodes, real-valued nodes, maximum and minimum X,
Y, and Z values, and the range, mean, standard deviation, root mean
square, and relative variance of the Z values. In addition, some of the
data collection parameters used during gridding are provided.
File/Picture Information
A report is generated describing the contents of a graphics file. The
report indicates the number of pictures on the file. For each picture, the
report includes name, X and Y limits and ranges, map scale, plot
dimensions in inches, and what graphics features are on the picture. You
can control how much of this information is displayed for each picture
and whether the output is written to a formatted disk file.
Information Specifications
Use this dialog box to control whether picture headers (summary
statistics) and picture element (graphics features) lists appear in the
report. You can also specify the name of a file on for writing the output.
Purpose The ZGF-SUMMARY macro generates a report for each map or cross
section in the specified ZGF. The report includes:
name of the picture (map or cross section)
area of interest details
a list of the features (graphic segments) in the file
projection information
Results A printout in the system window that contains information about the
pictures in the ZGF.
Directory Paths
All files found during searches are used to build lists of files for you to
select from when running Z-MAP Plus options. The output paths tell
Z-MAP Plus where to write files it creates.
The Directory Paths dialog box is easy to use. In each tab, click the
Browse button to locate directories you need and highlight the
directories.
To build a directory path, select the appropriate tab for the file type (for
example, MFDs or ZGFs). You can specify a maximum of four input
paths, each pointing to a different directory. For all file types (except
macro files) you can also specify an output path, a location for writing
files. The default input and output paths point to the current directory
(the directory you were in when you started Z-MAP Plus, represented
by the dot slash ( ./ ) symbol.
Click the Browse button beside each path to bring up the Select a
Directory dialog box. Use this dialog box to specify a path.
Click the Apply to all button beside each path to copy that directory
path to all tabs in the dialog box. This is helpful if the project files are
stored in common directories.
Comprehensive HTML Help is available for this topic by clicking the
Help button in the lower right corner of the Directory Paths dialog box.
The remainder of this section defines the file types listed on the tabs.
MFDs
Z-MAP Plus processes require various types of data. Examples of data
types include:
control point data (DATA)
contour data (CNTR)
fault traces (FALT)
line data (VERT)
textual data (TEXT)
grid values (GRID)
deviated well data (well tracks) (DWEL)
Trilat Triangulation Lattice (TRIA)
cross section (XSEC)
seismic section (SSEC)
well log traces (WLOG)
format files (FMT)
color tables (TBL)
point-centered cell table (PCEL)
block-centered cell table (CELL)
A Master File Directory (MFD) is a disk file that contains a collection
of datasets. Z-MAP Plus uses MFDs when listing appropriate data types
for a given process, and writes the results of a Z-MAP Plus process to
an output data file. Like input data files, output data files are stored in
MFDs.
MFDs store data of all types, except for Graphics Segment Types.
Graphics Segment Types or Graphics Features are components of
pictures. Pictures are stored on Z-MAP Graphics Files (ZGFs).
Once you specify Directory Paths that point to MFDs, the MFDs in
those directory paths (with write permissions) are available to be
attached to your current session.
ZGFs
Graphics files store pictures used by Z-MAP Plus. Pictures are a
collection of graphics features (or graphics segment types), such as
borders, contours, control point symbols, seismic line segments,
user-defined polygons, and labels. Some operations give you the option
of treating all the graphics features in a picture as a single feature, or of
keeping the individual features separate so you can manipulate them
individually.
The ZGFs tab of the Directory Paths dialog box instructs the program
which locations to search for the graphics files that will be accessible in
Z-MAP Plus. You can set paths to many graphics files, but you can only
have one ZGF attached to the session at a time. If you select Open
Graphics File, the list that appears contains all the ZGFs found in the
specified directory paths for ZGFs. Select the ZGF you want to attach.
The new selection immediately overrides any previous selection.
Pictures you create or edit during a Z-MAP Plus session are stored in the
attached ZGF. To display pictures stored in another ZGF, select
Open Graphics File, and select the appropriate ZGF.
In the ZGFs tab of the Directory Paths dialog box, you can specify a
maximum of four input paths and one output directory path. You do not
need to specify any paths unless you want to use ZGFs that are not in
your home directory (or you want to save ZGFs in a custom location). If
you use a common location to define one of the input and output paths,
in later sessions it will be easier to find the ZGFs you create.
Naming Conventions
The program searches only for graphics files that end in .ZGF or .zgf, so you
must use one of these extension when name graphics files. Otherwise, the ZGFs
are inaccessiblethey do not appear in dialog box lists.
Data Files
Directory Paths for Data Files allows you to build up to four input
directory paths and one output directory path for data (ASCII) files.
A directory path tells Z-MAP Plus which directories to search when
looking for data files. You need not build any paths since the default
input and output paths point to your current directory (directory you
were in when you started Z-MAP Plus). However, if the data files you
want are not on your current directory, you must build a path to point to
them. You should probably make one of the input paths the same as the
output path so you can easily locate newly created DATA files the next
time you start Z-MAP Plus.
Session Files
Z-MAP Plus processes offer a range of session (parameter) choices for
users. Many processes can execute using defaults once the user selects
the input data for that process. Required parameters either have a gray
background or are indicated by a gray square surrounding the parameter
entry area. As users increase their desire to shape the outcome of a
process such as gridding or contouring, they can supply more of their
own data. Users can also try different sorts of constraints on a process to
explore different interpretations of their data.
Session files store parameter settings entered during a Z-MAP Plus
program run. Parameter settings include information such as which
MFDs and which ZGF you have attached, the Area of Interest of all your
pictures, and the values you last entered for Flexing Parameters.
Z-MAP Plus stores all parameter settings for your current session into
the LASPRM.ZCL and LASPRM.ZCL2 files. Each time you click the
OK, Apply and Save buttons in a dialog box that is not associated with
a macro, parameter settings are written to one of the LASPRM files. If
you do not load a saved session file for your current session,
Z-MAP Plus restores the parameter settings by using the LASPRMS
files.
LASPRMS Corruption
If you experience unexpected program termination, exit Z-MAP Plus, delete the
LASPRM.ZCL and LASPRM.ZCL2 files, and restart the program.
You may want to create specialized session files. If you have more than
one project, you may want to create a session file for each of them. With
project-based session files, you can set up gridding and modeling
parameter values to reflect the different geologic structures in various
areas. You also might want to save a session that yielded a certain
interpretation, and create another session file to compare the way
different parameters affect the result of a process. If you are not getting
the expected results, you may occasionally want to create a blank
LASPRMS file and start parameter definition all over.
Naming Conventions
The program searches only for files that end in .ZCLPARMS or .zclparms, so
you must name your files with this extension.
Format Files
The Directory Paths dialog box can point to format files that have been
saved (or exist as external diskfiles). Format files describe the general
nature of the each data type, the fields in the data file, and the
configuration of the rows and columns. Here are a few of the more
common ways to create and use format files in Z-MAP Plus:
Use any ASCII editor such as vi, ed, or emacs to create a format
file. The field descriptions required by a format file vary depending
on the data type. For a description of the required fields for a
format file, and how to construct a format file, see Structuring
Files for Transfer into a Master File on page 850. Appendix D
provides examples of format files for all major data types.
Use the File Import Disk File to MFD/OW option to create
a format file interactively. The Examine/Prepare Input File allows
you to mark all the necessary fields and save their format to a file.
Include the format description at the top of the data file you wish
to import or export.
The Format Files option allows you to build up to four input directory
paths and one output directory path for format files. A directory path
tells Z-MAP Plus which directory to search when looking for format
files. You need not build any paths, since the default input and output
paths point to your current directory (directory you were in when you
started Z-MAP Plus). However, if the format files you want are not on
your current directory, you must build a path to point to them. You
should probably make one of your input paths the same as your output
path so that a newly created format file can be found in the next
execution of Z-MAP Plus.
Color Tables
A color table defines the color of each feature in a picture, such as the
picture contours, border, seismic line symbols, or well symbols. The
color tables associated with pictures you create or import into
Z-MAP Plus are external disk files.
.
Naming Convention
The program searches only for color table files that have the extension .TBL or
.tbl, so use one of these extensions when you name color table files.
To create custom color tables, use the Edit Color Tables Write
option.
To enable the program to locate specific color table files, specify their
paths in the Color tab of the Directory Paths dialog box. You can specify
a maximum of four input directory paths and one output directory path
for color tables. The input directory paths instruct the program which
directories to search for color tables.
You are not required to specify any color table paths unless you put
custom color tables in a location other than the default location (the
directory you used to start Z-MAP Plus). The program does not require
an input path to find the default color table.If you make one of the input
paths the same as the output path, it will be easy to find newly created
color tables in the next Z-MAP Plus session.
Macro Files
A macro is a sequence of processes that are packaged to be executed as
a group. You can call many ready-to-execute macros directly from
Z-MAP Plus. You can also use the Z-MAP Command Language (ZCL)
to create custom macros. The Macro Reference Manual for
Z-MAP Plus / ZCL contains essential information about pre-defined
macros.
You can use the Macros tab of the Directory Paths dialog box to specify
a maximum of four input directory paths, which the program searches
when it creates macro lists to display in dialog boxes. You typically do
not need to specify macro paths the default path is the home directory
(the directory you were in when you started Z-MAP Plus). If you save
macro files to a different directory, specify the path that leads to them.
If you select Macros User Macros in the Z-MAP Plus window,
Z-MAP Plus searches the macro file directory input paths. Macros in
these paths are listed and become available for execution.
Import
Use the File Import options to make data from other applications
accessible in Z-MAP Plus.
The following list shows the Import options, along with brief
descriptions of their results:
ASCII (Import) Transfer a formatted disk (ASCII) file into a
specified Master File Directory (MFD) or into OpenWorks (next
topic).
Grid File to MFD/OW Create a format group (based on your
specifications), which you can use to import a grid file (page 130).
Disk File to ZGF Converts a flat graphics file into a graphics
file usable in Z-MAP Plus (page 131).
CPS-1 File to MFD Enables you to import a CPS SAVE file
into an MFD (page 132).
ASCII (Import)
You can use the ASCII (Import) option to copy a formatted disk
(ASCII) file into an MFD. Once in the MFD, the data is available for use
in other Z-MAP Plus operations. Formatted files can have a maximum
width of 250 characters and can contain any number of lines (or physical
records).
Formatted files can also have any number of logical records (described
in the following paragraph). The maximum number of physical records
in each logical record is 10.
Physical and Logical Records It may be helpful to think of a logical
record as all the information associated with an x,y location. One x,y
location (logical record) can have 50 fields (or columns) of information.
The fields require several lines (physical records) to hold their values,
so a file may have several physical records for each logical record. To
import a formatted file, you must describe the position of each field
value in each physical record of the logical record.
To describe the input data to Z-MAP Plus, you use a format. A format
is a description of the general shape of the input data (such as number of
lines and number of physical records per logical record) and of each data
column to be copied (such as field name, field type, and beginning and
ending position in the file). The format can be:
located at the beginning of the data,
taken from an existing format file, or
interactively built during the import process
If the format is interactively built, it is stored in a format file for reuse.
You can use previously built formats to import data with a similar
format.
For specific examples of how to format different data types in preparation for
importing them into an MFD, see Appendix E. Import/Export on page 827.
Determine the Format Situation with Respect to the Data. The options
you need to use depend on your situation. The main file/format
parameters are:
Disk File In The disk file that contains the data you want to
import into an MFD.
Disk File Out The disk file you have imported into an MFD. It
is the data you imported. A format description may have been
added to this file. The file name you assigned is the name of the
member file you created in an MFD.
Format File You either have an existing format file to use for
importing the disk file, or you construct one on-the-fly.
Format Name You can name the format contained in the
format file. If the format you want to use already exists, select its
name. Do not give the same format name to two different format
groups (data descriptions) in a single format file. Format group
names must be unique.
Output Name
Use the Output Name dialog box to name the output file and output
MFD. Enter the name of the Output File in the box. Use the popup menu
to choose the output MFD.
If the needed format file is not listed, make sure the Format tab of the
Directory Paths dialog box is set to locate the format files on your
system.
You define the position and other information about a column of data
(field) by using the cursor. First identify a column of values to describe.
In a line that contains one of the values, select the far left position of the
value (including blanks). Hold down the left mouse button and move the
cursor to the right until it is positioned where you want the value to end,
then release the mouse button. The included area and all equivalent
values in other records are highlighted. These value slots (in reverse
color) are entries in that field when the Z-MAP Plus file is created. The
cursor can also sweep from right to left to highlight values.
Once you mark a column of values with the cursor, the Field Parameters
dialog box appears. This dialog box allows you to name and describe
that field. If what is highlighted in black is not what you want to be part
of this field, click the Cancel button on the Field Parameters dialog box
and re-highlight the column. Once you have named the field and have
changed other parameters, click the OK button to accept them. To
change parameter settings for a field after you apply the settings, click
the highlighted area, and the Field Parameters dialog box for that field
appears again.
Repeat the format defining process for all values you want to be fields
in the Z-MAP Plus file. You need to define only the data you want to
import. You can define data in any order, not necessarily left to right.
When you finish defining, select Save Format from the Action list.
Line Disposition
This dialog box appears when you click a number in the column on the
left side of the Z-MAP Plus Data Preview Window. It allows you to
place a special character in front of particular lines in the input data file.
These characters cause the line to be treated either as a comment (which
the program ignores), or as history (which is stored with other
descriptive information about the imported file).
Do Nothing
Does nothing and returns you to the Data Display Control and Data
Preview windows.
Field Parameters
Use this dialog box to define characteristics of the field created with the
data you highlighted in the data preview window. Field characteristics
include type, name, decimals, ZNON value, internal storage format, and
sort index. In addition, the dialog box also lets you define the type (such
as DATA or CNTR) for the file to be imported.
You can use the first eight options in this dialog box to describe each
data field you highlight. The following table describes the choices
available for these options.
Available
Option Default Description
Choices
FIELD TYPE Over 70 possible Calculated based Click FIELD TYPE button to select from a
field types on work flow list of available field types.
FIELD NAME Any alphanumeric FIELD TYPE Fill in a text string up to 20 characters in
character string length.
INPUT DECIMAL Any integer 0 if left blank Used only when data contains no decimal.
PLACE Inserts a decimal by counting over from the
right-justified position.
ZNON VALUE Any real number .1E+31 Enter a real number value well outside the
range of data values.
ALPHA ZNON Any alphanumeric blank Enter a character string. (Converted to the
character string numeric ZNON VALUE for real number
fields when you apply the import process).
PRINT WIDTH Any integer, but the SIGNIGICANT The print width that is used when exporting
practical limit is 14 DIGITS + 6, but or listing this field of data. Should be at least
not less than 10 (SIGNIFICANT DIGITS+6).
SIGNIFICANT Any integer, but the Width of Specified the number of significant digits
DIGITS practical limit is highlighted field retained when exporting or listing this field.
eight. Most real number fields are single precision,
preserving only eight significant digits.
File Type
Select the type of file to create. All valid nongrid file types are available.
If you are importing a grid, you must build a format file outside of
Z-MAP Plus and select it by clicking the Select a Format button in the
Import Files dialog box (as described in Appendix E. Import/
Export on page 827).
Action
Select one of the following actiosn to perform:
Continue (default value) Use this option to define more fields.
Save Format Use this option when you finish defining fields,
want to save the format and continue with the import operation.
Use this dialog box to save the format you have just built.
Required input values are the name of the format file (data
description) and name of the format in that file. The format file
name cannot contain blanks, and the format name cannot contain
commas.
Format File Name Specify the name of the ASCII disk file to
use for storing the format group.
Format Name Enter the name of the format to create. This
name can be a maximum of 40 characters long and can contain
internal blanks. The format name cannot contain commas. It is
necessary to name the formats because you can put more than one
format on one format file. In Z-MAPs Command Language (ZCL)
these are sometimes called Format Groups, since each represents a
group of formats that describe a file.
If you try to write a format to the format file with a name that is
already on the file, Z-MAP Plus asks you to enter a new name. If
you want to reuse that name you must exit Z-MAP Plus and delete
the old name and format from the file. In the format file the first
line of the format begins with an at sign (@). Find the @ that is
followed by the name you want to reuse. Delete that line and all
the lines after it until you reach the next @. Do not delete that @.
You can then return to the import option and save the format under
that name.
If you have defined comments in the file, you must also specify a
new data file name that contains the data file with comment
markers.
Delete Field Use this option to change a previously defined
field. You can redefine the fields width or any of its other
parameters.
Purpose This macro imports a CPS SAVE file into an MFD. If the file is an
extended file, the information in the header is read and used. If it is not
an extended file, you are asked to enter the header information.
CGM
Set parameter values for width, height, scale, factor, number of copies, rotation, and cutline.
OK OK
Picture Name
From the list of pictures that appears, select a picture, and click OK. Part
or all of this picture is used when the option executes.
Unit Type
Unit Type refers to plotter units. Click to indicate whether your plotter
units are expressed in inches or centimeters.
Graphics Features
If you click the raised box, another dialog box appears, which lists the
graphics features of the selected picture. Select the picture features to
plot. Select All, Select None, or select individual features.
Picture: W and H
This is the actual size of the picture minus any offset areas you have
built into the plot. If the plot size is 37 x 37 plotter units (in./cm.), and if
you ask for a 1 unit offset all around the picture, the Picture W (width)
is 35 and H (height) is 35.
Plot Parameters
Plot Parameters include these elements:
offsets
plot dimensions
scale factor
number of copies
rotation of the picture on the plot
cutline
Offsets
Enter a value for the Left, Right, Top and Bottom Offset areas. The
offset is the area around the picture which is not part of the picture. An
offset is a sort of margin around the picture.
Scale Factor
This option can increase or decrease the size of your picture.
Enter a percentage to use for scaling the plot size. For example, a scale
factor of 300 percent for a 10 x 11 plot creates a 30 x 33 plot.
Number of Copies
Indicate the number of copies you want. The default number of plots/
copies is 1.
Rotate
By depressing the Rotate radio button, you can rotate the picture relative
to the orientation of the plot. The default is NO (raised button).
Cutline
A cutline is a line which can be used to trim the plot. It is optional.
Other
Use cutline?
Plot
Yes specified No
features?
Plot only selected features. Plot only cleared features.
All
Apply
When you exit Z-MAP Plus, you are asked if you want to plot the
picture immediately.
This hardcopy method requires that you supply the parameter values for
hardcopy. The plot a picture parameter file is used to create a plot. If the
you do not want to create a hardcopy at this time, the parameter file is
stored. It is used to create a plot when you select HDBAT.
Select Picture
Select a picture from the list that appears. Part or all of this picture is
used when the option executes.
Plot Parameters
Use this dialog box to select a plotter device and to indicate whether to
plot all or selected features. The Plot Parameters dialog box also enables
you to specify these options:
number of plots
scale factor for adjusting plot size
whether the cutline is included
Number of Copies
Enter the number of copies of the picture you want. The default is 1.
Use Cutline
Controls whether a cutline is drawn on the plot. Possible choices for this
parameter are:
No Cutline (default value) Do not draw a cutline on the plot.
Cutline Draw a cutline on the plot.
Device Type
Controls which plotter device is used. Possible choices for this menu
depend on the devices available at your installation. Click the parameter
input box and a popup menu shows which devices your systems
administrators attached to Z-MAP Plus.
Scale Factor
Enter a number to use for scaling the size of the plot. The dimensions of
the plot are multiplied by this number to determine the final size of the
plot. For example, a scale factor of 3 for a plot that is 10 inches by 11
inches would create a plot 30 inches by 33 inches. Similarly, if the scale
factor were 0.5 the plot would be 5 inches by 5.5 inches.
Copy Files
Apply
You can copy existing files of any type from OpenWorks files, an
attached MFD, or the scratch file to any other attached MFD or to the
scratch file. The new file name be different from the old name even if
you are saving it in a different MFD. If you use the same name, the copy
occurs, but a warning message appears and tells you to copy the file with
the same name to another MFD.
The copy files command works on only one file at a time. If you want to
copy almost all of the files in one MFD to a new MFD, this is not the
way to do it. Instead, use the Unix system copy command to copy the
entire MFD, then use the File Delete Files option to delete
unwanted files from the new MFD.
Input File
Select an input file from the list of files that appears.
Copy Pictures
Maintain features
Yes division on copied No
picture?
Maintain division Select single feature
Select features to copy. Copy all features simultaneously.
Apply
You can copy pictures from one ZGF to another. You can copy all or
some of the picture features. You can combine the copied features into
one graphics feature (LGB or Logical Graphics Block) or preserve them
as individual features. You can create a new ZGF to store the copied
picture.
Input Picture
From the list of pictures that appears, select the picture you want to
copy. Part or all of this picture is used when the option executes.
Output Picture
Use this dialog box to specify the name for the copied picture.
Picture Name
Enter the name of the picture to be created. The name can be a maximum
of 64 characters long and can contain internal blanks.
Features Division
This dialog box allows you to combine individual graphics features
(contours, text, lines, etc.) into one graphics feature (for example, Index
Map) when a picture is copied. For most purposes you want to Maintain
Division of the features. Graphics features, sometimes referred to as
Logical Graphics Blocks (LGB), can be manipulated easily (deleted,
copied, etc.) when they are distinct features. When they are combined
into one graphics feature, that manipulation capability is lost. However,
because they are now one graphics feature they can be copied, deleted,
and so on as a single unit, which also has advantages.
Features to Copy
A list of features appears. All features printed with black letters on a
white background WILL be copied. Features printed with white letters
on a black background will not be copied. If you point to and click a
feature, the feature is switched from white-to-black or black-to-white.
Once all of the features are set appropriately, click OK and the settings
are stored.
Rename Files
Apply
You can rename files of any type contained in the attached MFDs or
scratch file. A renamed file is actually a copy of the old file saved under
a new name, followed by deletion of the old file. Because Rename is
done this way, it can be thought of as a Move with the ability to rename
during the move.
Input File
From the file list that appears, select an input file to use.
Rename Pictures
Apply.
Input Picture
As input, you can select the currently displayed picture or any other
picture in the selected input ZGF. The name of the current picture
appears in the Z-MAP Plus window status area.
From the list of pictures that appears, select the picture to rename. The
first option in the selection dialog box is Rename Current Picture. The
dialog box also lists all the pictures in the currently attached ZGF.
Output Picture
Use the Output Picture dialog box to specify a new name for the picture.
Picture Name
Enter a new name for the picture. The fully qualified name (full path
terminated by the file name and extension) can be a maximum of 79
characters long and can contain blank spaces. If you do not give the
output picture a new name, an error message appears. Each picture in a
graphics file must have a unique name.
Delete Files
OK
Delete Pictures
OK
This option allows you to delete pictures from a graphics file. Many
pictures can be deleted in one execution of Delete Picture. A verification
dialog box is presented to give you a second chance before deletion
occurs.
Confirm Deletion(s)
Before the deletion occurs, the picture list is redisplayed and shows the
pictures selected for deletion in a black background. Clicking OK again
executes the deletion. A list of the deleted files appears in the
Z-MAP Plus System Window.
Compressing Files
Overview
Use the Edit menu options in the Z-MAP Plus window to perform the
following actions. (Edit menu options are active only if a picture is
selected.)
Graphics Editor (page 158) Delete or modify graphic
elements (features) from the currently active picture.
Data Editor (page 174) Edit and create data files in the
Edit/Create Data dialog box.
Color Table (page 209) Show the current Color Table display
and the Edit Color Table dialog box, which you use to open, save,
copy and edit color tables.
Color Indices (page 218) Display a list of graphic elements
and modify the colors or color table cells associated with the
elements.
Graphics Editor
Use the Graphics Editor options to delete or modify graphic elements in
the current map or cross section. The edits affect only the display. Data
files are not modified.
Delete Features
Deletes all or some of the features in the current picture (such as text or
contours). A list of features will be presented for you to select from.
When you have chosen the features to delete, the selected features will
be deleted.
If you execute this option and then change your mind about what was
deleted, you can get all of the just deleted features back, if you go
immediately to Undelete Last Deleted Feature. Do not perform any
other procedure. Selecting Undelete Last Deleted Feature will restore
what was deleted, as long as no other options were executed between
deletion and undeletion.
OK & return to
Z-MAP Plus main menu
Editing Procedures
On selecting Edit Edit Selected Feature, you are first given the
opportunity to choose which features will be available for editing in this
session. The Select Item menu appears and you have the following
options:
Select Item with Cursor
Pick a Menu Option
Normally, you will go directly to the picture and select the feature you
want to modify.
If you cannot find the feature, try to select the feature again, window in
to make it easier to find, or re-enter Edit, Edit Selected Features and
select only the graphics feature you want to modify.
Edit Text
You can display the Edit Text dialog box from Edit All Features and
Edit Selected Features. Use the Edit Text dialog box to move, copy,
delete, and change parameters (such as size, color, and font) of the text
you have selected. You return to the Select Item menu after the edit is
performed.
Key In Location
Key In Location enables you to enter the x,y coordinates for the new
position of the selected text. This x,y position refers to the lower left,
lower right, or center of the text as specified when this text was last
placed on the picture.
New X-Location and New Y-Location (Plotter Units) To
move or copy selected text, enter numbers that represent the x and
y values of the desired destination. This is measured in plotter
units
(in./cm.) from the lower left corner of the plot (established by the
lower X-offset and left Y-offset).
Location Mode Location Mode enables you to define the part
of the text positioned in a new location. You select a new location
by clicking mouse Button 1 with the cursor in the appropriate
position.
Text Justification Use this parameter to control where text
is positioned relative to a new location point you select. The
options for this parameter are:
Lower Left (default setting) Positions the text so that its
lower left corner is at the new location point.
Lower Right Positions the text so that its lower right corner
is at the new location point.
Center Positions the text so that its center (vertical and
horizontal center) is at the new location point.
Delete Text
Delete Text Removes the selected text immediately and returns
you to the Select Item menu.
To restore the deleted text, click Undo Last Edit in the Select Item
dialog box. The deleted text is restored, provided nothing else has
been done since the deletion.
Change Parameters
Click the Change Parameters button to display a dialog box for
changing any of the following attributes for the currently selected text
string: Angle of rotation, font, height (size), color, and the text string.
Rotation To rotate the currently selected text string, enter a
number for the angle of rotation, measured counterclockwise from
the horizontal plane (where zero = horizontal). The text string
rotates from the point (lower left, lower right, or center) currently
selected as the reference point for posting the text.
Font This parameter controls which font (typeface) is used to
display the text. The choices are shown at left.
Height Enter a value in plotter units (in./cm.) to define the
height of the text.
Color To select the text color, enter the color index number or
click the color button.
To select the color index from the color table, enter a number from
0 to 255.
Click the button next to the Color box, and the Select a Color
Index dialog box appears. Select the color you want from the color
buttons. Use the scroll bar to see other color indices and their
associated colors.
If the color table is the default Z-MAP Plus color table, the first
eight color indices and their associated colors are as shown in the
following table.
To look at the color table settings for the current picture, select
View Color Color Table.
String New text can be entered to replace the text you have
selected. This may be up to 80 characters long and may contain
internal blanks. You can use upper and lowercase characters with
all fonts except Plain.
Edit Lines
Use the Edit Lines dialog box to delete or change the parameters of the
selected line (such as line type, color, and symbol).
Change Parameters
Use the Change Parameters option to specify the line pattern, color,
length, spacing, and direction of hachures; length and spacing of dashes;
type and height of the posted symbols; each line vertex; and the weight
of bold lines.
Line Pattern Line Pattern controls what pattern is used to draw
a line. Select a pattern from the popup menu.
Line Color To select a color for displaying the line, use one of
these methods:
Color Index Value Enter a color index value from 0 to 255
to select the color.
Color Button Click the color button. In the Select a Color
Index dialog box that appears, select a color from the standard
palette. To see other color indices and their associated colors
use the scroll bar.
To see the first eight color indices and colors in the default
Z-MAP Plus color table, see page 172.
To see the current pictures color table settings, select View
Color Color Table.
Hachure Length To set the length of hachures, enter a value in
plotter units (in./cm.). The default hachure length is .05 cm.
Hachure Spacing Enter a value in plotter units (in./cm.) to set
the spacing along the line between hachures. This defaults to 0.5
cm. This will control how close together the hachures are placed.
Hachure Direction Hachure Direction controls which side of
the line the hachures are drawn. To determine which side of the
line is being referred to, the program looks at the way the line data
is stored. It begins from the first point on the line and draws
hachures either to the right or left of the point. Possible choices for
this parameter include:
Right (default) Hachures are drawn on the right side of the
line when moving along the line in the order the line vertices
were entered.
Left Hachures are drawn on the left side of the line when
moving along the line in the order the line vertices were
entered.
Dash Length Enter a value in plotter units (in./cm.) to set the
length of the line (dash) portion of the dashed line. This defaults to
a value of 1.
Dash Spacing Enter a value in plotter units (in./cm.) to set the
length of the space (gap) portion of the dashed line. This defaults
to a value of 1.
Symbol Code To replace the current symbol, enter the number
of the new marker (symbol) you want to use. This defaults to a
value of 1.
The following table shows some standard symbol code numbers
and their associated symbols.
0 No Symbol
1 Plus
2 X
Edit Markers
In the Edit Markers dialog box, choose Move, Copy, Delete, and
Change Parameters (such as size, color, and symbol) for the currently
selected Marker (symbol).
Delete Marker
To delete the selected marker, select the Delete Marker option. The
deletion occurs immediately.
To restore the deleted marker, click the Undo Last Edit button in the
Select Item dialog box. This only works if nothing else has been selected
since the deletion.
Change Parameters
Change Parameters enables you to specify the marker type (symbol
code), its size, and color.
Marker Type
To replace the current marker symbol, enter the number of the new
marker you want to use. This defaults to 1.
Some standard symbol code numbers and their associated symbols
include:
0 No Symbol
1 Plus
2 X
3 Square
4 Circle with a dot in it
5 X with horizontal line top and base
6 X with vertical line left and right side
7 X with lines all four sides
8 Diamond
9 Triangle
10 Asterisk
26 Dry Hole
28 Gas Show
30 Gas
48 Oil
50 Oil and Gas
60 Oil Show
62 Oil and Gas Show
For examples of the markers in the extended set used in Z-MAP Plus,
see Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns on page 791.
Marker Size
You can enter a value in plotter units (in./cm.) which defines the size of
the Marker. This defaults to 0.07 cm.
Marker Color
To select the color for displaying the marker, use one of these methods:
Color Index Value Enter a color index value from 0 to 255 to
select the color.
Color Button Click the color button. In the Select a Color
Index dialog box that appears, select a color from the standard
palette. To see other color indices and their associated colors use
the scroll bar.
The following table shows the default Z-MAP Plus color tables first
eight color index values and their associated colors.
To see the current pictures color table settings, select View Color
Color Table.
Edit Area
Use the Edit Area dialog box to delete or change the color of the
currently selected area.
Change Parameters
Use the Change Parameters setting to delete or change the color in the
currently selected area.
Fill Color
To select a color to use to display the Fill Color marker, enter the color
index number or click the color button. To select the color index from
the color table, enter a value from 0 to 255.
If you click the color button next to the entry field, the Select a Color
Index dialog box appears. Select a color in the Select a Color Index
dialog box. To see other color indices and their associated colors, use the
scroll bar.
To see the default Z-MAP Plus color tables first eight color indices and
their associated colors, see the table on page 172.
To see the current pictures color table settings, select View Color
Color Table.
Data Editor
The Data Editor displays the Edit/Create Data dialog box. This dialog
box enables you to edit and create data files. You can see the changes
you are making to the data file reflected in the picture displayed. Any
data in the Area of Interest (AOI) of the present picture and on the
attached MFDs or OpenWorks can be edited. Both data used to create
the currently displayed picture and data not used to create the picture (on
attached MFDs or OpenWorks) can be edited.
In order to begin editing or creating data, you must have a picture
currently active. If one is not active, you may select to work on an old
picture or create a picture.
You can select the files you want to edit, or you can allow the program
to select the data files on which your current picture is based. Each file
used to create the current picture will automatically be selected.
Unless you cancel the editing session, the results of the editing session
are reflected in the MFD and ZGF. The following types of data can be
edited or created:
Control Points
Seismic Data
Contours
Faults
Profiles
Vertices (Line Inflection Points)
Grid Node Values
These edit/create data files are stored in the specified MFD or in the
OpenWorks project.
Any feature on your current picture can be altered. The program creates
a set of data during each execution of contouring, posting, and lines. The
changes to the current picture will be stored on the graphics file you
designate.
Points
Using your cursor on the currently displayed picture, you can edit
control point data, such as Well Data and Seismic Data. You may
window, pan or zoom in on any point while editing.
Options include:
Cursor Move
View/Edit
Area Edit
Undo
Delete
Undelete
Create Point
Select File
Select Fields
Display Parameters
Autoset Parameters
Cursor Move
Use the Cursor Move option to graphically reposition one or more
control points in your currently displayed picture.
If you select Cursor Move, the Cursor Move dialog box appears,
followed by the prompt:
SELECT POINT TO MOVE OR DISMISS
Select a control point to move by clicking it. A dialog box appears,
followed by the prompt:
INPUT NEW X,Y LOCATION
Position the cursor at the target location for the control point and click.
The control point automatically moves to the new location. The Cursor
Move dialog box and the SELECT POINT TO MOVE OR DISMISS
prompt appear. You can reposition another control point or exit the
Cursor Move mode by selecting OK. The changes you made to your
data file during the editing session are saved automatically when you
close the Edit/Create Data menu.
View/Edit
Use the View/Edit option to edit values of points along the currently
selected line. If you select a point, all the points data values are
displayed. You can then perform a keyboard edit on any of the points
values.
The following prompt appears:
SELECT POINT TO EDIT OR DISMISS
Once you select a point, a dialog box appears and reports current
information about the selected control point. If you have selected to edit
certain fields of information (under Select Fields), only those fields are
displayed. You can change the value for any field that appears, then
click OK to save the edits, or click Cancel to close the dialog box
without saving changes. The selected control point is highlighted during
editing.
Area Edit
When Area Edit is selected, you can edit all of the control points in an
area that you specify. Area Edit can edit all points inside or outside a
polygon or the current view (portion of the picture currently displayed).
Area Edit has the following capabilities:
deletion of points
blanking (converting to ZNON) all, one, or currently selected
Z-fields
change one Z-field to a constant value
These features are particularly useful when you are trying to set all of
the control points in an area to a constant, such as a ZNON. For example,
you may have the end of a seismic line that has totally invalid time
values, and you want to set all of the shotpoints equal to ZNON in order
to create a reasonable grid despite the bad values.
There are several options under Area Edit:
Select Polygon File
Select Polygon
Create Polygon
Current View
Parameters
Edit Field
Select Point File
Select Polygon
You can select a specific polygon from the active files. Values for points
inside or outside the polygon can be changed. The polygon(s) from the
Polygon File you have just selected will appear on your picture. Select
the polygon you wish to use for editing.
Create Polygon
Using your cursor, you can draw a polygon on your map. Values for
points inside or outside the polygon can be changed.
Current View
You can use the portion of your map that is on the graphics screen as the
area to edit. If your entire map is still displayed, you may window (or
zoom in) on a smaller portion of the map and use that area as the current
area to edit.
Parameters
Use Selection of Parameter to select an Operation to perform on the area
to edit, such as deleting a control point and setting Z fields to ZNONS.
You may also specify a Fill Value, which is a number (such as the value
for ZNON) that you would like to set several control points equal to.
You may also select as an Area to Edit either the region Inside the area
you selected, or Outside the area you selected to edit.
Operation
In the area you have defined for editing, you can perform the following
processes:
Delete Points
Blank All Z Fields
Blank Currently Selected Fields
Blank One Z Field
Replace Value For One Z Field
Fill Value
The fill value is the Z-Value that you wish to assign to the points in the
area you have selected for editing. For example, you may want to make
all values in the area ZNONs. The fill value would then the value you
have defined for null data.
Area to Edit
You can perform editing operations either Inside or Outside the
polygon you have defined.
Edit Field
A list of fields appears. Select the field which contains the point values
you wish to change.
Undo
Undo enables you to restore the last edit you performed to the way it was
before editing. Undo will undo the last point edit, such as a cursor move
or a view edit. If you invoke undo while editing points using area edit,
and the editor does not restore the points, you can recover these points
by selecting Edit Edit Create Data Cancel Edit.
Delete
Delete will omit a control point that you select with the cursor from your
edited datafile. If you decide that you didnt really want the control point
deleted, you may put it back by selecting undelete.
Undelete
Undelete brings back a control point you deleted. The control points
that have been deleted will be highlighted, and you may select one to put
back. The control point is then put back into your edited datafile.
Create Point
Use the Create Point option to add one or more points to the existing
file.
Place the cursor at the target location for the new control point. A dialog
box appears with information about the fields that you have stored with
this dataset. The location is filled in automatically, but you specify the
Z fields and other information you want to save with the new control
point. Select OK to save the information that you have typed in, or
Cancel to return to the Point edit menu and not save the new control
point. If you would like to enter all of the information for the new
control point, you may select the option Key X, Y to enter the location
of the new data point as well as any additional fields that you would like
to save with it.
Key X, Y
You can use the Key X, Y option to enter values for the x,y location of
the new point. You can also enter values for the point fields, such as the
Z field and Well ID File.
X-field Enter the value for the X coordinate of the new point.
Y-field Enter the value for the Y coordinate of the new point.
Z-field Enter the value for the Z field of the new point.
Field Values Field names for the fields on the point dataset you
are editing also appear on the Key X, Y dialog box. Assign a value
appropriate to each of the fields listed, e.g., Z-value or Well ID. Up
to 10 fields can appear on one dialog box. Values for up to 50 fields
can be assigned.
Select File
Select File enables you to select a file for adding a point, i.e., it answers
the question: Which edit file (file selected for editing) gets the new point
written to it?
On this menu you are selecting among datasets which have already been
selected for editing. For example, your active picture may have both
seismic shotpoint data and well control point data posted on it. Your
selection will decide whether the editor applies the area edit to the
seismic data or to the well data.
Select File
Select File is useful for getting an additional file to edit. For example,
your active picture may have had seismic shotpoint data posted, but you
may want to edit the well data values in addition to the seismic data
values.
Select File enables you to select a file for adding a point, i.e., it answers
the question: Which edit file (file selected for editing) gets the new point
written to it?
You may select datasets which have already been selected for editing.
For example, your active picture may have been built using both a
seismic shotpoint data file and a well control point file. Your selection
will decide whether the editor applies the area edit to the seismic data or
to the well data.
To remove a dataset from editing, you must use the Select Files option
on the Edit/Create Data main menu.
Select Fields
Select Fields enables you to select the point dataset you want to edit, and
the fields on that dataset which you want to edit.
Select Fields
A list of fields is presented. You can choose to edit all fields, or one or
more fields. Select Fields limits the fields displayed for View/Edit. This
option is helpful for datasets with more fields than will fit on a dialog
box (ten). Select Fields gives you the chance of viewing only those
fields you are interested in editing, and if at all possible, to view them
on one dialog box.
Display Parameters
Use the Display Parameters option to see the options for displaying
control point information for the current map. This option is useful if
you have not posted your control points on the map, but would like to
see them now in order to edit them. (This option only changes the
posting of point data in the editor. This option under Line Posting
actually changes the picture.) The Display Parameters options are:
Select Fields
Sizes/Colors
Locations
Select File
Post Symbol/Value Options
Select Fields
Use the Select Fields option to select a field, such as a Z field to post on
the picture around the control point.
Sizes/Colors
Use the Sizes/Colors option to choose a symbol number, size, color, and
a value (Z field) size and color for the points that you are posting. Sizes
are expressed in plotter units (in./cm.).
Symbol Size This is the size of the symbol you are posting with
your points. The value for Symbol Size is expressed in plotter units
(in./cm.).
Symbol Number Symbol Number is the number of the symbol
in the Extended Symbol Set. Examples of the symbols and their
numbers can be found in Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line
Patterns on page 791.
Symbol Color Symbol Color is the color of the symbol
representing the control point value. Using a number from 0255,
indicate the color for the posted symbol. If you click the color box,
a palette of 256 colors appears. Click to select the color you want.
Value Size Value Size is the size of the number or text
representing the field value, expressed in plotter units (in./cm.).
Value Color Value Color is the color of the number or text
representing the control point value. Using a number from 0255,
indicate the color for the posted grid node value. If you click the
color box, a palette of 256 colors appears. Click to select the color
you want.
Locations
Location enables you to select where you would like to see any selected
field values posted in relation to the symbol.
A list of fields on the file you are editing appears. For each field you
have selected to post, indicate where you would like the value to appear.
The choices are to post the value Above, Below, Right, or Left of the
symbol.
Select File
Select File enables you to select the dataset for which you want to
establish display parameters.
Autoset Parameters
Use the Autoset Parameters option to specify defaults for creating
points.
You can specify values by selecting the files used to create a particular
picture. The Autoset feature is useful for many sorts of editing tasks and
can be used for all data types. The Autoset capability is useful both if
you are creating a dataset or are editing/adding to an existing dataset.
Autoset works with control points, vertex data, and fault files.
Autoset can be invoked from Point Edit, Line Edit, and Create Data.
Select Type
Like the Select File options, Select Type is a choice among already
selected files. It answers the question: For which type of file do you
want to set Autoset Parameters?
Once you select a file for Autoset Parameters, The program computes
values for new points in the file according to the new parameter values.
Clear
Clear will erase all the parameter values selected in the Autoset
Parameters dialog box.
Reshape Contours
Reshape Contours provides a way to edit a contour line. Reshape also
provides smoothing of edited contour lines.
There are three main steps to the Reshape Contours process:
1. Select the contour line on the active map that you want to reshape.
X marks appear along the selected contour line, marking the points
on the line you can move.
2. Select the point you want to move.
3. Select the new location for the selected point.
The contour will be redefined and reshaped according to the point you
have chosen, the new destination you have chosen for the point, and the
points on the contour line which have remained fixed.
You can reshape lines by selecting and moving a reshaping point, or
point of inflection. Reshape Contours fits a curve through the three
closest reshaping points.
If you do not want to reshape the line using a marked point (a point of
inflection along the contour), you can add and delete points which are
able to be moved. To remove reshaping points which you do not want
to influence the shape of the new line, use the Add/Delete Points option.
The ability to add and delete reshaping points gives you more control
over the shape of the new contour. When you delete reshaping points,
a larger segment of the line can be reshaped. When you add reshaping
points, a smaller segment of the line can be reshaped.
The results of the reshape operation can be viewed immediately, and
changes can be made until the line fits with the desired interpretation.
The reshaped contour can now become input for other Z-MAP Plus
operations, such as Contour to Grid.
Select Line
Use the cursor to select a contour line to reshape.
Move Point
A prompt appears directing you to select a point to move. Contours are
reshaped if you select a marked point of inflection to move, then select
the new location for the point of inflection. Use the cursor to select the
point to move in the contour line.
Add
This option enables you to add reshaping points to the contour line.
Adding reshaping points permits a smaller segment of the contour to
be reshaped.
Contours are reshaped when you choose a marked point of inflection to
move and select the new location for the point of inflection. The Add
Point feature enables you to reshape contour lines using points other
than the points of inflection. To add a point, use your cursor to input the
location of the new inflection (reshaping) point.
Delete
Contours are reshaped when you choose a marked point of inflection to
move and select the new location for that point of inflection. The Delete
Point feature enables you to eliminate points of inflection which you do
not want to use in reshaping the contour. To delete a point, use your
cursor to select the inflection point which you wish to omit. The Delete
Point feature enables you to reshape a larger segment of the contour line.
Break
Use the Break option to cut a line into separate parts. For example, if you
accidentally cross a fault with a contour, you can break the contour at
the fault and delete the part of the contour that crosses the fault
incorrectly.
There are two ways that you can break a line:
Individually
At a Line
Individually means that you will be using the cursor to input a break
point on a line. When you select to break an individual line, the program
will prompt you to select a break point on a line. The program will place
an X in the spot you have selected with your cursor.
At a Line means that you may break a line where it intersects another
line. For example, you may decide to break all of the contours at a
coastline, so that you can later delete the contours that are onshore. This
option is especially useful when contours and faults have been digitized.
The tiny contour segments inside fault polygons need to be cleaned up
before going to contour gridding.
Type to Break
If you select to Break At a Line, you must select the Type of Line To
Break, and the dataset you want broken (for example, contours of grid
A or grid B, or fault set 1 or fault set 2). From the list of line types that
appears, select a line type to break at line intersections.
Extend
Use the Extend option to continue an existing line (such as a contour or
fault line). For example, if contouring did not extend all of the contour
lines to the map border, you can use this option to make the contour lines
end neatly at the border.
When Extend is selected, you need to select a line to extend, then input
points where you would like the line to go. When your line is complete,
there are several options to end the line:
End End stops the line at the last specified point.
Break/Connect Break/Connect breaks a line and connects one
of the line segments that result to another line.
Attach To End Attach to End attaches the last point selected to
the end of another line.
Delete Extra End Delete Extra End has the same effects as
End, except the part of the original line that was not extended is
deleted.
Delete Extra Break/connect Delete Extra Break/Connect is
the same as Break/Connect, but the piece of the connect line which
was not connected is deleted. The original line that was not
extended is also deleted.
Delete Extra Attach To End Delete Extra Attach to End
deletes the old segment of line after you attach to another line. It is
the same as Attach to End.
Delete Last Delete Last deletes the last point you input.
Smooth
Smoothing will fit a curve through points that you have input when you
created a line.
When you select Smooth, a prompt appears directing you to do one of
two things:
select a line to smooth
change the defaults for which lines are subject to smoothing
Change Options
Use the Change Opts feature to change the smoothing defaults for each
data file you are editing. The default values for line types are:
Yes Always smooth the line.
No Do not smooth the new lines.
Query Asks if you desire smoothing.
Depending on the type of line selected, these defaults are initially set to:
Yes for contours
Query for faults
No for vertex files
You need at least three points in order to smooth a line (two points
already is a smooth straight line). This is very useful when you are trying
to input fault data or contours because it will give them a smooth
appearance instead of a jagged straight line appearance.
The Smoothing Options dialog box lists the Line files subject to
smoothing. If you do not want to accept the defaults which are imposed
on each line type, you can indicate whether you want smoothing for each
of the line types.
Delete
Delete is designed to eliminate a line (contour, or fault). To delete a line,
place the cursor on the line that you would like to delete and select it. If
you have deleted a line by mistake, you may select Undelete to get your
line back. Use OK when you are finished deleting lines.
Undelete
Undelete will retrieve a line that has been eliminated (deleted). If you
have deleted the wrong line for example, undelete will allow you to get
your line back. After undelete is selected, the lines that have been
deleted will be highlighted. You may select the line to put back with the
cursor. Use Dismiss when you are finished undeleting lines.
New Line
Us the New Line option to create a new line. If it is a contour, you will
also be asked to enter a value for the contour level. Sketch in the new
line using your cursor on the picture. If the smooth option is set to query,
you will need to decide whether to smooth the line. If the smooth option
is set to yes, the line will be smoothed automatically.
Point Edit
Point Edit is used to edit vertex points on a line. First select the line with
the cursor. Points along the line will be displayed. You may select to
modify point values, move, delete, or add a point. You may also change
the way the points are displayed.
Select Files
You must have a file selected in order to edit line data, so this option
should be selected only if you would like to access some file in addition
to files you originally selected to edit.
Display Parameters
Display Parameters will allow you to select how you would like lines
displayed on your map in order to help you edit them. There are three
options:
By Line By Line will allow you to select how to display each
line.
All of a Type All of a Type will allow you to display all of the
lines that are the same type (e.g., all contour lines) with the same
end and with the same posting parameters.
Change Default Change Defaults enables you to change the
way new lines of a file type are displayed. It does not change the
way current lines are displayed.
These methods of display allow you to change the line color, the
line type (solid, dashed, etc.), the thickness of bold lines, length of
gaps and dashes if you have dashed lines, etc.
Autoset Parameters
Use the Autoset Parameters option to specify default values for new
lines.
The editors Autoset Parameters capability enables you to get values
from the files which are selected for editing. For example, a grid can be
used to determine Z-values for new points which you will input. The
Autoset feature is useful for many sorts of editing tasks and can be used
for all data types. The Autoset capability is useful both when you are
creating a new dataset and when you are editing/adding to an existing
dataset. Autoset works with control points, vertex data, and fault files.
You can invoke Autoset from Point Edit, Line Edit, and Create Data.
Select Type
Like the Select File options, Select Type is a choice among already
selected files. It answers the question: For which file do you want to set
Autoset Parameters?
Grid Nodes
Select this option to edit grid node values. Grid nodes are calculated in
the gridding option. You may change grid node values, or set grid nodes
equal to ZNON (null data value). When you edit grid nodes directly,
there is no need to re-grid (since this procedure is directly changing the
grid). After you select to edit grid nodes, the grid nodes will be drawn
on your screen.
Change Values
Select this option to change the value of a grid node. For example, if the
grid node had a value of 7543, and you would like it to have a value of
7500, select Change Values. You may then select the grid node whose
value you want to change. Select the grid node you want to edit with
your cursor. You will then see a dialog box that has the current value,
and you may enter the new value. The status area shows the values of
the surrounding grid nodes. You can change values for as many grid
nodes as you like. Select OK to save the changes, or Cancel if you do
not want the changes saved.
Interpolate Values
Select this option to see x, y, and z values for any point on the map. The
program interpolates values based on the values of the surrounding grid
nodes. The Z-value appears on the map. The information for the selected
point appears in the Z-MAP Plus System window.
Area Edit
The Area Edit option will change all of the grid nodes in an area. This is
especially useful for setting large regions of a grid to ZNON (null data
value). When area edit is selected, you may designate an area to edit
with the cursor, or you may select an existing polygon from a previously
created polygon file. You may also use the current view of the picture
on the screen as the area to edit if you do not want to use a polygon file.
You will then get a dialog box where you may enter the value (fill value)
that you would like the grid nodes in the area to have, and you may
select to change the grid nodes either inside or outside of the area that
you selected to edit.
Select Polygon
If a polygon already exists on a the active picture, you can select it.
Selecting the polygon will confine the grid node edit to the area enclosed
by the polygon.
Create Polygon
The purpose of Create Polygon is to allow you to define the area in
which they wish to edit grid node values. Using your cursor, draw a
polygon on your map. Values for points inside or outside the polygon
can be changed.
End And Close will complete the continuous perimeter of the polygon.
The first point of the polygon will become the last point, so that the
polygon is closed.
Delete Last will delete the last line segment you have drawn on the
picture.
Current View
You may use the portion of your map that is on the graphics screen as
the area to edit. If your entire map is still displayed, you may window
(or zoom in) on a smaller portion of the map and use that area as the
current area to edit.
Set Parameters
This dialog box enables you to enter a replacement value for Z-values
inside the polygon.
Fill Value The Fill Value is the Z-value you want to enter for
the grid area inside or outside the polygon. For example, if you
would like all of the grid nodes inside the polygon to be replaced
by a ZNON, enter the value you are using as the null data value.
Fill Inside/Outside Polygon The replacement Z-value can be
applied to the area Inside or Outside the polygon.
Select File
Use this to select a grid to edit, if the file that you selected from the main
Edit/Create menu is not the file that you really need.
Post Values
Post Values labels the grid nodes with their values. This is useful if you
have not previously labeled the grid node values on your map and need
to see the values in order to determine which ones to edit. You may
change how the grid node symbols and the Z-values appear and control
how much of the grid is posted, the symbol size, color, and symbol
number. If you would like to post values at only a few grid nodes, you
may select Selective Post and only display values for those grid nodes
that you select with the cursor.
Symbol Parameters
This dialog box enables you to set values controlling posted symbols.
Post Symbol at Node Locations The options are to Post or
Omit symbols at grid node locations.
Symbol Size This is the size of the symbol to be posted in
plotter units (in./cm.).
Symbol Color Using a number from 0 255, indicate the color
index for the posted symbol. If you click the color box, a palette of
256 colors appears. Click to select the color you want.
Marker Number Marker Number refers to the number of the
symbol in the Extended Symbol Set. Examples of the symbols and
their numbers can be found in Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and
Line Patterns on page 791.
Value Parameters
This dialog box enables you to control the posting of grid symbols at
symbol locations.
Post Value at Symbol Locations This option enables you to
post the Z-value of the grid node at symbol locations on the picture
you are editing. To post the grid node value, choose Post. If you do
not wish to post the grid node value with the symbol, choose Omit.
Value Size The Value Size is the size of the number
representing the grid node Z value, expressed in display units
(inches or centimeters).
Value Color Value Color is the color of the numbers
representing the grid node Z value. Using a number from 0255,
indicate the color for the posted grid node value. If you click the
color box, a palette of 256 colors appears. Click to select the color
you want.
Number of Decimals This value refers to the number of digits
to the right of the decimal. Indicate how many decimal places you
want to post for your grid values.
Row, Rate, and Column Parameters First and Last Row, Row
Rate, First and Last Column, and Column Rate all refer to the
placement of grid node values in the rows and columns of the grid.
Starting and Ending Row, Row Rate, and Starting and Ending
Rate, all refer to the configuration of symbols in the rows and
columns of the grid. These parameters are useful if you would like
to display only a subset of grid nodes on your map. For example,
you may want to start with the 5th row and column of grid nodes
and end with the 20th row and column. You could choose to post
every 3rd row (Row Rate) to have an idea of the grid node values
in a problem area.
Selective Post
Instead of using parameter values to select which grid nodes are to be
posted, you can select grid nodes to be posted with your cursor.
Create Data
Create Data uses an existing picture as a graphic aid to create data files.
The data you create using the editor will be stored in an MFD or
OpenWorks unless you use the Update Files option or Cancel Edit
option on the Edit/Create Data main menu.
Select Create Data if you would like to create a data file instead of
editing an existing file. You can create the following types of files:
Contours (CNTR)
Faults (FALT)
Polylines (VERT)
Profiles (DATA)
Control Points (DATA)
You must select the type of data that you would like to create (contour,
fault, etc.), give it a file name, and select an MFD or OpenWorks to save
it on. You may also create extra fields of data (except for X, Y, and
Segment ID and describe what those fields are. X, Y, and Segment ID
may not be used as extra fields of data (these are already required fields
of data for lines).
Contour
Select Contour in order to create a contour file. You will need to select
contours as the type of data to create, give the contour data a file name,
select a destination MFD or OpenWorks to saving the file, and describe
any additional fields that you have. You may use the cursor on your map
in order to input the contour data. You will be asked to enter a contour
level number for each new contour that you input. Contours are
automatically smoothed unless smoothing options have been changed.
Fault
Fault enables you to create a fault file. You will need to select faults as
the type of data to create, give the fault data a file name, select an MFD
or OpenWorks to write the file to, and describe any additional fields that
you have. You may use the cursor on your map in order to input the fault
data. You may also smooth out the created faults by answering Yes to
the menu that asks if you would like to smooth the line. If you would
like to leave the line just as you have drawn it, answer No to the
smoothing question. When creating a New Fault File, you can also
choose to Autoset Extra Fields and to Snap Vertices to Point Locations;
see Set File Parameters on page 192 for information about these two
options.
Polyline
Polyline enables you to create a line of data. You may enter lines for
coastlines, state or national boundaries, lease lines, etc. You will need to
select polylines as the type of data to create, give the line data a file
name, select an MFD or OpenWorks to write the file to, and describe
any additional fields that you have. You may use the cursor on your map
in order to input the line data. Polylines will not be smoothed until
smoothing options have been changed. When creating a New Line File,
you can also choose to Autoset Extra Fields and to Snap Vertices to
Point Locations; see Set File Parameters on page 192 for information
about these two options
Profile\
Profile enables you to create profile lines. Profiles are vertex lines that
also have a depth (Z) value, so they usually have X, Y, SEG ID, and Z
as their fields. Profiles are useful to input additional information in areas
where there is not enough data to create a reasonable surface model. For
example, if you have an isolated fault block with two wells, inputting
profile data will allow you to have enough data to create a reasonable
contour map in the area.
Once profile data has been created you may use it in gridding. A dialog
box will appear that will allow you to input the Z-value for each vertex
point that you enter. You will need to select profiles as the type of data
to create, give the profile data a file name, select an MFD to write the
file to, and describe any additional fields that you have. You may use the
cursor on your map in order to input the profile data. When creating a
New Profile File, you can also choose to Autoset Extra Fields and to
Snap Vertices to Point Locations; see Set File Parameters on
page 192 for information about these two options.
Control Point
Use Control Point to create well or seismic data in the current map with
the cursor. You may also input several Z-fields if you would like to. You
will need to select control points as the type of data to create, give the
control point data a file name, select an MFD to write the file to, and
describe any additional fields that you have. You may use the cursor on
your map in order to input the control point data. When creating a New
Control Point File, you can also choose to Autoset Extra Fields and to
Snap Vertices to Point Locations; see Set File Parameters on
page 192 for information about these two options.
Field Descriptors
This dialog box enables you to describe fields on the file you are
creating. The values entered on this dialog box describe fields in
addition to the ones required by each of the specific data types being
created. Field description is not allowed for contour data. For new fault,
line, and profile files, you may describe up to eight fields in addition to
X, Y, and Segment ID. For control point files, you may describe up to
eight fields in addition to X and Y.
This dialog box can appear up to eight times, one time for each of the
additional fields you have specified for the new data you are creating.
Each of the parameter values should be set to match the specific field (1
8) which is being described.
Field Name This dialog box enables you to name one or more
of the fields you specified for the data you are creating. The
number of fields you can name depends on the number of fields
you specified in the Filename, Master File Name, and Number of
Fields dialog box. You can specify a as many as eight fields in
addition to the required fields for the kind of data you are creating.
Supply a Field Name for each of the additional fields which will
appear on the file you are creating. The dialog box will appear as
many times as there are fields to be described.
Field Type There are eight choices for Field Type: Z-value,
Text Size, Character Size, Symbol Code, Delta Z-Throw, Dip
Angle, Color, and Other Field Types. For each time the dialog box
appears assign the appropriate field type for each of the additional
fields in the data you are creating.
Number of Characters (Text Field Only) This number refers
to the number of characters in the character string. It applies only
to the Text Field.
Regrid
You can regrid:
a polygonal area of a grid
the area of the active picture (view limits) currently displayed
the area of the picture (picture limits)
After you have edited data, such as control point or contour data, you
may regrid the edited area by selecting Regrid. Regrid will calculate
new grid node values using the data that you select (usually you want to
use the edited data you just created) and it will smoothly patch the new
grid node values into the original grid. Only the grid nodes in the
selected area can change. Since regrid has to make calculations over the
area that you specify, it is advisable to regrid in the edited area only - for
this reason, regrid is much quicker if you keep the edited area as small
as possible.
When using contour data, Regrid will use the CTOG (contour to grid)
algorithm to regrid. When possible, Regrid will use the same algorithm
and parameters that were used in building the original grid.
Set Limits
Set Limits enables you to select where you would like regridding to
occur. You may select a polygon file, then a polygon to limit the
regridding, or you may create a new polygon to control where
regridding will take place, You may also use the current view on the
screen as the area to regrid.
Select Polygon File You may select a polygon from an existing
file as your area to regrid, or create a new polygon using the cursor
on your map. The polygon may then be used for as the area to
regrid.
Select Polygon Enables you to select a specific polygon from
the active files. Values for points inside or outside the polygon can
be regridded. The polygon(s) on the Polygon File you have
selected will appear on your picture. Select the polygon you wish
to use in regridding.
Create Polygon Using your cursor, draw a polygon on your
map. Values for points inside or outside the polygon can be
regridded.
View Limits When you select View Limits, you are indicating
that you want to regrid in the area currently displayed on the
picture on your Graphics Display.
Picture Limit When you select Picture Limit, you are
indicating that you want to regrid in the entire area of the picture.
Set Flags After the area to regrid has been established, you can
determine how regridding will treat null values in the original grid,
and what regridding will do with regridded nulls. You also specify
whether the program regrids inside or outside the polygon you
have defined.
Replace Nulls in Grid with Regrid Values Replace Nulls
in Grid with Regrid Values will allow regridding to calculate a
good grid node value for grid nodes in the edited area that were
previously calculated as ZNONs (null data values).
Replace Values in Grid with Regrid Nulls Replace Values
in Grid with Regrid Nulls will allow regridding to replace grid
nodes in the edit area that previously had a data value with the
ZNON value.
Files/Fields
Select Files/Fields in order to select the files that you would like to have
an effect on regridding, or in order to select fields of data to be used in
regridding, if several Z fields exist. After you select the files/fields to
regrid, you will be asked for the output file name and the destination
MFD or OpenWorks.
Select Regrid Contour File If you would like your regrid files
and fields to be based on a contour file, select the contour file to be
used.
Select Regrid Fault File If you would like your regrid files and
fields to be based on a fault file, select the fault file you want.
Select Regrid Profile File If you would like your regrid files
and fields to be based on a profile file, select the profile file you
want.
Select Regrid Profile Z-field A list of fields on your profile file
appears. Select the Z-field you would like to use in regridding.
Select Regrid Point File If you would like a Point File to be
used in Regridding, select the point file you wish to use.
Select Regrid Point Z-field Select the Z-field from your Point
File which you wish to use in Regridding.
Select Grid To Regrid Select the Grid whose values are to be
recalculated.
Auto Regrid
Auto Regrid will regrid your edited area using default parameters that
have been calculated based on your data.
Manual Regrid
Manual Regrid enables you to enter your own parameters to control how
grid node values are calculated. You will be asked to select a gridding
method (line gridding, point gridding, etc.), and Gridding Parameters
(see help on gridding if you need further help on gridding parameters).
Not all gridding methods are valid with all data types. For example, the
only gridding method that works with contours is CTOG. You will only
be allowed to select a gridding method that is valid for the (current) data
selected for regridding.
Select Method This dialog box enables you to select a gridding
method with which to perform the regrid. Select the method of
gridding you want to use in the regrid area.
Parameters A list of parameters associated with the gridding
method appears. You can choose a gridding algorithm available in
that method. For a definition of each of the parameters on the
Regrid Parameters dialog box, see the definitions supplied under
Gridding Methods:
Point Gridding
Trend Fit Gridding
Contour Gridding
Line Gridding
Point Gridding Plus
Filter Only
Select Data
To edit data you must have a picture to work with. Attach the ZGF that
contains the picture you want to edit. (You can attach the ZGF by using
the File New Graphics File(ZGF) option.) To edit the data used
to create the picture, you also must verify that the MFD that contains the
data is attached.
If the MFD that contains the data files which were used to create the
picture is attached, then the editor automatically selects the data files.
The Select Data option is on the main menu in case you would like to
select data files other than those on which your active picture was
created. If you only want to edit the control point data or the contour
data, Select Data can enable you to restrict your edits to these files.
If you Select Data from the Edit/Create main menu, these files will be
available for any of the types of data editing. If you enter a specific
editing application and want to add to your scope, you can Select Data
in that application.
The editor works with the Segment ID field on the profile data. Profiles
are like cross sections that have X, Y, and Z-values at each digitized
point along the cross section. Straight line connections are made
between these X-Y-Z points along each profile. The straight line
connections that intersect Contour Gridding search lines create
Intersection Points for use during the gridding process. These profiles
are commonly used to more adequately control gridding between or
away from contours, near faults, and in areas of rapid gradient changes.
Update Files
When you exit the editor, edited files are automatically written to the
MFD or OpenWorks and the picture is updated. The default file name is
the same as the input file name with a version identifier added. The
default MFD is the one that contained the original data. Select Update
Files to change the default names and MFDs or to force an intermediate
version of the data to be written.
Normally, using the editor does not require selecting the update files
option.
Select Files
A list of files known to the editor for the current editing session is
presented. The files known to the editor were selected either because the
current picture is based on them, or because you specifically selected the
files for editing. You can choose to update one or more files, or all files.
A list of files is presented. Point to and click the file you want.
Cancel Edit
Select Cancel Edit in order to quit from an editing session and not save
any files. Cancel Edit will cancel the changes made to one or more
datasets. A list of the currently edited files is displayed. Select the files
for which you want to cancel the changes you have made during this
editing session. If you click OK, editing on selected files will be
cancelled. The files selected under the cancel function will return to
their condition prior to the start of the editing session. You may then
continue editing with the original data or exit the editor without the
selected files being updated.
Color Overview
The colors assigned to each feature or part of a feature, such as lines,
text, polygons, etc., are stored in the pictures color table. Use the Color
Table option to perform color editing by displaying and modifying the
color table.
If you select the Color Table option in Z-MAP Plus, the Color Table
display and the Edit Color Table dialog box appear. Select colors (one
by one) to edit from the Color Table display, and perform the edit in the
Edit Color Table dialog box. The results appear in the Color Table
display.
This topic begins with an overview of how Z-MAP Plus determines
color for a specific feature. This is followed by a description of the Edit
Color Table dialog box. Next, you will find a general explanation of the
Edit Color Table dialog box. If you are familiar with the basics
regarding color graphics and the color table, turn to the discussion of the
Color Editing options that begins with Set Color Mode RGB or HLS on
page 213.
The fundamental units of graphics are called primitives. Z-MAP Plus
supports four types of graphic primitives:
line strings
symbols
text
polygons
Each primitive has an attribute called color.
Rather than identifying the color of a primitive directly, color is
identified indirectly as an index into a table of available colors. The
Z-MAP Plus color table is indexed from 0 to 255, and supports 256
colors. Each entry to the table is described using the Red, Green, Blue
(RGB) color model.
Although colors can be defined in either the RGB or Hue, Lightness and
Saturation (HLS) model, HLS parameters are converted to and stored as
RGB parameters in the color table. The RGB model describes color as
three numbers in the range of zero to one. These three numbers indicate
the relative amounts of red, green and blue that are added together to
obtain the color. HLS describes color by the angle of hue (from 0 - 360
degrees) and the percentage of lightness and saturation (from 0 - 100%).
Color Table
To display the color table, click the Color Table icon or select Edit
Color Table in the Z-MAP Plus window.
The color table can have a maximum of 256 colors. The first eight
standard Z-MAP Plus colors follow:
0 = background (black/white)
1 = normal foreground (white/black)
2 = red
3 = green
4 = blue
5 = cyan
6 = magenta
7 = yellow
Each color cell in the table has an assigned index number. The colors in
the table are assigned to indexes zero through seven. These color
associations may only be valid the first time you enter the program. The
color table for all future sessions is based on the changes made in the
previous session.
RGB HLS
COLOR
Red Green Blue Hue % Lightness % Saturation
Blue 0 0 1 0 50 100
Magenta 1 0 1 60 50 100
The Color Table display has 16 rows and 16 columns. To calculate the
index number for a cell you want to change, add the number on the left
side of the row to the number at the top of the column:
Example:
The cell in the eighth row and seventh column is
Color Index 119: 112 + 7 = 119
Status/Prompt
The status line and prompt line guides you through the action options.
The instructions are action-specific. For example, if you select Display
you see:
Status: Display from
Prompt: Identify first color
Next, select a cell in the Color Table display. You see:
Status: Display from
Prompt: Identify second color
The underscored area in the status line contains the number of the first
color cell to be displayed.
Edit
If you select the Edit option, the RGB or HLS color descriptors for the
specified color index appear. In addition to viewing the current
descriptors, you can redefine these values, changing the display color.
By moving the sliders, you can adjust the selected color index.
The RGB scroll bars for altering the amounts of red, green and blue in a
specified color index are shown in the following example detail:
Display
To view all of the colors in the color table, select the Display option.
Then select the first and last cells in the color table, and all of the colors
stored in the color table appear. If your terminal supports fewer than 256
colors, the program approximates any unsupported colors you request to
be displayed. For example, pink might appear as red.
If the program supports fewer than 256 colors (say it supports only 128
colors), the program first blanks out the colors originally displayed on
the map, then one by one it blanks out the first 128 colors in order to
display colors in cells 129 through 255.
To display a series of colors, select the first and last cells in the sequence
you wish to display. For example, to display the colors in cells 1 through
200, select cell 1 and cell 200.
Copy
Use the Copy option in the Edit Color Table dialog box to copy the color
associated with one index in the color table to another color index
position. For example, lets say you copy the color for Index 1 to Index
12. Index 1 and Index 12 have the same color as a result.
Interpolate
You can linearly interpolate the color descriptor values in a specified
range on the color table. Since linear interpolation produces gradual
shading along the specified color range, this option is most often applied
to Colorfill or to data posting to help visualize the difference between
Z-values.
You can interpolate color descriptor values in either RGB or the HLS
mode. To interpolate directly, use RGB. To interpolate in hue around the
spectrum, use HLS.
HLS Interpolation
75
Lightness
Red 120 60
25
BLACK 0
RGB Interpolation
CYAN
(0, 100, 100)
BLUE
(0, 0, 100)
WHITE
(100, 100, 100)
MAGENTA
(100, 0, 100)
E
AL
SC
AY
GR GREEN
(0, 100, 0)
BLACK
(0, 0, 0)
YELLOW
(100, 100, 0)
RED
(100, 0, 0)
Read
Use the Read option in the Edit Color Table dialog box to read in (load)
any color table that has been saved to file. Select Read and Select a color
table from the list of color tables (files with extension .TBL or .tbl)
appears. The color tables are selected from the directories specified in
the Color tab of the Directory Paths dialog box (as described on Color
Tables on page 115). If the file you want is not in this list, check the
directory path.
Write
Use the Write option to write the revised color table to a file. Use the
extension .TBL or .tbl. If you do not specify an extension, the program
adds .TBL to the name you specify.
Color Indices
To execute the Color Indices operation, select the Color Indices menu
option or click the Color Indices icon in the Z-MAP Plus window.
When you invoke Color Indices, a list appears that shows the map
graphic features you can display. Features may include borders, labels,
contours, title blocks, and the north arrow. When you select a feature to
modify its color index, the SELECT Default COLOR INDICES dialog
box appears. Enter a color index number for one of the following
components or click the swatch to select a new color from the color
table:
Line Color Index
Text Color Index
Symbol Color Index
Polygon Color Index
Swatch
Features
Overview
Use the Features menu options control what is displayed in the display
area of the Z-MAP Plus window. This option is active only if a picture
is selected (currently active).
The Features menu includes options for these tasks:
Adding graphic features to the display, such as borders, grid nodes,
labels, lines, north arrows, scale bars, and title blocks.
Displaying contours, point data, deviated wells, seismic data, text,
maps and cross sections.
Overlaying multiple pictures (maps and cross sections) as one
picture.
Manipulating the Z-MAP Plus window display area.
Basemap
Use the Features: Basemap option to add borders, labels, scale bars,
title block, North arrows, and an index map to the current map by using
a the Basemap Features dialog box (page 223).
Cross Section
The Features: Cross Section menu has two options for cross section
features:
Cross Section Features Draws horizons (grid profiles) and Top
picks from wells on the current picture. Control is provided for:
which grids or fields to display, whether to use faults, line type and
width, and other parameters. In addition, the grids as displayed in
the cross section can be output as profile data to the MFD
(page 226).
Map Features Adds map features such as a border, labels,
scale bars, a title block, or an index map to the cross section
(page 232).
Overlay Pictures
Use the Features: Over Pictures option to overlay one or more features
from one picture onto another picture (page 233).
Contouring
The Features: Contouring menu contains six contouring method
options:
Contour Acts as the updated interface to the powerful
NEW-CONTOUR macro. Use this option to build a contour map
and select contour map options (page 239).
Contour Old Generates annotated contours from grid or
digitized contour data. These annotated contours are included as
part of the information on a contour map. Contour lines are drawn
across an area of equal elevation or equal time values (page 240).
Fast Contour Uses the FASTCONTOURMAP macro to build
a grid, then generate a contour map from the selected Z-field in the
data file (page 246).
3D Fishnet Plot Generates an isometric plot or perspective
map (page 246).
Shaded Relief Produces a brightness grid for contouring with
colorfill (page 247).
Color Scale Draws a color scale that relates a series of color
indices to a variation in a quantity. You typically use this option to
add a color scale bar to a color-filled contour map, but you can also
use it to show almost any quantity variation (page 251).
Lines
Use the Features: Lines option to post lines from data files, or for
drawing lines on a picture freehand (page 252).
Text
The Features: Text menu contains two options:
File Text Add text to the picture by using a file as the text
source (page 272).
Key Text Add text to the picture by entering it from the
keyboard (page 273).
Grid Nodes
Use the Features: Grid Nodes option to place symbols and optional
grid values at each node location. While grid node values are not
normally marked on finished maps, grid editing is sometimes facilitated
by having a work map which shows all grid values (page 275).
Polygons
Use the Features: Polygons options to add polygons to a map. This
menu contains three options:
Color-filled Polygons Enables you to fill a polygon with a solid
color (page 277).
Lease Polygon Drawing Posts leases. This option enables you
to define each lease by colored lines, hachuring or color-fill
(page 278).
Shaded Polygons Fills a set of polygons with hachured lines
(page 279).
Deviated Wells
Use the Features: Deviated Wells option to post and label the top,
bottom, and well trace of deviated wells. The process provides
significant control over size and color of posted features (page 291).
2DSeismic
Use the Features: 2D Seismic option to post seismic line data on the
map (page 321). This option was once called Seismic (Old).
3D Seismic
Use the Features: 3D Seismic option to post both 3D surveys and 2D
seismic data to the map (page 338). This option was once called
Seismic (New).
Surveys (Canadian)
Z-MAP Plus supports many types of Canadian surveys (on Solaris and
IRIX platforms):
Create DLS/NTS PictureCreates a picture using the Dominion
Land Survey (DLS) and /or the National Topographic Survey
(NTS) system (page 364).
Post DLS & NTS SurveysPosts DLS and NTS lines and labels
on an existing picture. You must supply both areas present to use
this option (page 365).
Create & Post DLS PictureCreates a picture on which you can
plot DLS information (page 366).
Create & Post NTS PictureCreates a picture on which you can
plot NTS information (page 366).
NAD 27NAD 83 Datum Shifttranslates NAD 27 latitudes and
longitudes to NAD 83 state plane projections and vice versa
(page 367).
Post Township/Section Range (DLS)Draws the Township,
Section, Quarter Section along with the Township and Section
labels. (page 367)
Post National Topo. Survey (NTS)Posts National Topographic
Survey (NTS), Map, Series, Block, Unit and/or Quarter lines and
labels on an existing picture (page 368).
Projection Box
Use the Features: Projection Box option to execute the
POST-PIC-STATS macro and post AOI and Projection on a map
(page 369). (For more information about this macro, see the Macro
Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL.)
Picture Assembly
Use the Features: Picture Assembly option to assemble many any
pictures on one picture. Control is provided for features selected,
position, and size for each picture to be assembled (page 370).
OK Adds the active features (features on tabs with the Post check box
selected) and closes the Basemap Features dialog box.
Apply All Adds the active features and leaves the Basemap Features dialog
box open.
Save All Saves all the current settings without adding any features. The
saved settings appear the next time you click the Reset or Reset All
button.
Unlock All Unlocks the parameter values on all tabs.
Clear All Resets parameter values on all tabs to their default settings (if any).
The settings related to the AOI are derived from the current picture.
Other settings may be derived from the most recently saved display
parameter values.
Reset All Resets parameter values on all tabs to their saved values (the values
that were set the last time you clicked the OK, Apply, Apply All, or
Save All button).
Cancel Closes the Basemap Features dialog box without adding any
features to the map.
Help Starts the browser-based help system for Basemap Features.
Cross Section
The Features Cross Section option is divided into two suboptions:
Cross Section Features
Map Features
Horizons
You can select a maximum of ten horizons to display in the cross
section. If you select the Cross Section Features option after you create
a cross-section plot, the program remembers the cross-section horizons
and baseline used to generate the picture. If another picture is generated
before the cross-section features are placed on the map, however, you
must specify the baseline and the horizons.
Baseline
The baseline marks the location where the cross section is constructed.
Select the baseline file from a vertex file that is in the Area of Interest
(AOI) of the grid profiles and is on an MFD. The grid profiles appear
along the baseline if you create a cross section. The baseline defaults to
the one selected for AOI setup. You can create a baseline by selecting a
map, then selecting the Edit Edit/Create Data option, and choosing
to create a vertex line.
The vertex file should be composed of a set of x,y points in the baseplane
of the input grids, which, when connected by line segments, marks the
baseline for the cross section. This baseline is the source for all possible
points where cross-section values must be computed. Closely spaced x,y
points along the baseline are the locations where the surface values are
computed.
If you want to post wells on a line of section, the horizon must lie within
the minimum and maximum range of the cross section, and the
bandwidth must be large enough so the well can be projected onto the
line of section.
Horizons
Cross sections are made from grids. Surface values at closely spaced x,y
points along the baseline are computed by back interpolation from the
input grids. This gives a point d,z on the cross-section axes where d is
the distance along the baseline from the first point and z is the value of
the surface at x,y. These are connected by line segments to depict the
cross-section curve. The back interpolation scheme used for cross
sections is the same one used for contouring; therefore, cross sections
intersect contour elevations at the expected points along the baseline.
The cross-section curve between contour elevations reveals how the
gridded surface behaves between contours.
Horizon Labels
Labels are strings of, at most, 20 characters that are used to distinguish
one surface from the next on a stacked or composite cross section. The
labels or names will default to the name of the horizon selected to
generate the curves or they may be input using a keyboard.
A dialog box appears, listing each of the selected grid files. Enter the
label for each horizon that will appear on the cross section.
Faults
Input grid profiles can include fault data. If this is the case, include the
fault data when you make the cross section.
Faults are digitized curves that have a discontinuous (faulted) surface.
In computer mapping, curves with a discontinuous surface are called
fault traces. The x,y points along a fault must be sequentially digitized,
so that connecting the points with line segments adequately reconstructs
the fault trace. Faults can either be single curves (denoting vertical faults
or very small fault throws) or double-sided curves (indicating the
amount of throw on the fault). For double-sided curves, a trace is
distinguished from the next trace in the dataset by a unique fault number
that follows each of the x,y points along a fault. When processing a
faulted surface, you must enter the corresponding fault data for that
surface. Select the fault files in the same order as you selected the
corresponding horizons.
Horizon Parameters
Horizon Parameters include:
Line Number
Labeling Size
Grid Sampling Rate
Line Number
The baseline may be composed of one or more line segments that
connect a series of points, such as a set of well locations. If there is more
than one line segment in a file, you must enter the number that
corresponds to the line segment you wish to use. Each line on the file
should have a unique line number.
Labeling Size
Labels are drawn at the size (in plotter units) specified by this parameter.
By knowing the character size and number of characters, you can
determine how much margin space is required to name the curves.
Change the right offset (margin) to allow complete labels to be printed.
Output Files
You can save a maximum of ten cross-section files that contain the x,y,z
sample points created for the associated grid when making the cross
section. Use this panel to give each of the cross-section files a file name,
and to assign each of the output files to either OpenWorks or an MFD.
Wells
Wells should be selected if you would like to post the well data that lies
within a user-specified bandwidth of the cross-section baseline. The
wells that do not fall directly on the baseline will be projected onto the
baseline at right angles, as long as they fall within the bandwidth
specified for your baseline. You may also post any field of data that is
stored with your well data, for example, the well name and the depth
fields.
Baseline
The Baseline marks the linear location where the cross section is
constructed. Wells can be projected onto the baseline within a
user-specified bandwidth (distance).
From the list that appears, select a file to use as the cross section
baseline. This should be the same file you selected under Horizons.
Well Data
From the list of data files that appears, select the control point file that
contains the well to add to the cross section. A field will be selected from
this file and used as input when the option executes.
Horizons
If you select Horizons from the Wells menu, a symbol is posted at each
selected horizon. You choose the horizons you want from the fields
found on the input Well Data File.
Label Horizons
All selected horizons can be labeled with one data field. A panel will
appear for each of the horizons you have selected. You will choose one
label field for each of these horizons. Horizon Labels default to the grid
name of each selected horizon. The Horizon Labels will be written in the
right margin (offset).
Label Wells
Using Label Wells, you can label the first selected horizon with several
data fields. The ordered selection panel determines the order of the
labeled data fields on the map.
Label Parameters
Use the Label Parameters table to control labeling by using the
following parameters:
Line Number The line number comes from the Baseline File
for Wells. Enter the line number on the Baseline file you want to
use for cross-section display.
Band Width Control points are posted within a bandwidth
(distance) you define. This band for posting control points arcs
around the end of the baseline in all directions. Enter the value for
the bandwidth. The default bandwidth value is 0, which means that
only the wells that lie exactly on the baseline are posted on the
cross section.
Labeling Size This number refers to the height of the label in
plotter units (in./cm.). The default heights are 0.1 inches or 0.25
centimeters.
Labeling Format Label format refers to the orientation of the
control point labels:
Horizontal aligns the label parallel to the baseline of the
cross section.
Vertical aligns the label perpendicular to the baseline of the
cross section.
Include Field Name? Control points can be labeled with field
names. The field name can be omitted or included in the label. The
options are Name and Noname:
Name Posts the field name.
Noname Posts the field name with the posted control
points.
Post Z-field value Label control points with field values. You
can include or omit Z field values in the label:
Zvalue Labels Posts Z value labels.
No Zvalue Labels Posts no Z value labels.
Map Features
If you select Features Cross Section Map Features, the Cross
Section Map Features dialog box appears. This is a tabbed dialog box
that is very similar to the Basemap Features dialog box described on
219, with these exceptions:
No tab for setting projected map Labels (L/L)
No North Arrow settings tab
To learn more about the settings in the Cross Section Features dialog
box, see the browser-based help system (accessible from the Help
button in the Cross Section Map Features dialog box).
Overlay Pictures
Use
cutline (from
Yes input picture on No
output picture?
Apply.
To verify results, select Picture, pick output picture, then select Full Display.
You can overlay one or more features from a picture on another picture.
Here are a few guidelines to help you use the Overlay Pictures option:
Scale The scale of the "draped" picture features (the input
picture features) is adjusted to fit the scale of the output picture.
AOI The AOI of the new picture is the output pictures AOI. If
the output pictures AOI is smaller than the input picture, only the
area of the input picture that intersects the AOI of the output
picture is overlaid (as shown in the following illustration).
Requirement for Overlapping Part of the picture from which
features are being copied must overlap the area of the output
picture on which the features are overlaid (for example, the X and
Y limits of pictures must overlap). If they do not overlap, nothing
appears in the output picture.
Controlling Features Included All features from the input
picture (including those in the margins) that overlap or intersect
with the output picture appear on the output picture. Features of
the input picture that extend beyond the edge of the output picture
are clipped at the map border of the output picture. To prevent
unwanted features from appearing in the new map, turn them off
with Features to Overlay.
3
3
1
Input Picture Margin 1 3 5
1 3 5
To view the overlaid features, you must reselect the output picture.
Select File Open Picture Open or click the Picture Open
icon.
Color The color table of the output picture overrides the color
table of the input picture. This can cause problems, for example, if
you overlay a colorfilled picture on a posted data picture. The
colorfill may display differently because the colorfilled picture
features are now using the color table for the posted data.
Input Picture
Click the Input picture button. In the dialog box that appears, select a
picture to overlay. The first option is Use Current Picture. The list also
includes all the pictures in the selected Input Graphics File.
The name of the current picture is reported in the status area at the
bottom of the Z-MAP Plus window.
Output Picture
Click the Output picture button. In the dialog box that appears, select
a picture you want to use as the foundation layer for overlaying features.
The list contains the pictures in the selected Output Graphics File.
Overlay Parameters
Click the Overlay parameters button. In the dialog box that appears,
you can specify whether you want to combine all of the graphics
features to be overlaid into a single feature, and to control whether the
output picture cutline is drawn on the output picture. Graphics features,
sometimes referred to as Logical Graphics Blocks (LGB), can be
manipulated easily when they are distinct features. (For example, they
can be easily deleted or copied.) If features are combined into one
feature, that manipulation capability is lost. However, because the
features are combined, they can be copied, deleted, and so on as a single
unit, which also has advantages.
Use Cutline
Click the Use cutline button and select an option from the drop-down
list. The options control whether the cutline from the input picture is
drawn on the output picture. The choices for this parameter are:
No Cutline (default value) Do not draw the input picture
cutline on the output picture.
Cutline Draw the input picture cutline on the output picture.
The cutline is positioned just as it is on the input picture, relative to
the border of the input picture. That is, if the input picture is
smaller than the output picture, the cutline surrounds the smaller
area.
The cutline represents the edge of the plotter paper and appears as
a dotted line in the display. The default offsets between the cutline
and the map AOI equal one inch on the top, right, and left, and four
inches on the bottom.
Features to Overlay
Click the Features to Overlay button. In the dialog box that appears,
select the features you want to overlay from the input picture to the
output picture. The selected features are highlighted. You can toggle
features on and off until you are ready to click OK and set the feature
selection.
Contouring
Z-MAP Pluss contouring capability is divided into Contouring,
Contour Old, Fast Contour, 3D Fishnet Plot, Shaded Relief, and Color
Scale.
Contour
Features Contouring Contour builds a contour map and permits
you to customize the appearance of contours. You can also display
Contouring with the shortcut icon shown at left.
In addition to producing graphics features for posting on your map,
Contouring also selects the contouring algorithm best suited to your
data. If profiles are present, NEW-CONTOUR selects the Profile
Contouring Algorithm. If there are opaque faults, the macro uses the
Extended Fault Contouring Algorithm. If neither opaque faults nor
profiles are present, the macro uses the faster No-Constraint algorithm.
With respect to graphics features, you can choose whether to colorfill
your contours, and also whether to include a color bar on your map
For more information about Contouring, see the browser-based help
available from the Help button on the Contouring dialog.
Contour Old
Contours are added to the picture from either a grid or contour file.
Controls over line type, width, and value posting are provided. The
smoothness of contours generated from a grid can be controlled. Faults
or polygons can be used to constrain contouring, and the area between
each pair of contours can be filled with color. In addition, the contours
drawn from a grid can be output as digitized contours to an MFD or
OpenWorks.
Fast Contour
Enables you to execute the FASTCONTOURMAP macro. This macro
builds a grid and then generates a contour map from the selected Z-field
on your data file. For more information about this macro, see the Macro
Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL.
3D Fishnet Plot
Executes the FISHNET-PLOT macro. This macro creates a fishnet plot
of a gridded surface. You are allowed to designate the angle from which
to view the surface.
Shaded Relief
Allows you to create a shaded relief map also known as a brightness
grid.
Color Scale
Draws a color scale relating a series of color indices to a variation in
some quantity. This option is used primarily for placing a color scale bar
on a map with color-filled contours, but almost any quantity variation
can be shown in this way.
Contour
Contouring generates annotated contours from either a grid or digitized
contour data. These annotated contours are included as part of the
information contained on a contour map. Contour lines are drawn across
an area of equal elevation or equal time values.
Use the Contours option to perform these tasks:
Plot a CTOG output contour file to determine how the digitized
contour data points are connected.
Output digitized contours for use in other Landmark geological
software operations.
Redraw digitized contours with a different map scale or contour
symbol, such as dashed lines instead of solid lines.
Contour depth or time maps to show elements such as areas of
closure, highs, or lows to use for exploration and development.
Display topographic information in an easily understandable
format.
The Contouring dialog divides all the parameter settings for the
NEW-CONTOUR process into four tabs:
Basic Specify the name of the input grid file, the contour
interval, minimum and maximum depths, and general posting
parameters.
Colors Specify the colors of the contour lines, labels, highlight
frequency and color, and controls the colorfill (if you want to use
colorfill).
Label/Line Specify the label characteristics (such as size,
frequency, and font) as well as the appearance of the contour lines.
On this tab, you also designate a discontinuity file and polygon
clipping file, if you want them.
Output Files Save the file that contains the contour descriptive
data separately from the picture.
Each parameter in the Contouring dialog is covered in detail in the
browser-based Help system, accessible by clicking the Help button in
the Contouring dialog box.
Contour Old
The Contour Old option generates annotated contours from either a
grid or digitized contour data.
Contouring Interval
Z-MAP Plus computes a rounded number below the grid minimum as
the surface level on which the contour interval is based. The contour
interval (CI) marks a fixed distance in Z units between contours. All
contours that are integer multiples of CI are automatically traced.
During standard contouring, the default value for CI is based on the
relief of the input grid. For example, if you would like contours every
50 feet, the contour interval would be 50.
Contour Report
Once interactive contouring begins, a contouring index table appears in
the Status/Report window. The contouring index table contains four
types of information:
Index The index value reports how many contours have been
processed and how many remain to be processed.
Contour Value column The Contour Value column lists each
contour value.
Number Points column The Number Points column lists the
number of points used to produce the contour.
Length column The Length (in.) column reports the length of
each contour.
Fast Contour
Use the Fast Contour option to execute the FASTCONTOURMAP
macro. This macro builds a grid and then generates a contour map from
the selected Z-field on your data file.
For more information about this macro, see the Macro Reference
Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL.
Fast Contour builds a grid and then generates a contour map from the
selected z field on your data file.
You are asked to specify the following input values:
well dataset
z field on the well dataset
a fault dataset (optional)
contouring interval (optional)
ZGF name and picture name
A contour map of the grid is created from the z field.
3D Fishnet Plot
Creates a fishnet plot (also known as a perspective map) of a gridded
surface by using the FISHNET-PLOT macro. Fishnet plots often reveal
surface detail that is not be apparent in a conventional contour map. You
can specify the angle for viewing the surface.
You must specify the following information:
name of the graphics file
name of the new picture
name of the input grid file
For descriptions of the FISHNET-PLOT macro parameters, see the
Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL. For more information
about using the 3D Fishnet Plot option, select Help Online
Manuals Macros, and locate the topic for FISHNET-PLOT.
Shaded Relief
The conversion factor has two uses. First, if the X,Y values are in
meters and the Z values are in feet, a conversion factor of 3.048
converts the meters to feet, putting the X, Y, and Z values in the
same units for a realistic picture.
Second, you can use the conversion factor to apply a vertical
exaggeration to the Z values. The state of Florida is hundreds of
miles long but only 165 feet high. Without adding a vertical
exaggeration, a relief map of Florida would have noting to show.
Also, some maps may have units that are not convertible. For
example, X and Y in meters and Z in milligals. In cases where it is
not desirable (or possible) to use a realistic conversion factor, try a
conversion factor approximately equal to 4 times the range in Z
divided by the range in X.
Output Grid These entries specify the name of the output
brightness grid and the destination MFD or the OpenWorks path.
Output File Name This is the name of the output brightness
grid.
Master File This is the name of the destination MFD for
storing the output brightness grid.
Contour Setup
1. Create 40-50 colorfill contour levels.
2. Do not draw contours on the picture, or at least do not draw
contours on the picture during the colorfill pass.
3. Do NOT use contour lines while generating colorfilled polygons
unless you are using an very fine grid.
Colorfilled Polygons
Use the Features Contouring option to generate colorfilled polygons
without using contour lines.
Color Table
The general procedure is as follows. Select Edit Color Table. For the
contour range indices you specified, select the lowest index and give it
a dark color. Select the highest index for the contours and give it a light
color. Interpolate between these two indices to create a continuous
change from dark to light.
Suggested colors for interpolation:
Dark gray: (0, 10, 0) HLS Light gray:(0, 77, 0) HLS
Contour the darkest shades (lowest points on the grid) first, following
with the progressively lighter shades (higher points on the grid).
Color Scale
Color Scale draws a color bar relating a series of color indices to a
variation in some quantity. This option is used primarily for placing a
color scale bar on a map with color-filled contours, but almost any
quantity variation can be shown in this way. Color Scale uses the
COLOR-BAR macro to create the scale.
To create a color scale, you must have a graphics file and a picture
attached to your Z-MAP Plus session. To see the resultant color bar in
Z-MAP Plus, you must select Display Full Display after you create
the color scale.
You are asked to supply the following elements:
file providing the data range
field number providing data range (optional)
information about contour intervals, number of contours, and
contour minimum and contour maximum
color bar and color-fill information
line color information (optional)
contour labeling information (optional)
See the Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL for detailed
descriptions of each parameter for COLOR-BAR. To display this
information, select Help Online Manuals Macros Manual, and
locate the topic for COLOR-BAR.
Lines
You may draw lines on your current map after retrieving line data from
an input dataset. The Lines option may be used to display all types of
lineal data that are not normally associated with Z-values, including:
lease polygons
cultural data such as roads, etc.
land grids
fault traces
many other types of x,y data
When drawing lines, you specify:
line type
scaling units
line clipping option
where to place symbols at vertex locations
symbol code
symbol size
If the line is dashed, you can specify the length of the dash, as well as
the length of the gap.
There are two ways to draw lines on an active picture from the
Features Lines option:
draw lines using File
draw lines using Cursor
This option allows you to post lines on a currently active picture. Lines
can be posted from vertex, fault, and profile data. You may select from
a list of seven graphical representations or up to 20 line patterns.
Select Data
Select a file from the list of files available in the OpenWorks project and
the attached MFDs. This file is used as input when the option executes.
Fields to Post
A list of fields is presented. You may select up to two fields to post. (If
you select more than two fields from the list, the program will not
recognize any of the fields you have attached.)
Use these options to control line color and pattern. You can specify line
parameters manually, or use fields to control the line color and pattern.
Line Type
This menu allows you to choose the type of line you want to draw in
connecting the points. Select on the graphical representations of the
desired Line Type, or choose to establish Line Type by Pattern number
or vary the line patterns by Z-field.
Hachure Gap
This value is required only if you have chosen a Line Type of Hachure.
This number represents the gap between hachures in plotter units
(in./cm.) of the hachures in the pattern for drawing lines. The default
hachure gap is 0.1 in. or 0.25 cm.
Hachure Length
This value is required only if you have chosen a Line Type of Hachure.
This number represents the length in plotter units (in./cm.) of the
hachures in the pattern for drawing primary lines. The default Hachure
Length is 0.05 is or 0.13 cm.
Hachure Direction
This direction is the direction of the hachures relative to the line. Left
means to draw the hachures on the relative left side of the line, and
Right means to draw the hachures on the right side of the line. The
default direction is Left.
Line Weight
This number represents a multiple of the normal line width for drawing
lines. The thicknesses range from 1 to 8, and the default Line Weight is
1. The larger the weight, the bolder the line will be.
Color Mode
There are three methods for defining the color of the primary lines:
Index, Field, and Z-field.
Index refers to the number of the color in the Z-MAP Plus color table.
Field refers to the number of the Line Color Field. The line color field
must be present on the input data file.
Z-field will vary color by Z-field. When color is to vary by Z-field, the
program allows you to specify the value change in Z-field required to
change the color of primary lines.
Color Index
The color index is a number from 0 to 255 in the Z-MAP Plus color
table. The color index refers to the settings for the currently active
picture. To choose a color index for lines, click the color box. A palette
of the 256 colors appears. You can change the color index of the lines
by clicking the color you want.
Symbol Parameters
Use this panel to control line symbol parameters, including:
Symbol Code
Select Field
Color Field
Symbol Color
Symbol Size
Symbol Size
This number is the symbol height in plotter units (in./cm.).
Posting Rate
The Posting Rate for symbols is the divisor of the number of points. A
posting rate of 1 means that every point will be posted. A posting rate of
5 means the first point and then every fifth point will be posted along a
line.
Labeling Parameters
This panel allows you to determine labeling parameters for fields.
Control is allowed for: label rate, color mode and color index, font,
number of decimals, height and location of the symbol. You can
determine these label parameters for one or two fields, and you can
determine the labeling parameters for each of two fields independently.
Color Mode
There are three ways to determine the color of the labels:
Index, Symbol, and Line.
Index refers to the number of the color in the Z-MAP Plus color
table.
Symbol refers to the color of the posted symbol to be labeled.
Line refers to the color of the succeeding line segment.
Color Index
If you chose the Index option for Label Color Mode, you must assign a
color index to determine label color for the current field. To see a palette
of the Z-MAP Plus color table, click the color box. Click the color you
want for the current fields label.
Label Font
The Label Font is the font in which labels for this field are to be printed.
The choices are shown at left.
Number of Decimals
This number refers to the number of places to the right of the decimal to
post for the field.
Height of Label
This value refers to the height of the label, in plotter units (in./cm). The
label represents the current field. The default label heights are 0.07 in.
or 0.18 cm.
Location of Label
There are two options for locating a label on a line. The label can be
posted to the Right of the line or it can posted to the Left of the line.
Data Units
The coordinates of the points on the lines are expressed in data units.
Data Units can be either user units or plotter units. The default value is
user units.
User units are engineering or user coordinates such as feet.
Plotter units are inches or centimeters.
Contours
This option is for hand drawing contours on a work map. You will have
a variety of line pattern choices as well as a smoothing option. The
Delete option will make it possible for you to interpret and redraw your
contour.
Faults
This option is for hand drawing faults on a work map. You will have a
variety of line pattern choices as well as a smoothing option. The Delete
option will make it possible for you to interpret and redraw your fault.
Polylines
This option is for hand drawing lines or figures on a map. You will have
a variety of line pattern choices. The Delete option will make it possible
to redraw your line(s) if you wish.
Line Parameters
When you click Contours, Faults or Polylines, a Line Parameters panel
appears. For an explanation of most of the line parameters, refer to
General Line Parameters on page 254.
For all line types, you can set preferences for line color, line pattern, and
hachures.
For Contours, there is an option to label and set label intervals.
For Contours and Faults, there is a Smoothing option which enables you
to smooth or not smooth the hand-drawn graphics feature.
End Options
Once you click OK in the Line Parameters dialog box, the End Options
dialog box appears. There are three options for ending the line:
Delete Last deletes the last point you input (and the line connecting that
point to the previous point, if any) in the current line. It will not delete
points from lines that have been ended with End Open or End Closed.
End Open ends the current line at the last point input.
End Closed ends the current line and connects the last point input
to the first point input.
Text
Text Workflow
Text allows you to add text anywhere on your map. Text is required to
make a finished map. Different types of text that frequently appear on
maps include lease names and related information, names of roads,
rivers, etc., township-range indices, indicators for target areas, etc. All
of these types of text can be placed on your map with this process. For
example, you could name the map Top Cretaceous Structure Map, and
add a second line of text below the title (Below Last) that reads Offshore
Louisiana. Text has a source (either a text file or keyboard entry), a font
(type of lettering), a location, a color, and a rotation. To locate text, use
the keyboard only, the cursor only, or the cursor and keyboard together.
Keyboard
If you select Keyboard, a dialog box appears, which you use to enter a
text string and its location.
Text Enter the text string you want to appear on the map.
X Location of Text (Plotter Units) Enter the x position of the
text, expressed in plotter units (in./cm.).
Y Location Enter the y position of your text in plotter units (in./
cm.).
Font The choices for text font are shown at left.
Color Index The color index is a number from 0 to 255 in the
Z-MAP Plus color table. The Color Index refers to the settings for
the currently active picture. To choose a Color Index for text, click
the color box. A palette of the 256 colors appears. You can change
the Color Index of the text by clicking the color you want.
Character Size Specify the size of the characters in your text
string in plotter units
(in./cm.).
Degree of Rotation In degrees from 0 to 360, indicate the
rotation for your text string. Rotation is counterclockwise, 0
degrees rotation is horizontal; 90 degrees is perpendicular to the x
axis, and so on.
Location Specified The options for location are Lower Left,
Lower Right, and Center. For example, if you choose Center, it
means that the location you are specifying (with the cursor or the
keyboard location) is the center of the text string. Lower Left
would be the lower left corner of the text string.
Cursor Only
The entries for cursor placement are Text, Font, and Color Index.
Text Enter the text string as you want it to appear on the map.
Font The choices for text font are shown at left.
Color Index The color index is a number from 0 to 255 in the
Z-MAP Plus color table. The Color Index refers to the settings for
the currently active picture. To choose a color index for lines, click
the color box. A palette of the 256 colors will appear. You can
change the color index of the lines by clicking the color you want.
Below Last
The entries for Below Last are Text, Font, and Color Index. The location
of the text string is below the previously chosen text string.
Grid Nodes
Select Features Grid Nodes to place symbols and optional grid
values at gird nodes. Grid values do not typically appear on finished
maps, but you may want to show grid values while you edit a grid.
Exercise caution when you post grid node values: A dense grid can
easily result in unreadable, overlapping grid values. Such grids also take
more time to display, since drawing numbers takes much longer than
drawing lines or other types of map features.
To post grid node values, specify these parameters in the Post Grid Data
dialog box:
the grid
the symbol to mark the node location
symbol height
whether to mark ZNON (null data) locations
whether to post grid values
the rate to write grid values
the number of decimal positions for each value
an area within the grid to post
Grid
If you click the Grid button, the Select GRID dialog box appears with a
list of grids. Select a grid to use as input.
Posting Parameters
If you click the Posting Parameters button, the Set POSTING
Parameters dialog box, which you use to specify these parameters:
Symbol Number To post a symbol at the grid node locations,
use the Symbol Number box to specify a symbol to post. Enter 0
to post no symbol. (For symbols and their values, see Appendix
C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns, starting on page 791.)
Symbol Size Use the Symbol Size box to define the symbol
size in plotter units (in./cm.). The default value of 0.07 in. (0.18
cm.) is adequate to mark the locations and produce legible grid
values. Increasing the size increases the probability that values will
overlap.
Labeling Parameters
Click the Labeling Parameters button to display the Set Labeling
Parameters dialog box. Use this dialog box to specify whether or not to
post the grid values, the number of decimal positions in the grid values,
the rate at which to display grid values, and what portion of the grid you
want to display.
Post Grid Value? If only grid locations are required, there is no
need to post the grid values. On the other hand, the grid value
information may be helpful. You must decide which option is best
in your case.
Decimal Positions In Value The decimal position indicates the
number of digits to the right of the decimal to be included in the
grid value. If a 0 is entered, an integer value is posted.
Row Labeling Rate and Column Labeling Rate Grid values
are output column-wise from top to bottom. Normally, all entries
are displayed. However, you can specify the output rates to reduce
the density of values on your map. Using m = 2, and n = 5 will
output every 5th row and every other column.
Starting Row (of posted rows) and Starting Column (of posted
columns) If only a portion of the grid is required, you may use
the starting row and column indices to limit the displayed locations
and values. The defaults display the full grid.
Polygons
The Features Polygons menu contains these options:
Color-filled Polygons
Lease Polygon Drawing
Shaded Polygons
Color-filled Polygons
To fill polygons with a solid color, select Features Polygons
Color-filled Polygons.The EXECUTE MACRO:POLYGON-FILL
dialog box appears. You specify the following parameters.
name of the input vertex file (Polygons are stored in VERT
(vertex) type files.)
coordinate system for the polygon vertices: either
ENGINEERING or PLOTTER
color to use for filling the polygon
Shaded Polygons
Fills a set of polygons with hachured lines. Use this option to hachure
shade fault polygons that have been converted to a vertex file.
Before you can use this option, you must have a picture displayed. The
shaded vertex file is added to the current picture.
Symbol Size
This is the symbol height in plotter units (in./cm.).
Posting Rate
The Posting Rate for symbols is a divisor for the number of points. A
posting rate of 1 means that every control point will be posted. A posting
rate of 5 means that every 5th control point will be posted.
Labeling Parameters
Use this selection to determine the parameters for labeling fields, for
setting the rate at which to post labels, and for selecting color fields.
Field Parameters
This panel allows you to determine labeling parameters for fields.
Control is allowed for:
color mode
color index
font
number of decimals
height (of label)
location (of label)
You can determine the labeling parameters for each field selected for
labeling independently.
Color Mode
There are three ways to determine the color of the symbol: by the color
Index, by the Symbol, and by the Field.
Index refers to the color index for the color in the Z-MAP Plus
color table.
Symbol refers to the symbol number in the Z-MAP Plus Extended
Symbol Set. (For a list of symbols and their codes, see Appendix
C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns, starting on page 791.)
Field refers to a field of data stored with the control point data that
lists a color index for each control point.
Color Index
If you choose the Index option for Color Mode, you must assign a color
index from the color table to determine label color for the current field.
The color index is a number from 0 to 255 which represents a color in
the Z-MAP Plus color table. The color index refers to the settings for the
currently active picture.
Field Font
The Field Font is the font in which Labels for this field are to be printed.
The choices are:
Number of Decimals
This number refers to the number of places to the right of the decimal to
post for the field. Up to 12 decimal places are allowed.
Height of Label
This value refers to the height of the label, in plotter units (in./cm). The
label represents the current field. The default label heights are 0.07 in.
or 0.18 cm.
Location of Label
There are two options for locating a label on a line. The label can be
posted to the Right of the line or it can posted to the Left of the line.
Labeling Rate
The Labeling Rate refers to the rate at which posted control points are
labeled. A label rate of 1 means that every point is labeled, a label rate
of 3 means that every 3rd point in the file is labeled.
Color Fields
This panel is a list of color fields found on your input control point data
file. Select the color field you would like to use for your label. This
parameter is used only when Color Mode is set to Field.
Data Units
The coordinates of the control points are expressed in data units. Data
units can be either user units or plotter units. User units are engineering
or user coordinates such as feet. Plotter units are inches or centimeters.
The default value is User units.
Deviated Wells
Deviated well posting enables you to post and label the top, bottom, and
well trace of deviated wells. The process provides significant control
over size and color of posted features.
The main components of deviated well posting are Top Hole Posting,
Bottom Hole Posting, and Well Trace Posting.
Well Trace Posting includes posting points along the well trace. The
capabilities of each component are outlined in the following table.
Colors for posted fields Colors for posted fields Posting Points Along Well
can be: can be: Trace
same color as symbol same color as symbol
Symbol posting and size:
a specified color a specified color
same capabilities as Top
based on a color field based on a color field
and Bottom Hole Posting
Symbol color:
same color as well trace
same capabilities as Top
and Bottom Hole Posting
Labels up to 2 fields:
same capabilities as for
Top and Bottom Hole
Posting
Posted fields can have different sizes, fonts, decimal places, and/or positions.
Each of the three major parts of a deviated well data file has fields to
post and symbol and labeling parameters. The Top and Bottom
components have been documented under three headings: Top/Bottom
Fields to Post, Top/Bottom Symbol Parameters, and Top/Bottom
Labeling Parameters. Parameter settings for the top do not have to match
bottom hole parameters. The Well Trace component of the data has
three additional parameter types: Line Mode/Scale Mode, Well Trace
Parameters, and Scale Field.
The Top, Bottom, and Well Trace components of the deviated well each
has a Fields to Post panel. This panel is the Ordered Select panel new to
Z-MAP Plus.
Each component also has parallel panels for symbol and labeling
parameters. The parameter panels for all three components are identical
for symbol posting and labeling.
You will most likely want to vary the color coding for symbols and
labels according to whether they belong to the top, bottom, or well trace
component. You can also color code points according to the variation in
a selected Z-field.
Fields for Top Only Fields for Top, Bottom, Fields for Well Trace
and Well Trace Only
Well Name or Platform Select Field Line Color Field to
Name (used for Symbol Field Vary Line Color
labeling) Symbol Size Field Z-field to Vary Line
Symbol Color Field Color
Z-field used to control Z-field to Vary Line
Symbol Size Pattern
Color Fields for Labels Well Trace Fields to
Z-field used to control Post
Symbol Color Well Trace Scale Field
Select Data
A list of DWEL (deviated well) data files appears, including the
OpenWorks Current Well List. This file will contain the deviated wells
that you would like to post. If you select from the OpenWorks Current
Well List, the selected well list becomes a DWEL file for use in
Z-MAP Plus, however DWEL files cannot used by other applications.
Z-field refers to the number of the Z-field on the input data file
to which the symbol color is tied. Determining color by Z-field
will result in a change of colors when the Z-value of the
control point changes (by a user-defined amount).
Symbol Color Index This is the number associated with the
256 colors in the Z-MAP Plus color table. Each color has an
associated number, or index. To see a palette of the colors, select
the Color Box. Then select the color you want for your symbol
color.
Determine Symbol Size By There are five methods for
determining symbol size:
Value uses the size of the symbol in plotter units (in./cm.). The
default values are 0.07 in. and 0.18 cm.
Field size from a field on the input file.
Diameter allows symbol size to vary by a simple scaling of a
selected Z-field.
Area allows size of symbol to represent actual area as defined
by a Z-field of area (in engineering units).
Class allows symbol size to vary based on up to 6 user defined
intervals that relate to a particular Z-field. You can make all the
producing well symbols a specific size in plotter units (in./
cm.), all the dry holes another size.
Symbol Size This number is the symbol height in plotter units
(in./cm.).
Posting Rate The Posting Rate for symbols is the divisor of the
number of top/bottom fields. A Posting Rate of 1 means that every
top/bottom field on the data file will have a symbol posted. A
Posting Rate of 5 means that every 5th field will have a symbol
posted.
Field Parameters
You can determine labeling parameters for each field selected for
labeling independently. You can specify values for the following
parameters:
Color Mode There are three ways to determine the color of the
symbol:
Index refers to a number in the Z-MAP Plus color table.
When you enter a number, the a box containing that color on
the color index appears to the left of the entry. Using Index as
the method of posting means that all of the labels will be
posted with this color index.
Symbol allows you to determine the color of a text label
based on the type of symbol it labels. You do this by selecting
the symbol code number you want from the Z-MAP Plus
Extended Symbol Set, which provides symbols for posting oil
wells, shotpoints, for example. (For examples of these
symbols, see Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line
Patterns, starting on page 791.)
Field means that the label color to use is read from a color
field in your input dataset.
Color Index If you choose the Index option for Color Mode,
you must assign a color index from the color table to determine
label color for the current field. The Color Index is a number from
0 to 255 which represents a color in the Z-MAP Plus color table.
To see the color palette, select the Color Box. Select the color you
want for the current field's label.
Font The Font is the font in which labels for the Label Field are
to be printed. The choices are shown at left.
Number of Decimals For each numeric label field, you can
control the number of decimal places. This number refers to the
number of places to the right of the decimal to post for the field.
Up to 12 decimal places are allowed.
Height of Label This value refers to the height of the label, in
plotter units (in./cm.). The label represents the current field. The
default label heights are 0.07 in. or 0.18 cm.
Location of Label This panel enables you to control the
position of each label field with respect to the symbol. There are
five options for locating a label in relation to a posted symbol:
Above the top/bottom symbol
Below the top/bottom symbol
Right of the top/bottom symbol
Left of the top/bottom symbol
Centered with reference to the well location
Labeling Rate
The Labeling Rate refers to the rate at which posted top/bottom fields
are labeled. A label rate of 1 means that every posted top/bottom field is
labeled, a label rate of 3 means that every 3rd posted field is labeled.
Color Fields
Color Fields presents a list of color fields. Select the color field for the
top/bottom label color. The Select Color Field for top/bottom label color
will appear for as many fields whose color mode was set to Field.
Label Color Index If you choose the Index option for Color
Mode, you must assign a color index from the color table to
determine label color for the current label. The Color Index is a
number from 0 to 255 which represents a color in the color table.
The Color Index refers to the settings for the currently active
picture. To view a palette of the color table, select the color box.
Select the color you want for the current label's label.
Label Font The Label Font is the font in which labels for this
field are to be printed. The choices are shown at left.
Number of Decimals For each numeric label field, you can
control the number of decimal places. This number refers to the
number of places to the right of the decimal to post for the label.
Up to 12 decimal places are allowed.
Label Height This value refers to the height of the label, in
plotter units (in./cm.). The label represents the Z-field selected for
Well Trace Fields to Post. The default label heights are 0.07 in. or
0.18 cm.
Label Location There are two options for locating a label on a
line. The label can be posted to the Right of the line or it can
posted to the Left of the line.
Label Orientation A label may be placed either perpendicular
or parallel to the line it references.
2D Seismic
The 2D Seismic feature is to allow you to post seismic line data on your
map. You can post shotpoints and track lines. Control is available for the
following options:
Z-values of labeled shotpoints
labeling parameters
ZNON value
posting all seismic lines, or some seismic lines
symbol color parameters
Data
This is the data file which contains the seismic data which you would
like to post on the map. Labeling and posting options will be applied to
this seismic data file. A list of data files is presented. Select the data file
you want.
Shotpoint Numbers
Shotpoint numbers for both data files need to be ordered and contiguous in
each line. To do this, use the Operations Data Operations Sort Data
option.
Z-field
A list of fields is presented. If you do not want to post Z-values along
with seismic shotpoints, select None - use no field.
Shotpoints to Post
Click the Shotpoints to Post button in the Post SEISMIC LINE Data
dialog box. In the Select Shotpoints to POST dialog box that appears,
you can specify the following input values:
selection mode for posting symbols
symbol field/symbol code number
centered symbol code
symbol size
rate to post symbols (divisible by)
starting location (divisible bias)/first shotpoint to post
minimum separation between shotpoints, in plotter units
Selection Mode
The Shotpoints to Post panel enables you to determine which shotpoints
on the input file to post on the map. The next two options on the Post
Seismic Data main menu will determine how points already posted on
the map will be labeled.
The available methods available for shotpoint symbol posting are
described in the following text.
All Points Post all shotpoints on a line.
Endpoints+Postrate Post the first, last, and every nth shotpoint
on the data file. This method posts shotpoints based on a
user-specified increment, not by shotpoint number. The first and
last shotpoints are posted, and intervening shotpoints are posted
according to two user-specified values: Starting Location and Rate
to Post. The value you specify for Starting Location is the
numerical position of the first intervening shotpoint to post. The
value you specify for Rate to Post is the increment at which
subsequent shotpoints should be posted. For example, when
Starting Location = 5 and Rate to Post = 10, the 1st, 5th, 15th,
25th, 35th, etc., and the last shotpoint are posted.
Endpoints+Divisible Post the first and last points and every
point having a shotpoint number divisible by n. This method posts
shotpoints based on shotpoint number. The first and last shotpoints
are posted, and intervening shotpoints are posted according to two
user-specified values, m and n. Here, m is a number which is added
to the shotpoint number and n is a number which is divided into
(shotpoint number + m). Only those points whose shotpoint
number plus m is equally divisible by n will be posted. For
example, to post only shotpoint numbers that end in 7, set m = 3
and n = 10. Thus, when the shotpoint numbers that end in 7 have 3
added to them, they will be divisible by 10.
Intervals This method posts shotpoints based on intervals
expressed in plotter units (in./cm.). The first and last points are
posted, and intervening shotpoints are posted at a distance greater
than a user-specified minimum separation. Check line statistics to
determine a reasonable minimum separation.
Trackline A trackline will connect the shotpoints, but no
symbols will appear at the shotpoint locations.
Symbol Size
This is the size of the shotpoint symbol in plotter units (in./cm).
Minimum Separation
The minimum separation should be defined only when the Selection
Mode is Intervals. This number represents the minimum separation
between posted shotpoints. The minimum distance between posted
shotpoints should be expressed in plotter units (in./cm.).
Label Orientation
The Shotpoint Label Orientation has two components. The first
component is the location of the shotpoint number label relative to the
seismic line. The second component is the angle of rotation which the
label has. The angle of rotation can be specified in relation to the seismic
line or in relation to the x axis of the map.
Left+Above+X-axis This option will place labels above a
horizontal seismic line or to the left side of a vertical seismic line.
Label rotation will be set up in relation to the x axis of the map.
Right+Below+X-axis This option will place labels below a
horizontal seismic line or to the right side of a vertical seismic line.
Label rotation will be set up in relation to the x axis of the map.
Left+Above+Line This option will place labels above a
horizontal seismic line or to the left side of a vertical seismic line.
Label rotation will be set up in relation to the seismic line.
Right+Below+Line This option will place labels below a
horizontal seismic line or to the right side of a vertical seismic line.
Label rotation will be set up in relation to the seismic line.
Minimum Separation
The Minimum Separation should be defined only when the Selection
Mode is Intervals. This number represents the minimum separation
between labeled shotpoints. The minimum distance between labeled
shotpoints should be expressed in plotter units (in./cm.).
Z-value Orientation
The Z-value Orientation has two components. The first component is the
location of the Z-value label relative to the seismic line. The second
component is the angle of rotation which the label has. The angle of
rotation can be specified in relation to the seismic line or in relation to
the x axis of the map.
Left+Above+X-axis Places labels above a horizontal line or to
the left side of a vertical seismic line. The label rotation angle will
be set up in relation to the x axis of the map.
Right+Below+X-axis Places labels below a horizontal line or
to the right side of a vertical seismic line. The label rotation angle
will be set up in relation to the x axis of the map.
Left+Above+Line Places labels above a horizontal line or to
the left side of a vertical seismic line. The label rotation angle will
be set up in relation to the seismic line.
Right+Below+Line Places labels below a horizontal line or to
the right side of a vertical seismic line. The label rotation angle
will be set up in relation to the seismic line.
Select Method
Select Method enables you to select which seismic lines to post:
post all seismic lines on a file, or post only selected lines
select the posted lines by exclusion or inclusion
The options for Selecting Seismic Lines are as follows:
All Will post all seismic lines on an input file and output the
line names to a posted line list dataset.
Only Will post only those lines which you select. Selected lines
will appear on the active map. Selected line names are written to
the selected line list dataset. They are marked as posted in the
posted line list dataset.
Except The excluded lines are written to the selected line list
dataset and are not posted. All the lines except the excluded lines
will be posted.
Set Parameters
To set the color of the symbols and labels posted with seismic lines,
click the Set parameters button in the Symbol Color Parameters dialog
box. Use the Set Parameters dialog box that appears to specify the
following values:
Symbol Color Selection by You can determine the color of the
symbol associated with a seismic line by three methods.
Symbol Color The color of all seismic line symbols will be
determined by selecting a value in the color table.
Color Field The color of each symbol is given by the color
field on the input data file which you select.
Z-field The color of each symbol is tied to the Z-field on
your input data file which you have selected for determining
symbol color changes. You can only select one Z-field to
determine symbol color variation. Fields available for selection
are taken from your input seismic line data file.
Symbol Color This number refers to the number in the color
table for the color you desire.
3D Seismic
Compared with 2D Seismic, the 3D Seismic posting option has
additional capabilities and improvements in seismic line data posting.
You can use 3D Seismic to:
Post seismic lines (track line) and shotpoints for both 3D surveys
and 2D seismic data.
Thin track line out of dense 3D seismic data.
Decimate (eliminate selected) shotpoints, labels of posted
shotpoints, and labels for Z-field attributes.
Relocate and rotate 3D survey names and seismic line names.
Clip a seismic line at the map border, rather than truncating it at
the last shotpoint which will fit in the map border.
Indicate whether a given shotpoint on a seismic line is the start of,
the end of, or within, a discontinuity (geologic unconformity).
Vary the color, size, font of line names, line numbers, and
Z-attribute labels based on select criteria.
Vary the type, color and size of shotpoint symbols and labels based
on selected criteria.
Vary all of the above mentioned parameters for line names or line
numbers and shotpoint labels according to range criteria.
Shotpoint Numbers
Shotpoint numbers for both data files need to be ordered and contiguous in each
line. To do this, use the Operations Data Operations Sort Data option.
The Post Seismic Data (New) menu provides options that display
secondary choice or parameter entry dialog boxes. The following is a
description of what the panels and parameters of this process are
designed to do.
Seismic Data
This panel presents a list of all data files in the attached MFDs and in the
OpenWorks project. The panel enables you to select the data file that
contains the fields to display. If the fields in the file are not sorted
correctly, a diagnostic message appears.
Data
Type Primary Secondary Tertiary
Choose Fields
The parameters in this panel are defined in detail in the following text.
Each of the Choose Field options in this panel display a dialog box that
lists fields of a given type (such as text size, color, font) when these
fields are present on the input seismic data file.
Fields which control posting of data include the Z-value field, the
selection field, the shotpoint reshot field, the discontinuity field, and the
modulation field. All the other fields on the Choose Fields menu are
fields which will affect some graphical attribute of posted data, such as
the color, line pattern, or line weight of a posted seismic line, the text
color, size, and font of survey names, line names, and shotpoint
numbers; the color, type, and size of shotpoint symbols.
The following fields can be chosen if present on the input seismic line
data file:
Shotpoints to Post
This option brings up a Shotpoints to Post panel. The Shotpoints to Post
panel allows users to determine whether to post All, None or some of
the shotpoints. The some options consist of the Rate and Divide
methods.
Use the Shotpoints to Post dialog box to specify the following input
values:
whether all or some shotpoints are posted using a shotpoint
symbol
the type of symbol which is posted for shotpoints
the method for deciding the size of a given shotpoint symbol
the discontinuity ratio
the starting point on the seismic line for posting shotpoint symbols
Symbol Size
This parameter is for use when the Symbol Size Mode is Size. Enter the
size, in plotter units (in./cm.), for the posted shotpoint symbols.
Discontinuity Ratio
This parameter is used only when you have answered Yes to Use
Discontinuities? on the General Posting Parameters menu. The
Discontinuity Ratio is the Discontinuity Symbol Size Ratio. The value
you enter will result in the scaling of the posted shotpoint symbol size
wherever the shotpoint falls within a discontinuity (unconformity).
Label Color
Z-value labels can have up to 20 colors assigned.
Label Size
The label size is expressed in plotter units (in./cm).
Label Angle
Taking the shotpoint associated with the Z-value to be labeled as the
pivot point, the Label Angle is the value in degrees counterclockwise to
be added to the original label angle.
Bias
Prior to posting the Z-value label, you can add a bias value can to the
Z-value. The posted Z-value label will reflect the biased Z-value.
Scale
Prior to posting the Z-value label, you can scale the Z-value by a value.
The posted Z-value label will reflect the scaled Z-value.
Number of Decimals
This is the number of decimals to the right of the decimal to be posted
in the Z-value label.
Name Location
There are eight possible locations for the seismic line name.
Both will result in the line name being printed at the beginning and
ending shotpoints, parallel to the seismic line.
Start will result in the line name being printed at the beginning
shotpoint, parallel to the seismic line.
End will result in the line name being printed at the ending
shotpoint, parallel to the seismic line.
North will result in the line name being printed at the
northernmost position on the seismic line, parallel to the line.
East will result in the line name being printed at the easternmost
position on the seismic line, parallel to the line.
West will result in the line name being printed at the westernmost
position on the seismic line, parallel to the line.
Omit will result in no line name being posted.
Name Orientation
The line name can be oriented parallel to the track line or parallel to the
X-axis of the picture.
Line. The line name will be oriented parallel to the track line it
labels.
X-axis. The line name will be oriented parallel to the X-axis of
the picture.
Name Font
The choices for text font are shown at left.
Name Size
This is the size of the text in plotter units (in./cm.).
Name Color
This is the color of the seismic line name. Clicking the color box will
bring up a color widget comprised of 256 colors. Select the color you
want for the seismic line name.
Name Angle
Taking the shotpoint nearest the line name as the pivot point, the Name
Angle is the value in degrees counterclockwise to be added to the
original line name angle.
The value for distance break refers to the distance between shotpoints.
If the distance between shotpoints exceeds this value, then the program
will show the break in the track line.
Connectivity Mode
The options for connectivity mode are Posted and All.
Posted will result in drawing the track lines between posted
shotpoints only.
All will result in drawing the track lines between all shotpoints,
even shotpoints not selected for posting.
Discontinuity Pattern
You can alter the appearance of the line in areas where a discontinuity
(unconformity) is present. Consult the section Appendix C. Symbols,
Fonts, and Line Patterns, starting on page 791. Select the number for
the line pattern to draw if a discontinuity is present.
Normal Pattern
You can select the line pattern you want for the track line. If you wish
to distinguish between a normal pattern for the track line and a pattern
indicating a discontinuity, select one line pattern for normal, and another
line pattern to indicate a discontinuity.
The line patterns and their corresponding numbers appear in Appendix
C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns, starting on page 791.
Line Weight
You use this parameter if the Line Pattern Type for track line is bold (1).
The Bold line width factor is a multiple of plain line widths. The values
is a number from 18, with the default value set at 2.
Number Break
This parameter sets up a value difference test between any two
consecutive shotpoints on a track line. If the value entered exceeds this
difference, the track line will be broken between those shotpoints.
The value for number break refers to the difference in value between any
two posted consecutive shotpoint numbers. The user specifies a
difference between shotpoints number values. If the difference between
two consecutive values exceeds this value, then the program will show
the break in the track line. A value of 0 will insure that a continuous
track line will be drawn regardless of any difference in shotpoint
number values.
Distance Break
This parameter sets up a distance test between any two consecutive
shotpoints on a track line. If the value entered exceeds this distance, the
track line will be broken between those shotpoints.
The value for distance break refers to the distance between shotpoints.
If the distance between shotpoints exceeds this value, then the program
will show the break in the track line. A value of 0.0 will insure that a
continuous track line will be drawn regardless of the distance between
shotpoints.
Data to Post
All will result in all data being posted.
Some will allow you to set up selection criteria using operators, textual
and numeric masks, and wildcards. Data which match the selection
criteria you define will be posted.
Select Operator
The operators set up a comparison between data values (such as
shotpoint numbers, line names, z attribute values) and a user-specified
text or numeric mask. The mask excludes values which do not satisfy the
requirement when the operator is applied to it. The values that fail to
satisfy the operator/mask are not posted.
The operators are:
EQ Post values equal to the textual or numeric mask.
NE Post values which do not equal the textual or numeric
mask.
If the EQ and NE operators are applied to character fields, the
entry for VALUE can contain wildcard characters.
LT Post values which are lexically or numerically less than the
textual or numeric mask.
LE Post values which are lexically or numerically less than or
equal to the textual or numeric mask.
GT Post values which are lexically or numerically greater than
the textual or numeric mask.
GE Post values which are lexically or numerically less than or
equal to the textual or numeric mask.
Null Post attributes whose field value equal to the ZNON (null
value) for the field.
NotNull Post all attributes which have a non-null value, or
which do not equal the ZNON.
Between Post all values which are between the lowest and
highest end of the lexical or numerical range defined by the masks.
Endpoints are included.
Outside Post all values which do not fall within (which are
outside of) the range of the lowest and highest lexical or numeric
values. Endpoints are not included.
The Value of the field must be of the same type (numeric or character)
as the field being tested.
Modulation Parameters
The Modulation Parameters panel allows you to set up ranges in
Z-Attribute variations which will cause a color or label text size change.
Z-Range Increment
When the Z-Range Table Creation Method is Divide, Inc or Inc+Start,
you must enter the value of the increment between modulation levels.
Z-Range Start
When the Z-Range Table Creation Method is Inc+Start, you must enter
the starting value. The increment will then be added to the start value to
create each additional modulation level.
Surveys (Canadian)
Z-MAP Plus supports picture creation and survey posting for many
types of Canadian surveys:
Create DLS/NTS Picture Creates a picture using the
Dominion Land Survey (DLS) and /or the National Topographic
Survey (NTS) system.
Post DLS & NTS Surveys Posts DLS and NTS lines and labels
on an existing picture. You must supply both areas present to use
this option.
Create & Post DLS Picture Creates a picture on which you
can plot DLS information.
Create & Post NTS Picture Creates a picture on which you
can plot NTS information.
NAD 27NAD 83 Datum Shift Translates NAD 27 latitudes
and longitudes to NAD 83 state plane projections and vice versa.
Post Township/Section Range (DLS) Draws the Township,
Section, Quarter Section along with the Township and Section
labels.
Post National Topo. Survey (NTS) Posts National
Topographic Survey (NTS), Map, Series, Block, Unit and/or
Quarter lines and labels on an existing picture.
Warning
To use this option, the current map must include both NTS and DLS areas.
Projection Box
This option posts AOI and Projection information for a map.
The Projection Box option posts a box on a map showing all the picture
information such as picture name, scale, projection, etc. This box is
always 3 inches by 5 inches (same height as the default title block). The
projection box can be placed to the left of the title block by specifying
the position of the lower right corner of the projection box in map units.
You must select an existing ZGF.
This option calls the POST-PIC-STATS macro. For more information,
select Help Online Manuals Macros Manual, and locate the
topic for POST-PIC-STATS.
Picture Assembly
In Picture Assembly, you can take several existing pictures of one or
more surfaces (for example, a contour map, a 3D perspective map and a
cross section) and compile them into one presentation picture. The
component pictures of the assembly can be drawn from more than one
graphics file.
Before you select the Picture Assembly option, you must create and
define the limits for a new assembled picture (map or cross section). To
create a map, select File New Basemap. Each picture in the
assembled picture is enclosed in a frame that you define and resize.
Select Picture
Click the Select Picture button in the Picture Assembly dialog box to
display a list of all the pictures in the specified ZGF. Select an input
picture to place in the assembly.
Select Features
Click the Select Features button in the Picture Assembly dialog box to
display a dialog box that lists the features in the selected picture. Select
the features that you want to draw on the assembly. The default behavior
is to select all the features.
Cutline, Division
Click the Cutline, division button in the Picture Assembly dialog box
to display the Division, Cutline Parameters dialog box. Specify input
values for the following options:
Division of Features for Index Map Click the Division of
Features for Index Map button and select one of these options
from the list:
Maintain Division (default value) Select this option to
maintain the features as separate entities (such as contours,
borders, and title block). This option enables you to edit or
delete the features individually.
Single Feature Select this option to combine all input
picture features into a single graphics block, referred to as an
index map.
Use cutline Click the Use cutline button and select one of these
options from the list:
Cutline. Add a cutline around the input picture. This places a
solid line around the outside border offsets.
No Cutline. Omit the cutline from the input picture.
Create Frame
Click the Create Frame button in the Picture Assembly dialog box to
display the Create Frame dialog box. Use this dialog box to create a
frame for a picture you are placing in the assembly.
Key Frame Click the Key Frame button in the Create Frame
dialog box to display the Location, Height and Scale dialog box.
Enter coordinates and parameters from the keyboard for the
position, scale, and height of the frame:
Lower Left X and Y Coordinates You can specify the
location for placing the picture by entering the values for the
x,y coordinates of the lower left corner of the location. Until
you select OK, the frame you are creating repositions its lower
left corner wherever you click the mouse button in the
Z-MAP Plus window display area. This enables you to
reposition the frame graphically.
Modify Frame
Once you create the index map frame, you can click the Modify Frame
button in the Picture Assembly dialog box to display the Modify Frame
dialog box. Use this dialog box to change any of the previously input
parameters, then click OK.
Select Corner Select the corner of the frame that you want to
move. The frame changes colors. Using the cursor, select the new
location for the corner of the selected frame.
Next Frame This option takes the cursor to the next component
frame on the active picture. From this position you can select the
modifications you want to make to the frame (location, height,
width, cutline, division, features). You can select Next Frame as
many times as you like before you click OK in the Modify Frame
dialog box.
Key Location This panel enables you to enter values for the
location, scale, and height of the frame. This method can be used
instead of the cursor method of making modifications.
Lower Left X and Y Coordinates You may specify the
location of the picture being placed on the assembly by
entering the values for the x,y coordinates of the lower left
corner.
Scale Enter a number to scale the size of the picture being
placed on the assembly. The dimensions of the input picture
will be multiplied by this number to determine the size of the
picture placed on the assembly.
Height Height overrides the Scale value. Enter the height in
plotter units (in./cm.).
Change Height Move the cursor above or below the frame.
When you change the height, the frame is rescaled.
Change Width Move the cursor to the left or the right of the
frame. When you change the width, the frame is rescaled.
Cutline, Division You can put a cutline around the pictures on
your assembly. You can also treat the features of your picture as
one single graphics feature, or you can keep the graphical features
separate. When the features are kept as one graphical feature, they
are lumped together and no further editing of individual features
may be done for that picture on the assembly. When you choose to
keep the graphical features separate, you can selectively modify
them, or omit particular features from the individual frames on
your output picture.
Division of Features for Picture Being Placed on the Assembly
The features in the picture being placed on the assembly may
be combined into one single graphical feature, or these graphical
features may remain separate.
Maintain Division (default value). Select this option to
maintain the features as they are in the original picture.
Consequently, contours, borders, title block, etc., are kept as
separate entities.
Single Feature. Select this option to combine all features
(contours, border, title block, etc.) into a single graphics block,
referred to as an index map.
Use Cutline You can put a cutline around each picture being
placed on the assembly.
Cutline. Select this option to place a cutline around the
picture being placed on the assembly.
No Cutline. Select this option to prevent a cutline from being
placed around the picture being placed on the assembly.
Select Features A list of the features on the picture is
presented. Select the features you wish to draw on the picture
being placed on the assembly. The program defaults to All the
features.
Delete Frame
Once you create the index map frame, you can click the Delete Frame
button in the Picture Assembly dialog box to display the Delete Frame
dialog box. Use this dialog box to select a frame to delete. You can also
restore a frame you have deleted.
Next Frame This option takes the cursor to the next component
frame in the active picture. You can select Next Frame as many
times as you like before you click OK in the Delete Frame dialog
box.
Delete Frame Use the cursor to select the frame to delete.
Undelete Frame The Undelete option works on the frame you
have just deleted. When you select Undelete Frame, the deleted
frame will be put back on your output picture, in the position from
which it was removed.
Overview
Use the View menu options to control the way maps and cross sections
appear in the Z-MAP Plus window display area including which
features appear, whether the entire image is visible, and whether
changes appear automatically.
View options are active only if the display area currently contains a map
or cross section. (The Switch Screens option is active only if the display
area is split from the menu bar and you are using a dual monitor system.)
A summary of the View menu options follows.
Display List Select the features (such as contours, faults, and
text) that are included when a redrawing operation executes (for
example, Zoom In, Zoom Out, Window, Pan, Re-display, and Full
Display).
Zoom In Enlarge part of the image to fill the display area. The
image enlarges as soon as you select a centerpoint.
Zoom Out Reduce the image in the display area. The image
becomes smaller as soon as you select a centerpoint.
Window Draw a window around an area in the image, which
then enlarges to fill the display area.
Pan Shift the image to reveal a different part of it in the display
area. Define the extent and direction of the pan by selecting a
point, then selecting a new location for the point.
Re-display Load new or changed features into the display area,
or reload the image after changing the selections in the display list.
Full Display Redisplay the map or cross section at its original
size.
Display List
Use the Display List option to select the graphic features you to display
in the next redrawing operation (such as Zoom In, Zoom Out, Window,
Pan, Re-display, and Full Display). This capability is useful for
expediting work on complex pictures. For example, when you view a
complex map as a whole, you can hide elements that take a long time to
redraw. When you zoom in on a part of the map, you can include those
elements.
To view the display list, select View Display List or click the
Display List icon (shown at left).
The SELECT GRAPHICS FEATURES dialog box appears. The display
list in the dialog box shows all the graphic features in the current map or
cross section, such as borders, control points, contours, text, and title
block. By default, all features are selected (highlighted) and are set to be
included in the next redrawing operation.
To clear a selection, click the element. Elements that are not selected are
omitted from redrawing. Omitted elements are still part of the map or
cross section, they are just rendered temporarily invisible.
Zoom In
Use the Zoom In option to enlarge a part of the current map or cross
section. To zoom in, follow these steps:
1. Select View Zoom In or click the Zoom In icon (shown at
left).
The prompt LOCATE POINT TO ZOOM ABOUT appears in the
status area.
2. Click the center of the area you want to enlarge.
The map or cross section is enlarged to about four times the
original size. The display area contains the part of the image
defined by the center point you chose.
Only the features currently selected in the display list appear. (To
view the display list, select View Display List.) By default, all
features are selected in the display list and are redrawn. If you have
cleared any feature selections, they are not included in the Zoom
In operation.
To return the display to it previous size, click the Zoom Out icon
(described on page 378). To return the display to its original size and
orientation, click the Full Display icon (described on page 382).
Zoom Out
Use the Zoom Out option to reduce the size of the currently displayed
current map or cross section. To zoom out, follow these steps:
1. Select View Zoom Out or click the Zoom Out icon (shown at
left).
The prompt LOCATE POINT TO ZOOM ABOUT appears in the
status area.
2. Click to select a center point for the new display area.
The map or cross section is reduced to about one fourth of its
former size. The reduced image appears in the part of the display
area defined by the center point you chose.
Only the features currently selected in the display list appear. (To
view the display list, select View Display List.) By default, all
features are selected in the display list and are redrawn. If you have
cleared any feature selections, they are not included in the Zoom
Out operation.
To return the display to it previous size, click the Zoom In icon
(described on page 377). To return the display to its original size and
orientation, click the Full Display icon (described on page 382).
Window
Use the Window option to define an area of the current map or cross
section and enlarge it to fill the display area. To execute a Window
operation, follow these steps:
1. Select View Window or click the Window icon (shown at left).
The cursor changes to a cross hairs symbol.
2. Click to select a corner and drag to define the area (the window)
you want to include in the display. (In some applications this
action is called drawing a rubber band around an area.)
The image in the window expands to fill the display area.
Only the features currently selected in the display list appear.
(To view the display list, select View Display List.) By default,
all features are selected in the display list and are included in the
new display. If you have cleared any feature selections, they are
not included in the Window operation.
To return the display to its original size and orientation, click the
Full Display icon (described on page 382).
Pan
Use the Pan option to shift the current map or cross section within the
display area, so you can see an adjacent part of the image. This option is
useful for chasing lines or data across a map you have enlarged with
the Zoom In option.
To pan, follow these steps:
1. Select View Pan or click the Pan icon (shown at left).
The prompt LOCATE EXISTING PAN REFERENCE POINT
appears in the status area.
2. Click to select a point you want to include in the new display.
The prompt LOCATE NEW POINT POSITION appears in the
status area.
3. Click to select a new position for the point you selected.
The display area shifts immediately in the direction and to the
distance you specified. Only the features currently selected in the
display list appear. (To view the display list, select View
Display List.) By default, all features are selected in the display
list and are redrawn. If you have cleared any feature selections,
they are not included in the Pan operation.
To return the display to its original position, click the Full Display icon
(described on page 382).
Re-display
Use the Re-display option to refresh the current display (whether it
shows all or part of a map or cross section). If you have added features
since the last redrawing operation, the features are added to the display
(and are the only items redrawn). If you have not made any changes, the
display reloads unchanged.
To execute a Re-display operation, select View Re-display or click
the Re-display icon (shown at left).
The display updates immediately. Only the features currently selected in
the display list appear. (To view the display list, select View
Display List.) By default, all features are selected in the display list and
are redrawn. If you have cleared any feature selections, they are not
included in the Re-display operation.
Full Display
Use the Full Display option if you have used the Zoom In, Zoom Out,
Window, or Pan option, then want to redisplay the map or cross section
at its original size and placement.
To execute a Full Display operation, select View Full Display or
click the Full Display icon (shown at left).
The current map or cross section returns to its original size and
placement. Only the features currently selected in the display list appear.
(To view the display list, select View Display List.) By default, all
features are selected in the display list and are redrawn. If you have
cleared any feature selections, they are not included in the Full Display
operation.
Auto Display
Use the Auto Display option to set Z-MAP Plus to add new features to
the display dynamically (on) or add new features only on demand (off).
If Auto Display is on, Z-MAP Plus performs a Re-display operation
each time you add or change a feature. If Auto Display is off, the display
updates only if you perform one of the redrawing operations (such as
Re-display, Full Display, Zoom In, Zoom Out, Window, or Pan).
To toggle Auto Display on or off, select View Auto Display. The
system window reports the status change for the Auto Display option, as
shown in the following example. (The appearance of the option in the
View menu does not change.)
Switch Screens
Use the Switch Screens option to switch the active picture display from
one monitor to the other. The Switch Screens option is useful if you run
multiple OpenWorks applications simultaneously.
The Switch Screens option is available only if you use dual monitors and
the Z-MAP Plus graphics window is split from the menu bar.
Modeling
Overview
Surface modeling, or gridding, is one of the most important functions in
Z-MAP Plus. Many functions in Z-MAP Plus use grids as input or
produce grids as output. A good introduction to gridding terminology
and the gridding process is available in the Z-MAP Plus Users Guide,
accessible by selecting Help Online Manuals User Guide.
Simply put, a grid is a set of regularly distributed points that are
calculated or estimated from an input set of control points. Control
points represent real data that has been collected and is not regularly
distributed.
The gridding methods are designed to work with point data, grids,
digitized contours, seismic lines, or other line oriented data.
# of Flex Passes
Search Radius
Extrapolation
Refinements
Flexing Type
Control Grid
Smoothness
Data Hulls
Gridding Method
Modulus
Cutoff
Point Gridding Plus X X X X X X X X X
Point Gridding X X X X X X X X X
Contour Gridding X X X X X
Trendform Gridding X
Line Gridding X X X X X X
Flexing X X X X
The following topics describe the effect each of these parameters have
and how to use them to improve grids. The Boolean, Constant,
Polynomial, and User-Defined gridding methods do not use these
parameters.
Control Grids
You can use control grids to determine which grid nodes are initialized
in Point Gridding Plus, Point Gridding, and Line Gridding Plus. You can
designate a control grid to tailor the new grids node values. Each
gridding method can use information from the selected control grid in a
number of different ways. Possible choices for this parameter include:
None Do not use a control grid.
Flex Only Flex the control grid. To constrain flexing, Z-MAP Plus
uses any input control points and faults.
Grid Non-ZNONS Replace any non-null grid nodes in the control
grid with values. Determine the non-null values by using:
specified gridding parameters
input control points
faults
No null (ZNON) grid nodes are altered. This control option is useful for
ensuring that node values are calculated at the same node locations for
all project grids. You cannot perform any refinements. The output grid
has the same x,y limits and increments as the control grid.
Grid ZNONS Replace any null (ZNON) grid nodes in the control
grid with values determined by:
specified gridding parameters
input control points
faults
No non-null grid nodes are altered. You cannot perform any
refinements. The output grid has the same x,y limits and increments as
the control grid, and the entire grid is filtered (both original non-ZNON
values and the newly calculated nodes).
Faults Only Set the program to create the specified output faults and/
or fault profile files. The Faults Only control option uses the control grid
and processes the input centerline fault file against it. No input control
point data is required.
Default AOI Choose the x,y limits and increments from the control
grid. This is the most common application of a control grid and
guarantees that the control grid and output grid cover the same area and
that their nodes are located at the same x,y positions.
Data Hulls
You can use data hulls to determine which grid nodes are initialized
(assigned a value greater than null or ZNON) in Point Gridding Plus,
Point Gridding, or Line Gridding Plus. Choose one of the four methods
(discussed in the following text) to determine which grid nodes are
initialized:
Data Distribution
Convex Hull
Concave Hull 1
Concave Hull 2
Data Distribution The Data Distribution method of determining the
gridding area is the method used in classic Point Gridding. The
gridding area is determined by basic gridding parameters, such as reach
or minimum number of control points that can be used to compute any
grid value.
Convex Hull The Convex Hull option sets Z-MAP Plus to grid
whenever possible inside the convex hull of the dataset expanded by the
Expand parameter you defined in the Secondary Parameters option. The
gridding is limited only by the Reach Parameter.
Convex Hull
Concave Hull 1 The Concave Hull 1 option sets Z-MAP Plus to grid
whenever possible inside the convex hull reduced by concavities. The
concavities are determined by the radius. The size of an imaginary ball
rolled around the convex hull of the data determines the depth of the
concavities.
Concave Hull 2 The Concave Hull 2 option is similar to Concave
Hull 1, except that concavities are slightly deeper between initialized
grid nodes.
Size of the ball rolled around Size of the ball rolled around
the convex hull of the data the convex hull of the data
Setting the Radius of the Ball used to Create the Convex Hull
When you choose either Convex Hull method, the following dialog box
appears, which you use to set the radius of the ball used to roll around
the data edges.
In this dialog box, the value of the radius is automatically set to five
times the grid increment. You can reset the radius of the ball to any value
between 1 - 5 times the grid increment. In this dialog you also name the
data hull you create.
Search Radius
The Search Radius parameter determines how far from a node the
gridding method should look to determine the value assigned to the
node.
The default radius is half the diagonal of the grid being calculated and
is usually much larger than necessary. Although it is better for the radius
to be too large rather than too small, a large radius increases gridding
time. Since only the closest points are used, significantly more data are
looked at than are actually used to calculate a nodes value. Most users
have found that significantly reducing the default value for the Search
Radius is the easiest way to speed the gridding process.
This is one of the primary parameters for controlling how far
extrapolations are carried away from the data. Reducing this to the point
where the search radius is smaller than the distance between data and the
edge of the map, or between data points, will cause ZNONs to be placed
in those unreached areas. This extrapolation control method will create
holes (ZNON areas) in void areas in the middle of data.
Extrapolation Distance
You can use the Extrapolation Distance parameter to set a distance from
the perimeter of the data to define an area in which you want to calculate
grid nodes. This parameter is applicable to Point Gridding Plus, Point
Gridding, Contour Gridding, Line Gridding Plus, and Line Gridding.
The default Extrapolation value is equal to the Search Radius value.
If Search Radius, Minimum Number of Points, Number of Sectors, or
any other node initialization parameters restrict node calculation to an
area smaller than the one defined by the Extrapolation setting, the
Extrapolation setting overrides the other parameters. In other words,
node values are calculated even if the other parameters are set to prevent
it. To avoid overriding other node initialization parameters, set the
Extrapolation Distance value to 0.
Refinements
Grid refinement is the process of cutting the gridding interval in half and
computing the new intermediate grid values from the original grid
values (also called resampling). When combined with grid flexing, this
process can substantially reduce gridding time because resampling and
flexing are significantly faster than calculating initial node values.
You can compare the process of starting coarse and refining to building
a regional surface form, then adding the local detail to it. The more
refinements you do, the more general that regional starting surface is.
More refinements can help create a better grid if there is a strong
regional component or if the data have large void areas that a coarse grid
could easily model.
Refinements can cause problems with grids that use a large number of
faults or have a few closely spaced faults. Make the initial grid
increment small enough to place a grid node between fault segments.
Flexing Parameters
Flexing, sometimes called filtering or relaxation, is used to
simultaneously smooth the grid and tie it to the data. Flexings primary
purpose is to remove small surface irregularities in the initial surface
that are not supported by data. These irregularities are put in the surface
during initialization and are not desirable in the final surface model.
Flexing parameters are available in Point Gridding Plus, Point Gridding,
Contour Gridding, Trendform Gridding, Line Gridding Plus, Line
Gridding, and the Flexing Modeling menu options.
These parameters are described in detail with the final gridding method
in the section Flexing starting on page 520.
Select a Fault File name, if one is associated with the data file.
Is algorithm
Set flexing parameters. No Yes
Projected
Slopes?
Apply
Select additional
Save and return to the fields.
Z-MAP Plus window.
Overview
Point Gridding Plus has the functions available in Point Gridding, with
additional features that enhance the geologic accuracy of faulted
structure models. To display the Point Gridding Plus dialog box, click
the Point Gridding Plus icon (shown at left) or select Modeling Point
Gridding Plus in the Z-MAP Plus window. Use Point Gridding Plus in
combination with Profile Contouring to create high quality maps of
faulted surfaces.
Details about the parameters found on each of the Point Gridding Plus
dialog box tabs is available in the browser-based Help system. To
display this information, click the Help button in the Point Gridding
Plus dialog box. The remainder of this topic contains conceptual
information to help you achieve the best results with the program.
This next topics describe Point Gridding Plus and its capabilities,
including information about these subjects:
Honoring Fault Geometry in Point Gridding Plus on page 396
General features, starting on page 397
Point Gridding Plus Support Utilities on page 398
E
RFAC
T SU
FAUL
X
BED BED
X
Key:
AE= projected vertical separation of beds
AC= throw
CB= polygon gap
(Tearpock and Bischke 1991. Published with the permission of the authors.)
By looking across the fault trace, Point Gridding Plus builds grids that
honor the vertical separation along the traces. As a result, a structure
model created by Point Gridding Plus has grid nodes initialized
accurately inside small fault blocks with few data points. The continuity
of structural features that are cut by faults is preserved across the fault
face. This is similar to hand contouring techniques.
Kriging
Point Gridding Plus has a kriging feature a gridding technique that
uses well-defined models of a structures spatial correlation to produce
optimal structure models. The kriging feature is designed for users who
are familiar with geostatistics.
Fault Processing
Faults without vertical separation are treated exactly alike in the two
gridding processes, but Point Gridding Plus does not treat faults with
vertical separation as opaque barriers. Standard gridding algorithms
have difficulty with poorly initialized or undefined grid nodes inside
small fault blocks, but Point Gridding Plus does not. Point Gridding Plus
can replace the undefined grid nodes inside fault polygons
(characteristic of other gridding algorithms) with reasonable node
values modeling the fault face cutting the structure. The ease with which
Point Gridding Plus handles fault polygons can be especially useful
when you find, for example, that part of one of the horizon models
covered by your lease has ZNONs at equity determination time.
Gridding as if faults were opaque barriers produces incomplete and
inaccurate horizon models near faults for the following reasons:
Vertical separation may reverse along a fault
Small fault blocks may not be initialized
Significant surface structures may not continue across a fault
Fault Geometry
Geoscientists measure fault throw, fault dip, and fault heave in a plane
perpendicular to the fault strike. Fault strike is the trend of a horizontal
line in the fault. Fault throw is the apparent vertical movement of the
fault in the plane. Fault dip is the angle of the fault face in the plane
measured down from the horizon.
Basic Tab
The Point Gridding Plus: Basic tab is divided into three sections:
Input files (next topic)
Gridding Parameters (page 404)
Output (page 413)
Input Files
The following illustration shows the options in the Input files section of
the Point Gridding Plus: Basic tab.
Z-Field Name
The Z-Field Name box value specifies the Z-field used to create the
grid. Click the Z-Field Name button and select a field from the
drop-down list. The list of Z-fields is automatically generated from the
selected control point file.
Gridding Parameters
The following illustration shows the options in the Gridding Parameters
section of the Point Gridding Plus: Basic tab.
Gridding Algorithm
You can choose any of ten gridding algorithms to use for the Point
Gridding Plus operation. A description of each gridding algorithm
follows.
The first difference is the treatment of zero thickness data that are, in
effect, replaced by Z-values that will continue the local trend of the
thickness into the zero data area. The slope of this trend establishes
where the inferred zero isopach curve will fall in the area between zero
and non-zero data.
The second difference between the Least Squares and Isopaching
procedures is the minimum allowed Z-value of the grid. In the case of
the Isopaching procedure, there is effectively no lower bound to the
Z-values of the grid. This allows the slope of the surface to continue
downwards outside the zero contour. However, the reported grid
minimum which is stored in the grid header is always zero.
Bounded Range This method is used to grid data that has an upper
and/or lower bound to the Z-values, such as Net to Gross data. It uses
the Least Squares algorithm to calculate grid node values. However,
before grid node values are computed, values of control points that are
equal to the upper limit or equal to the lower limit are replaced with
estimated values above and below the limits, respectively. The resulting
grid will contain values above and below the limits. A contour map
made from this grid will have limit contours which pass between the
limit and real-valued control points. The Bounded Gridding process can
be altered (Curve Compression Factor) so that the limit contours move
closer to, or farther from, real valued control points. This algorithm
requires additional parameters to be set. See Algorithms Requiring
Additional Parameter Dialog Boxes on page 422.
Point Density Gridding This gridding option computes the density
of data points within distance Reach of each grid node. The value
returned at each grid node location is the number of data points found
within distance Reach divided by the area of the circle with radius
Reach. The grid model created by point density gridding may be used as
a rough estimate of the confidence which should be assigned to each
grid value in a grid of the same size created using another gridding
algorithm and the same value of the Reach parameter.
Kriging Kriging is a gridding technique that uses information about
the spatial continuity of a surface. Using randomly positioned point
data, Kriging produces a statistically optimal model of the surface.
Kriging is a difficult algorithm to use correctly, but it is better when you
know certain characteristics of the target surface, and when the surface
satisfies certain hypotheses. Kriging is similar to classical Least Squares
estimation with the covariances determined from a user-defined
function. This algorithm requires additional parameters to be set. See
Algorithms Requiring Additional Parameter Dialogs page 422.
To qualify for Kriging, data must be able to fit into one of three
mathematical hypotheses:
Kriging Stationary Hypothesis, where the first and second
moments of Z are independent of position
Intrinsic Hypothesis, a reduced form of the Stationary Hypothesis,
where S(H) is independent of position
Kriging Hypothesis, where deviations from the Stationary or
Intrinsic Hypotheses are acceptable only if these variations occur
beyond the practical range of the semivariogram
First select the control grid method from the drop-down menu. Next,
select the file to use as the control grid from the Select Input File dialog
box that appears.
ZNON Value
The program uses a default value of 1.000000e+30 for null (ZNON)
points.
To change the setting, triple-click the ZNON Value box contents in the
Point Gridding Plus: Basic tab. Enter a value from the keyboard. Use a
null value that is far outside any values found in the input data.
Search Radius
In the Search Radius box of the Point Gridding Plus: Basic tab, enter
the radius for drawing a circle around the grid node being calculated.
Data points inside the circle are eligible for use in calculating the nodes
Z-value (expressed in map units). Typically, only the closest data points
are actually used. The default value is half the size of the grid.
Refinements
Each refinement pass halves the grid increment, which produces finer
detail in the map.
In the Refinements box of the Point Gridding Plus: Basic tab, enter the
number of refinement passes you want the program to perform. The
initial grid increment is used to build the initial grid. The refinement
passes are then performed, with the grid resampled at half of the
previous increment value, after which the grid is flexed. This process is
repeated for the specified number of refinement passes until the final
grid increment is reached. The default Refinements value is 1, and the
range of valid numbers is 0 to 5.
The Refinements setting is common to many types of gridding methods,
and is described further on page 393.
Extrapolation Distance
Use the Extrapolation Distance box in the Point Gridding Plus: Basic
tab to specify the width of an extrapolation corridor around the data
perimeter. Grid nodes that fall inside the corridor are initialized with
values extrapolated from the nearby data points.
Smoothness Modulus
Use the Smoothness Modulus box in the Point Gridding Plus: Basic tab
to specify the extent to which you want to smooth the grid. Note that the
more smoothing you apply, the less the grid honors the data points.
In the Smoothness Modulus box, you can enter any value between 0
and 1. The default setting is 0.2. With a value of 0 (zero), if smoothing
pushes the surface away from the data, the program brings it back to
exactly honor the data. A value of 1 (one) produces the smoothest grid,
without regard for precisely fitting the grid to the data. With the default
value of 0.2, if smoothing pushes the surface away from the data, the
program brings it back at least 20% of the distance between the surface
and the data point. The Smoothness Modulus value affects the grid
nodes that are within 5 or 6 grid increments from the data.
To achieve an optimum trade-off between accuracy and smoothness,
you may need to produce several test grids that each use a different
smoothness modulus. The Smoothness Modulus is often used with
seismic data, with its value shifted towards 1. The effect is to remove
some of the wobble from contours that cross or run along seismic lines.
The Smoothness Modulus parameter is common to a number of gridding
methods. (For more information, see page 525.)
The default values are derived from the input data file. The default AOI
covers an area that is slightly larger than the smallest rectangle that
contains the input data (approximately 10% larger than the X/Y ranges).
If you specify a control grid, the control grid is used to supply these
values.
You may want to round the values up to more even numbers. Do not
make the AOI any larger than required, however. The added grid nodes
increase the grid size and gridding execution time. In addition, remote
grid node values are more likely to have unrealistic values.
These values default to numbers that are slightly smaller and larger
(10% of Z-range), respectively, than the smallest and largest data value
for the Z-field being gridded. This allows a small amount of overshoot
of grid values above or below data values. If you are using a control grid,
the control grid boundaries serve as the upper and lower boundary limits
for the Bounded Range algorithm.
The increments default to the same value in both directions. If you are
using a control grid, these values default to those of the control grid.
For more information about X and Y gridding increments, see X and Y
Gridding Increments on page 493.
Output Panel
Output Location
From the drop-down Output Location list, select the attached MFD to
use for storing the grid (or use the OpenWorks project).
Advanced Tab
The Advanced tab has two panels: Smoothing and Other Controls.
Smoothing Panel
The Smoothing panel parameters control grid flexing. You can use
flexing (sometimes called filtering or relaxation) to simultaneously
smooth the grid and tie it to the data. Flexings primary purpose is to
remove small surface irregularities in the initial surface that are not
supported by data. These irregularities are put in the surface during
initialization and are not desirable in the final surface model.
Many gridding methods have smoothing parameters. For more details
about each of these parameters, see page 520.
Flexing Type
The Flexing Type button shows which type of flexing is specified
whether flexing is performed with a Biharmonic filter, Laplacian filter,
both filters, or no filter.
Control of Passes
Use the Control of Passes setting to specify one of these conditions:
FLEX = NUMPASS (default value) Continue flexing until the
Number of Flex Passes value is met.
FLEX <= NUMPASS Stop flexing as soon as either the Cutoff
or Number of Flex Passes value is met.
Cutoff
In the Cutoff box, enter a number to use as a test value to determine
when to stop flexing. Flexing continues until the amount of change from
one pass to the next is smaller than the Cutoff value. The default Cutoff
value is 0.25, which typically results in three to six flexing passes.
Data Hull
Set the type of Data Hull on the Advanced tab under the Other Controls
panel. Data hull is a shared parameter, for a description of the different
settings, see Data Hulls on page 390. For Concave Hulls you also
need to set the following parameters.
The circle, defined by the search radius, and centered over the grid node
being calculated is divided into 8 sectors. To do this lines running NS,
EW, N45E, and N45W are drawn. Each piece of pie defined by these
lines is a sector.
Using only a certain number of data points from each sector reduces the
influence of clustered data. For example, assume 40 points are tightly
clustered in the NNE sector, one point is in the SSW sector, the 40 and
the 1 are similar distance form the node, and that all are used to calculate
the nodes value. The average surface value in the NNE sector will be
40 times more influential in defining the nodes value than will the
isolated point in the SSW sector, even though the 40 and the 4 represent
nearly the same amount of information about the surface.
By using a maximum of 4 points per sector the above example would
change from a 40 to 1 influence to a 4 to 1 influence and a more
representative Z-value would be calculated for the node.
Weighting
Controls whether data influence, when calculating a nodes value, falls
off quickly or slowly with distance from the grid node. Possible choices
for this parameter include:
Sharp Weighting (default value). This gives very large weights to
close data. The weight decreases roughly as an inverse squared function.
This type of weighting should be used unless you are dealing with very
rough (noisy) data.
Smooth Weighting. This allows even very distant data to have a
significant influence on a grid nodes value. It will produce a smooth
grid from rough or noisy data. However, the results will not necessarily
honor the data.
Report Type
You have three choices concerning the extent of the processing analysis
report: None, Partial, and Full.
None indicates that you do not wish to see the report.
Partial will give you a summary report.
Full will give you a full report.
Centerline Fault
To create a fault polygon from this
file, the centerline file must contain
x, y, seg ID, Heave, and Throw fields.
Filled Fault
Interpolates z-values along the edge of
the polygon;thus contouring across the polygon
to join contour levels is possible.
Expanded Fault
Defines a polygon filled with null
or ZNON values.
DZ/DX Field
This field represents the change in Z divided by the change in X, or the
first derivative in the X-direction. A list of DZ/DX Fields on your Input
Control Point file appears. Point to and click the field you want.
DZ/DY Field
This field represents the change in Z divided by the change in Y, or the
first derivative in the Y-direction. A list of DZ/DY fields on your Input
Control Point file appears. Point to and click the field you want.
GRADIENT-WEIGHT Field
The Projected Slopes Algorithm assigns weights to the Z-values inside
a circular area around a node before averaging them. Z-values closest to
the grid nodes receive the greater weight. If you assign your own
weights, higher numbers receive the greater weight.
Data Type
Normal. This data type is appropriate for data that does not contain
gradient information (X, Y, Z).
Expanded. This data type is appropriate for data that does contain
gradient information and weights (X, Y, Z, DZ/DX, DZ/DY, W).
If your data type is expanded, you will have the option to supply
information about additional fields.
Select Control Grid Usage Select Data Hull Select Fault Dip Angle
Selected data type Compression factor Upper and lower Z-bound Semivariogram
Y direction block
Compression Factor
The value entered for the compression factor will force the boundary
between negative and positive grid node values (the zero contour when
mapped) either closer to or farther from real valued data points
(nonzeros). The zero thickness contour will be drawn closer to the
zero-valued data when this parameter is reduced during Isopach
gridding. The zero contour will be drawn closer to the non-zero data if
the compression factor is increased. The default (2) causes the curve to
pass approximately halfway between zero and non-zero data. The
allowed range is 0 to 5.
Upper Z-bound
This number represents the upper bound in Z of the bounded range.
Lower Z-bound
This number represents the lower bound in Z of the bounded range.
Boundary Tolerance
Enter a value that will be used to test each control points Z-value to see
if it is close to a boundary limit (Z-minimum and Z-maximum).
Z-values in this tolerance of the upper or lower limits are treated as if
their values were equal to those limits. The tolerance defaults to zero.
Compression Factor
The value entered for the compression factor will force the boundary
between negative and positive grid node values (the zero contour when
mapped) either closer to or farther from real valued data points
(nonzeros). The zero thickness contour will be drawn closer to the
zero-valued data when this parameter is reduced during Isopach
gridding. The zero contour will be drawn closer to the non-zero data if
the compression factor is increased. The default (2) causes the curve to
pass approximately halfway between zero and non-zero data. The
allowed range is 0 to 5.
Select semivariogram
Semivariogram
The semivariogram is a mathematical model of the spatial continuity of
a surface or any spatially varying geologic property studied using
geostatistics. Following standard notation from probability theory, an
isotropic semivariogram for the spatially distributed variable Z is:
2
E(Z(x) Z(x + h))
S ( h ) = --------------------------------------------------
2
In this formula x stands for the X and Y coordinates of any location
in space and x+h stands for the X and Y coordinates of another point
in space h units away from x. In the isotropic case the value of S(h)
is assumed to be the same for any pair of locations separated by distance
h.
Semivariogram Models
The four semivariogram models are:
Spherical
S(h) = C0 + C[1.5(h/R) 0.5(h/R)]where h<R
S(h) = C0 + Cwhere h>=R
Linear
S(h) = C0 + C*h
Exponential
S(h) = C0 + C[1.exp(h/R)]where h<R
S(h) = C0 + Cwhere h>=R
Gaussian
S(h) = C0 + C[1.exp(h /R) 2]where h<R
S(h) = C0 + Cwhere h>=R
Generally, semivariograms increase in value out to a distance equivalent
to the range. The fact that most semivariograms increase in value with
increasing range is equivalent to saying that the correlation between two
Z values decreases with separation between the points.
Semivariograms can be made non-isotropic by using the Trend Bias
option.
Semivariogram Nugget
The Nugget is one of the three variables which defines the
semivariogram when using the Kriging capability provided by Point
Gridding Plus. The Nugget is the sum of measurement noise and
localized fracture effects which reduce the accuracy of any single
measured Z-value. A positive Nugget implies that a grid model created
using Kriging may not exactly honor the input Z values which are used
to define the model.
Semivariogram Nugget
Semivariogram Sill
In the picture above, 10 on the Y-axis represents the Nugget or the
distance between data points calculated by the Semivariogram when the
empirical distance is zero.
The Sill = the Nugget + 100, or 110.
Semivariogram Range
The Range is the user-specified distance between any two points in
space at which the correlation between the values of the two points is
assumed to reach a fixed and uniform minimum value. Range is one of
the three variables which define a semivariogram and must be specified
only when using the Kriging capability provided by Point Gridding.
X-direction Block
This is the block dimension in the X-direction used during Kriging. If
X-direction block value is zero, then point kriging is performed.
Y-direction Block
This is the block dimension in the Y-direction used during Kriging. If
Y-direction block value is zero, then point kriging is performed.
Point Gridding
Select control point data file Select control point data file
Overview
Point Gridding uses nearby x,y,z data to calculate values of nodes in a
grid. Any data set that has values at x,y locations and would be
reasonable to contour by hand can be gridded with this option. Input data
are referred to as randomly distributed, which means they need not be
digitized contours or line oriented data (seismic). However, data in those
formats are acceptable.
Point Gridding allows you to specify:
size and position of the grid
how far to look for data
upper and lower limits for the grid
whether faults are used
how far from data to calculate node values
You can also force the size of a grid to match that of another grid or pass
values of a previously built grid through to the grid being built.
Grids are built in three stages:
data and parameter input
grid initialization
post processing (flexing)
Data and Parameter Input sets the control point file, Z-field, fault file,
and control grid to be used during the gridding process.
Grid Initialization computes the initial node values. You select from
nine algorithms. Each algorithm produces different results and is
designed for different data and geologic problems. The default is a Least
Squares algorithm. Once an algorithm has been selected, you may set
the primary and secondary gridding parameters and the data distribution
parameters before continuing to the Post Processing phase.
Post Processing refines and adjusts the initial values to more closely
honor data and to smooth the surface. To do this the grid is refined by
dividing the X and Y grid increments by 2, once or several times. Before
and after each refinement the surface (grid nodes) is filtered to smooth
it and tie to the data. You control how much refinement, smoothing, and
honoring of data is done. The default is one refinement and use of a
Biharmonic filter. A gridding report is output to the processing window
once this option is applied.
Control Points
A list of files is presented. Point to and click the file you want. A field
will be selected from this file and used as input when the option
executes. The grid node values will be based on the control points
(usually depth values from wells).
Z-field
A list of fields is presented. Point to and click the field you want.
Z-values in this field will be used when this option executes. Z-values
are usually depth or time values.
Faults
A list of fault files is presented. Point to and click the fault file you want.
Faults are needed only when building surfaces cut by faults. When faults
are used, grid nodes are calculated using only data located on the same
side of the faults as the node. A fault file must have been previously
constructed in order to be available for this option.
Algorithm Choices
Select the algorithm to use when Point Gridding executes. Possible
choices for this parameter include:
Least Squares
Projected Slopes
Weighted Average
Closest Point
Distance
Isopach
Bounded Range
Linear Trend
Moving Plate
These choices are discussed in the following text.
Least Squares (default) Each grid value is computed by fitting a
weighted planar least squares fit to the data in a circular area around the
grid node. The grid value is the Z-value of the plane at the grid location.
This method tends to smoothly pass through data with no sharp peaks
and over projection is possible. It is the most frequently used gridding
method as it works well for many types of surface data.
Projected Slopes At each control point, the program computes the
local slope (strike and dip) of the surface. These may be combined with
user-input slopes. Planar surfaces having these slopes are projected from
each data point into void areas. A grid nodes value is the average of the
distance-weighted Z-values of these planes at that node. Only data
inside a circular area around each node are used. This method tends to
exaggerate highs and lows. It is useful for monoclines where dips should
cause the surface to project above or below data values.
Weighted Average Each initial grid value is computed as the
weighted average of data in a circular area around the grid node. This
method flattens towards the regional average and consequently tends to
peak at highs and lows. It is considered good for equipotential type
surfaces.
Closest Point Each initial grid value is set equal to the value of the
control point that is nearest to the grid location. This method is
sometimes called the polygon method or discrete method. Normally it is
not reasonable to flex (filter) this grid. This algorithm is applied with
moderate to poor success on average lithology data (a number at a point
represents the lithology at that point). The degree of success improves
with more and better distributed data.
Distance Sometimes referred to as Distance to Closest Point, this
algorithm produces a grid whose values are the distance from each node
to the closest data point. Normally it is not reasonable to flex (filter) this
grid. This type of grid is used extensively in computer mapping to build
masking grids. A distance grid combined with a blanking grid operation
places ZNONs (null data) at grid nodes beyond or within a certain
distance of data. That modified distance grid can then be used to control
where gridding is done (Control Grid) or where filtering is done
(Masking Grid). The technique is useful for updating old grids with new
data.
Isopach This algorithm uses the Least Squares algorithm to calculate
node values. However, before node values are computed, every zero
valued control point is replaced with a negative estimated value. The
resulting grid will contain negatives where there is no thickness. A
contour map made from this grid will have a zero contour which passes
between the non-zero and zero control points. The Isopach Gridding
process can be altered (Curve Compression Factor) so that this contour
moves closer to, or farther from, real valued control points.
Bounded Range This method is used to grid data that has an upper
and/or lower bound to the Z-values, such as Net to Gross data. It uses
the Least Squares algorithm to calculate grid node values. However,
before grid node values are computed, values of control points that are
equal to the upper limit or equal to the lower limit are replaced with
estimated values above and below the limits, respectively. The resulting
grid contains values above and below the limits. A contour map made
from this grid has limit contours that pass between the limit and
real-valued control points. The Bounded Gridding process can be
altered (Curve Compression Factor) so that the limit contours move
closer to, or farther from, real valued control points.
Linear Trend This is the Moving Least Squares algorithm, except
that all data are weighted equally (Moving Least Squares weights by
distance). For unfaulted data, this has the effect of building a first order
trend grid. With faults, this algorithm produces first order trends in fault
blocks but will create very rough transitions from one block to the next.
Boundary Tolerance
This parameter is used only when you use the Bounded Range
algorithm. Enter a value to used for testing each control points Z-value
to see if it is close to a boundary limit (Z-minimum and Z-maximum).
Z-values within this tolerance of the upper or lower limits are treated as
if their values were equal to the limits. The default tolerance is 0.0.
Example
If when gridding Net to Gross the lower and upper limits are 0 and 1 and
the Boundary Tolerance is 0.03, any points with Z-values between - 0.03
and 0.03 are assigned a value of 0 and points with Z-values between 0.97
and 1.03 are given a value of 1. Consequently, these control points are
considered to be at the limits, and as a result they will be replaced with
estimated values that are beyond the limits before the grid is calculated.
(See the preceding discussion of Bounded Range under the Algorithm
parameter.)
Compression Factor
This parameter is used only when using the Isopach or Bounded Range
algorithm. This discussion is presented in terms of the Isopach
algorithm but applies equally to the upper and lower limits of the
Bounded Range algorithm.
Enter a value to be used. This value will force the boundary between
negative and positive grid node values (the zero contour when mapped)
either closer to or further from real valued data points (non-zeros). The
zero thickness contour will be drawn closer to the zero valued data when
this parameter is reduced during Isopach gridding. The zero contour will
be drawn closer to the non-zero data if the Compression Factor is
increased. The default (2) causes the curve to pass approximately
halfway between zero and non-zero data. The allowed range is 0 to 5.
Zr = 1 Zc ( CF 2 ) DRATIO
Where:
Zr = Zero replacement value
Zc = Z-value of the real valued control point that is closest to the zero
valued control point being replaced
CF = Compression Factor
DRATIO = Distance between Zr and Zc divided by the average Control
Point spacing
Type of Data
This parameter only has effect when using the Projected Slopes
algorithm. It controls whether Point Gridding calculates dip in the X and
Y directions (first derivatives in these directions) for each data point or
whether you provide these values in fields of your data file. Possible
choices for this parameter include:
Normal. You are not providing this data and would like the Point
Gridding, Projected Slopes algorithm to calculate DZ/DX, DZ/DY and
use a weight of one for each data point.
Expanded. You have an expanded data file which contains DZ/DX,
DZ/DY, and Weight for the Z-field to be gridded. The Point Gridding
Projected Slopes algorithm will use the first DZ/DX field, DZ/DY field,
and Weight field it encounters. If some values for these fields are ZNON
(null data value), Point Gridding will calculate them.
Primary Parameters
Proceed to
Secondary
Parameters on
Search Radius
Enter the distance that will be used to draw a circle around the grid node
being calculated. Data falling inside that circle are eligible for use in
calculating that nodes Z-value. Normally, only the closest data are
actually used. Search Radius is a parameter common to many gridding
methods; for more information, see page 392.
Secondary Parameters
Type of Weighting
Controls whether data influence, when calculating a nodes value, falls
off quickly or slowly with distance from the grid node. Possible choices
for this parameter include:
Sharp Weighting (default). This gives very large weights to close data.
The weight decreases roughly as an inverse squared function. This type
of weighting should be used unless you are dealing with very rough
(noisy) data.
Smooth Weighting. This allows even very distant data to have a
significant influence on a grid nodes value. It will produce a smooth
grid from rough or noisy data. However, the results will not necessarily
honor the data.
Extrapolation Distance
Enter a number representing the distance beyond the perimeter of the
data within which grid nodes are forced to be calculated. The default is
equal to the Search Radius.
If search radius, minimum number of points, number of sectors, or any
other parameters restrict node calculation to less than this distance,
those parameters are overridden by this parameter. Override means that
node values will be calculated even if those other parameters would
prevent this from happening. To prevent this override, you need to set
the Extrapolation Distance to 0.
Flexing Parameters
After setting secondary
parameters, enter from Flexing
Parameters on Point Gridding
main menu
Type of Flexing
The Type of Flexing button shows which type of flexing is specified
whether flexing is performed with a Biharmonic filter, Laplacian filter,
both filters, or no filter.
Biharmonic (default) The Biharmonic filter adjusts grid values so
that the surface resembles a rigid surface like a handsaw that bends
slowly and smoothly from one inflection point to another. This is
sometimes called a minimum curvature or minimum tension surface.
This is the default filter for Least Squares gridding.
Laplacian The Laplacian filter adjusts grid values so that the surface
resembles a bubble that comes quickly back to the average surface
position away from inflection points. If you stick your finger into a
bubble it causes the surface to peak at your finger and quickly return to
its original form away from your finger. This is sometimes called a high
tension surface. This is the default filter for Weighted Average gridding.
Combination Combination flexing applies the Biharmonic filter,
then the Laplacian filter. The results are not easily predicted, but fall
somewhere between Biharmonic and Laplacian, probably a little closer
to the Biharmonic, since it is the first filter applied.
Cutoff
In the Cutoff box, enter a number to use as a test value to determine
when to stop flexing. Flexing continues until the amount of change from
one pass to the next is smaller than the Cutoff value. The default Cutoff
value is 0.25000, which typically results in three to six flexing passes.
Cutoff is a common flexing parameter used in many gridding methods.
For more information, see page 525.
Number of Refinements
Enter a value that represents the number of times the final grid intervals
are doubled when determining the settings for the initial grid increment
values. These initial grid increments will then be used to build an initial
grid, that initial grid will be resampled to half its grid increments and
then flexed. This process is repeated Number of Refinement times until
the final grid increment is reached. This defaults to 1 and the range of
valid numbers is 0 to 5.
Many gridding methods use refinement. For more information, see
page 393.
Control of Passes
Use the Control of Passes setting to specify one of these conditions:
FLEX = NUMPASS Continue flexing until the Number of Flex
Passes value is met, or
FLEX <= NUMPASS (default) Stop flexing as soon as either
the Cutoff or Number of Flex Passes value is met.
Smoothness Modulus
In the Smoothness Modulus box, enter a value to specify the extent to
which you want to smooth the grid at the expense of honoring the data.
You can enter any value between 0 and 1. The default setting is 0.2.
With a value of 0 (zero), if smoothing pushes the surface away from the
data, Z-MAP Plus brings it back to exactly honor the data. A value of 1
(one) produces the smoothest grid, without regard for precisely fitting
the grid to the data. With the default value of 0.2, if smoothing pushes
the surface away from the data, Z-MAP Plus brings it back at least 20%
of the way toward the data. This Smoothness Modulus affects nodes that
are within 5 or 6 grid increments from the data.
To achieve an optimum trade-off between accuracy and smoothness,
you may need to produce several test grids that each use a different
smoothness modulus. The Smoothness Modulus is often used with
seismic data, with its value shifted towards 1. The effect is to remove
some of the wobble from contours that cross or run along seismic lines.
The Smoothness Modulus parameter is common to many types of
gridding methods. To learn more, see page 525.
Control Grid
A list of grids is presented. Point to and click the grid you wish to use as
the control grid. This is an optional parameter. Information from the
control grid such as X and Y limits and increments, node values, and
ZNON locations can be used when gridding. (See Control Grid Usage
on page 439 in the Primary Parameters topic.)
DZ/DX Field
This field represents the change in Z divided by the change in X, or the
first derivative in the X-direction.
DZ/DY Field
This field represents the change in Z divided by the change in Y, or the
first derivative in the Y-direction.
Z-weight Field
The Projected Slopes Algorithm assigns weights to the Z-values inside
a circular area around a node before averaging them. Z-values closest to
the grid nodes receive the greater weight. If you assign your own
weights, higher numbers receive the greater weight.
Points Per Cell This row indicates the number of data points
per grid cell.
Cells with Each Grouping This row contains the percentage of
the grid cells that contain zero, one, two, etc. control points. The
goal should be to have only one data point in a grid cell, and the
surface will be smoother if the grid cells that have data are
surrounded by empty grid cells.
In the preceding example, the program has looked at the entire grid
and determined that 83.95% of the cells contain zero control
points, 15.06% of the cells contain one point, 0.99% contain two
points, and 0.0% contain three or more points.
A large percentage of empty (0) grid cells would probably give
you a good grid, but would take much longer to process than a grid
that does not have a large percentage of empty grid cells.
It is much more important to have 0.0 percentage in the columns
represented by 37 points per cell than to have a small percentage
of cells with 0 points. Cells with 37 points will not always allow
contours to honor every point, no matter what the value is for the
smoothness modulus.
Contour Gridding
Were
Select fault file Yes contours built No
using faults?
Compute primary
Enter primary parameters No parameters from Yes
input data?
Honor point
No data when Yes
building grid?
Apply
Overview
Contour Gridding, sometimes known as Contour to Grid (CTOG), is an
interpolation technique which builds a grid from digitized contours. The
algorithm uses knowledge that adjacent points of equal value were
digitized from a continuous contour line to build a grid that accurately
honors the digitized contours.
In addition to digitized contours, Contour Gridding can also use seismic
line data (profiles) and/or well data (scattered data). These profile and
scattered data may also be interpretive data created to control the form
of the grid to be built. Other controls on the gridding process include
faults, x,y,z limits, grid increments, filters, and upper and lower limits
during filtering.
Contours
Select a data file from list of files of type DATA or CNTR (contour) that
appears. The file you choose is used as the digitized contour input file.
If this file is of type Marker or No Marker (as described in the following
topic), the first field of type Z-field is used as the digitized contour input.
Here the marker is nine 9s in the X field. The first record of the file is
assumed to have a marker in the X field and the second field is expected
to contain the Z value of the contour data that follows. The next two
records are X and Y coordinates for digitized points along the contour.
The next time nine 9s (Marker) is encountered in the X field will signify
a change in contour, and possibly a change in contour value.
Possible choices for this parameter are described in the following text.
The locations on either side of the + represent the X-field and Y-field
(e.g., X-field+Y-field for Marker+Marker). Although the notation
indicates which of the two fields is to contain the Marker, the fields need
not be in this order in the file.
Marker+Marker A marker occurs in both the X and Y fields.
The record immediately following the markers record contains the
Z value of the digitized contour in the X field. The Y field is
ignored. This is the standard format of a file created during using
Contouring. No Z field is required. The file should be a .CNTR file.
Faults
A list of fault files is presented. Point to and click the fault file you want.
Faults are needed only when building surfaces cut by faults. When faults
are used, grid nodes are calculated using only data located on the same
side of the faults as the node. A fault file must have been previously
constructed in order to be available for this option.
Primary Parameters
Use this dialog box to specify the following input values:
X and Y limits
X and Y grid increments
minimum and maximum Z-values
ZNON value
number of search lines
search radius
extrapolation distance
name of the intersection point file
MFD for storing the intersection point file
Grid Increment
Enter a number representing the distance across a grid cell. The grid
increment is the same in both the X and Y directions. This distance is
measured in the same units as the X and Y coordinates of the digitized
data. Computer time to build the grid is sensitive to the grid increment
but significantly less so than with Point Gridding. While the default is
usually larger than desired, it is good for a tilted plane (not an undulating
surface). The default is calculated in the following manner:
( XMax XMin ) Contour Interval
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Contour Maximum Contour Minimum
where Contour Interval = the smallest interval in the digitized file.
A good rule-of-thumb for determining Grid Interval is to look at the
original map that was digitized. Identify the smallest feature on that map
that you want to see reproduced when the created grid is contoured. A
feature may be the distance across a narrow ridge, a kink in a contour
line, or a closure. To reproduce that feature, select a grid increment
about half the size of that feature.
If the grid increment is small enough to store a feature in a grid, but the
map was not digitized with enough detail for Contour Gridding to
reproduce the feature, the feature does not appear in the grid contour.
ZNON Value
Enter the value to use as the ZNON value in the grid. The standard value
is 0.1E+31. The value can be any valid number supported by your
operating system. Do not use a number that is within the grids value
range, as this creates problems when you display the grid. For best
results throughout Z-MAP Plus operations, use the standard value.
Search Radius
This is really not used as a radius but as a distance. Enter the distance
(Search Radius) that will be the maximum allowed separation between
contour intersections, profile intersections or any combination of the
two, along a search line. If the distance between two adjacent
intersections exceeds the specified Search Radius, Z-MAP Plus does not
interpolate grid node values for that search line (using those two contour
intersections).
Instead, the closest of the intersections to the grid node will be used to
determine an Extrapolated value. If interpolated values can be generated
for any of that nodes other search lines, then this extrapolation is
disregarded and the interpolation(s) used. If all of that nodes search line
values are determined by extrapolation, then those values will be
averaged to determine the nodes initial value.
The default value is half the diagonal of the grid.
Extrapolation Distance
Enter a number representing the distance away from the data perimeter
within which grid node values can be calculated. All nodes beyond this
distance are assigned a ZNON value. The default is 2 times the grid
increment.
Flexing Parameters
This dialog box allows you to select the type of flexing to perform, when
to stop flexing, how much to honor the data, whether contour/
search-line intersection points are used, and whether contour constraints
are used. This dialog box also enables you to specify an upper and lower
band (surfaces) within which the flexed surface must remain.
Flexing, sometimes called Filter or Relaxation, is used to
simultaneously smooth the grid and tie it to the data. Flexings primary
purpose is to remove small surface irregularities in the initial surface
that are not supported by data. These irregularities were put into the
surface during initialization, and are undesirable in the final surface
model.
The Flexing parameters are common to many gridding methods. To
learn more, see page 520.
Type of Flexing
The Type of Flexing Type shows which type of flexing is specified
whether flexing is performed with a Biharmonic filter, Laplacian filter,
both filters, or no filter. (For a description of the flexing types, see
page 524.)
Cutoff
In the Cutoff box, enter a number to use as a test value to determine
when to stop flexing. Flexing continues until the amount of change from
one pass to the next is smaller than the Cutoff value. The default Cutoff
value is 0.25, which typically results in three to six flexing passes.
Control of Passes
Use the Control of Passes setting to specify one of these conditions:
FLEX = NUMPASS (default) Continue flexing until the
Number of Flex Passes value is met.
FLEX <= NUMPASS Stop flexing as soon as either the Cutoff
or Number of Flex Passes value is met.
Smoothness Modulus
In the Smoothness Modulus box, enter a value to specify the extent to
which you want to smooth the grid at the expense of honoring the data.
You can enter any value between 0 and 1. The default setting is 0.2.
With a value of 0 (zero), if smoothing pushes the surface away from the
data, Z-MAP Plus brings it back to exactly honor the data. A value of 1
(one) produces the smoothest grid, without regard for precisely fitting
the grid to the data. With the default value of 0.2, if smoothing pushes
the surface away from the data, Z-MAP Plus brings it back at least 20%
of the way toward the data. This Smoothness Modulus affects nodes that
are within 5 or 6 grid increments from the data.
To achieve an optimum trade-off between accuracy and smoothness,
you may need to produce several test grids that each use a different
smoothness modulus. The Smoothness Modulus is often used with
seismic data, with its value shifted towards 1. The effect is to remove
some of the wobble from contours that cross or run along seismic lines.
The Smoothness Modulus parameter is common to many types of
gridding methods. To learn more, see page 525.
Profiles
Select a data file from the list presented. You will have the option to
select a field from this file, which is used as profile input when the
option executes. This file is not required. Use profile input only if you
want to use the data to further control the surface as you build the grid.
Profiles may be used to control the shape of the surface in areas where
contours are sparse because the surface is relatively flat, or inside small
fault blocks where only one or two contours exist. Profiles are similar to
contours in that they must be digitized sequentially. However, unlike
contours, the Z-value is usually different for each point along the
profile. Contour Gridding uses profiles in the same general way as
contours. The intersections of cross-section baselines and profile lines
are computed, and Z-values from the profiles are used to further define
the shape of the network of cross sections. Then Contour Gridding uses
linear interpolation along the profile to determine the surface elevation
where the cross-section baselines and profiles cross.
A profile is a file of type DATA that contains either
X-, Y-, and Z-fields and special records that indicate the start of a
new profile
X-, Y-, and Z-fields, and a SEG ID field that indicates (by
changing ID) the start of a new profile
If a file contains X, Y, Z, and special records, the first record in the file
has a special number (Marker) in the X-field and dummy values (which
are ignored) in the Y-field and Z-field. Each time a marker of this type
is encountered, Contour Gridding assumes that a new profile is starting.
Files with these special records are generated by Landmarks digitizing
program Z-CAP.
Profiles are like cross sections that have X-, Y-, and Z-values at each
digitized point along the section. Straight line connections are made
between these x,y,z points along each profile. The straight line
connections that intersect Contour Gridding search lines create
Intersection Points for use during the gridding process. These profiles
are commonly used to more adequately control gridding between or
away from contours, near faults, and in areas of rapid gradient changes.
Z-Field (Profiles)
A list of fields is presented. Point to and click the field you want. This
input field will be used when the option executes. Fields in this list were
picked from a previously selected file.
Control Points
A list of data files is presented. Point to and click the data file you want.
A field will be selected from this file and used as input control points
when Flexing executes. This file is not required and should only be used
when you want to honor point data (wells) when building the grid. To
see how these data are used, see Smoothness Modulus on page 462.
Trendform Gridding
The Trendform Gridding algorithm creates two-dimensional
grid-based surface models, while imposing geologic constraints on the
models and the contour maps produced from them.
The ability to impose geologic constraints is not shared by other
Z-MAP Plus gridding algorithms, and is the primary reason for using
Trendform Gridding instead of other gridding algorithms. The geologic
constraints are encoded in already existing grids called form grids. Form
grids communicate the geoscientists interpretations to the gridding
process and may include:
Structure grids from seismic or well data created in Z-MAP Plus,
SeisWorks, or StratWorks
Isopach grids created in Z-MAP Plus, StratWorks, or other
applications
Contour Gridding (CTOG) user digitized contour data
Distance gridding from user digitized line features using the
distance gridding algorithm in Point Gridding and Point Gridding
Plus, or in the Macros Utilities Distance-to-Vertex Grid
(VERT-TO-DGRID) macro.
Trendform is easy to use compared to most petroleum industry gridding
algorithms. In fact, other than entering the names of input file and output
files and selecting input data fields, you are usually required to make
only three significant choices:
gridding algorithm to use
gridding bias value
form grid
The most challenging part of Trendform Gridding is selecting the right
gridding bias value. You may need to experiment with several values
before you come up with one that produces the desired results.
This topic includes the following subtopics:
Understanding Trendform Gridding on page 468
Using Trendform Gridding on page 471
Example 1. Applying Trendform to Attribute Modeling on
page 475
Example 2: Applying Trendform to Stream Channel Contours
on page 476
Gridding Bias
The bias factor (which should always be a positive number) controls
how closely the gridding process honors the form grid. In general, the
larger the bias factor the closer gridding honors the form grid.
Recommendations
The Trendform algorithm is slower than the other gridding
algorithms and should not be used on dense data.
At the other extreme, results suffer when too little data is used. Do
not expect good results when you use a complex form grid
together with a dataset that contains three wells.
Ideally, some data must be scattered throughout the area of your
form grid.
Since a high frequency form grid that contains a lot of contour
detail between control points may cause unexpected results, it is
recommended that you filter such high frequency information out
of the form grid before using it
Designate a new file name for the grid and the Location
Select an algorithm.
Gridding Bias
The Gridding Bias parameter controls how closely the output grid will
follow the form grid. The default is 20. The bias has meaning only with
respect to the units used for the X, Y and Z coordinates in your data and
your form grid, and you probably will need to do some experimenting
to determine the best value. Start with the default, then iterate until you
get what you would consider to be the most accurate results. This setting
must be a positive number not zero.
Viewing Results
To view the results of the Trendform grid, follow these steps.
1. Select Features Contouring. Create a contour map of the
Trendform results. When setting the Curve Drawing and Labeling
Parameters, be sure to specify that contours be Colorfilled and set
the Draw Contours Over Colorfill parameter to NO OVERLAY.
2. Select Features Overlay Pictures and overlay the form grid
contours onto the trendform contours to see how well the
colorfilled contours match those of the form grid.
Figure 2 -
Trendform Gridding with a Form Grid
Figure 2 show contours of the same
water-saturation data shown in Figure1. In
this case, the water-saturation has been
modeled to honor the form of the overlaid
structure contours. Arrows indicate where
honoring the structure grid contours has
elongated water-saturation features.
First
Line Gridding
Plus Parameter
Dialog
Output Type
The output type controls whether a grid is constructed, a line file is cut
by faults, the fault-cut line file is saved, or informs Line Gridding that a
line file has already been cut by faults. When gridding faulted line data,
each line must be broken (cut) when it crosses a fault. These sublines are
given distinct line names and stored in a new lines file. This prevents
line gridding from incorrectly interpolating across a fault. By default
this is done automatically when a fault file is selected.
Possible choices for this parameter include:
Cut+Save+Grid. Cut the input line file using the selected fault file,
save the results (Fault-cut Line Output File Name), and build the grid
using the cut line data. This saved fault-cut line file can be used as the
input Line File if Line Gridding is rerun. The faults would still need to
be selected, and this parameter set to Already Cut.
Cut+Save+Nogrid. Cut the input line file using the selected fault file,
save the results (Fault-cut Line Output File Name), but do Not build the
grid using the cut line data. This saved Fault-cut Line File can be used
as the input Line File when Line Gridding is used to build the grid. The
faults would still need to be selected, and this parameter set to Already
Cut.
Cut+Nosave+Grid (default). Cut the input line file using the selected
fault file, do Not save the results (Fault-cut Line Output File Name), and
build the grid using the cut line data. If Line Gridding was to be rerun
with this same data the line file would again need to be cut with the
faults.
Already Cut. If you are using faults and the line file you are to grid has
already been cut and saved, you can use the saved version as the input
line file and avoid recutting the original lines. When using a saved
fault-cut line file you will still need to select the fault file since the
gridding process needs to know their location. Remember, dont use the
original line file, instead use the Fault-cut Line File as the input Line
File.
The terms Initial and Final gridding intervals are sometimes used. You
must provide the final gridding intervals. Z-MAP Plus determines the
initial gridding intervals, based on the number of specified refinements
:
Second Line
Gridding Plus
Parameter Dialog
Use the second parameter dialog box to set the following parameters.
Extrapolation Mode
Extrapolation Mode controls whether grid nodes outside the data
perimeter are assigned Z-values up to the grid edges or just to a specified
distance from the perimeter. Possible choices for this parameter include:
X-Distance (default). Extrapolated values will be calculated away from
the data perimeter as far as the value entered in the Extrapolation
Distance parameter. Using this setting and setting the Extrapolation
Distance parameter to a very large number will have the same effect as
choosing Grid Edges.
Grid Edges. The Extrapolation Distance parameter are ignored and
node values calculated everywhere in the grid.
Third
Line Gridding Plus
Parameter Dialog
The third Line Gridding Plus dialog allows you to set the following
flexing parameters. The Flexing parameters are common to many
gridding methods. To learn more about how they work, see page 393.
Extrapolation Distance
Enter a number representing the distance beyond the perimeter of the
data within which grid nodes are forced to be calculated. The default is
equal to the Search Radius.
If search radius, minimum number of points, number of sectors, or any
other parameters restrict node calculation to less than this distance,
those parameters are overridden by this parameter. Override means that
node values will be calculated even if those other parameters would
prevent this from happening. To prevent this override, you need to set
the Extrapolation Distance to 0.
Number of Refinements
Refinements halve the grid increment to allow you to achieve finer
detail for your map. Enter a value that represents the number of times
the final grid intervals are doubled when determining the settings for the
initial grid increment values. These initial grid increments are used to
build an initial grid, that initial grid will be resampled to half its grid
increments and then flexed. This process is repeated number of
Refinement times until the final grid increment is reached. This defaults
to 1 and the range of valid values is 0 to 5.
Refinements are used in many types of gridding methods, and are
described further on page 393.
Type of Flexing
This parameter controls which type of flexing is done (which filter is
used). The Type of Flexing parameter is common to many gridding
methods. To learn more, see page 524.
Smoothness Modulus
In the Smoothness Modulus box, enter a value to specify the extent to
which you want to smooth the grid at the expense of honoring the data.
You can enter any value between 0 and 1. The default setting is 0.2.
With a value of 0 (zero), if smoothing pushes the surface away from the
data, Z-MAP Plus brings it back to exactly honor the data. A value of 1
(one) produces the smoothest grid, without regard for precisely fitting
the grid to the data. With the default value of 0.2, if smoothing pushes
the surface away from the data, Z-MAP Plus brings it back at least 20%
of the way toward the data. This Smoothness Modulus affects nodes that
are within 5 or 6 grid increments from the data.
To achieve an optimum trade-off between accuracy and smoothness,
you may need to produce several test grids that each use a different
smoothness modulus. The Smoothness Modulus is often used with
seismic data, with its value shifted towards 1. The effect is to remove
some of the wobble from contours that cross or run along seismic lines.
The Smoothness Modulus parameter is common to many types of
gridding methods. To learn more, see page 525.
Type of Flexing
The Type of Flexing Type shows which type of flexing is specified
whether flexing is performed with a Biharmonic filter, Laplacian filter,
both filters, or no filter. (For a description of the flexing types, see
page 524.)
Control of Passes
Use the Control of Passes setting to specify one of these conditions:
FLEX = NUMPASS (default) Continue flexing until the
Number of Flex Passes value is met.
FLEX <= NUMPASS Stop flexing as soon as either the Cutoff
or Number of Flex Passes value is met.
Cutoff
In the Cutoff box, enter a number to use as a test value to determine
when to stop flexing. Flexing continues until the amount of change from
one pass to the next is smaller than the Cutoff value. The default Cutoff
value is 0.25, which typically results in three to six flexing passes.
For information about how the Cutoff test works, see page 525.
Final
Line Gridding Plus
Parameter Dialog
Use the final parameter dialog box to set the Dip Angle Unit of measure
(either DEGREES or RADIANS) and the type of report printed to the
System window.
Report Type
You have three choices concerning the extent of the processing analysis
report: None, Partial, and Full.
None indicates that you do not wish to see the report.
Partial gives you a summary report.
Full gives you a full report.
Line Gridding
Overview
Line Gridding is an interpolation technique which builds a grid from
line data such as seismic, gravity, or bathymetric surveys. The algorithm
uses knowledge that adjacent points in the file, if they have the same line
name, represent a continuous profile along the surface. With this
knowledge, the algorithm can be an order of magnitude faster than the
Least Squares algorithm for the same data, and yet produce results of
comparable quality.
In addition to digitized line data, Line Gridding can also use randomly
scattered data, such as well data. Other controls on the gridding process
include faults, x,y,z limits, grid increments, filters, and upper and lower
limits during filtering.
Is surface
Yes No
cut by
faults?
Select fault file
Define gridding
Define parameters or Accept
accept defaults?
Flex the
Yes grid? No
Apply
Line File
A list of files is presented. Point to and click the file you want. This file
will be used as input when the option executes. The line data file is a
control point file (seismic data) where data is ordered as consecutive
points along lines. It must have a line name field in order to distinguish
one line from another.
If faults are being used and a Fault-cut Line File was previously created,
then that file can be input here rather than in the original Line File. When
this is done, you must set the parameter Select Output Type to Already
Cut.
Line Z-field
Select the horizon (depth or time field) for which you are making the
grid. This input field will be used when the option executes. Fields in
this list were picked from a previously selected file.
Faults
A list of fault files is presented. Point to and click the fault file you want.
Faults are needed only when building surfaces cut by faults. When faults
are used, grid nodes are calculated using only data located on the same
side of the faults as the node. A fault file must have been previously
constructed in order to be available for this option.
Already Cut If you are using faults and the line file you are to
grid has already been cut and saved, you can use the saved version
as the input line file and avoid recutting the original lines. When
using a saved fault-cut line file you will still need to select the fault
file since the gridding process needs to know their location.
Remember, dont use the original line file, instead use the Fault-cut
Line File as the input Line File.
Primary Parameters
This dialog box allows you to specify the X and Y limits, X and Y grid
increments, maximum and minimum Z-values, distance to search when
looking for data, the maximum separation distance between lines for
data to be interpolated, the extrapolation mode, and extrapolation
distance.
Most users have found that altering grid increments has the most
significant effect on surface form and honoring data. They have also
found that, for large volumes of data, reducing the Search Radius will
speed up the gridding process dramatically.
Many mappers feel that the features of importance should control the
grid interval decision rather than the data. A good rule-of-thumb is to
select a gridding interval that is half the size of the smallest feature of
importance to your project. If you are interested in closures that are 100
feet across, choose a 50 foot gridding interval. However, do not make
the gridding interval any smaller than necessary, since gridding time
increases rapidly as cell size goes down (e.g. cutting the grid increments
in half will increase the compute time by a factor of about 4 for Point
Gridding and, although not as severe, will still have an impact on Line
Gridding).
The terms initial and final gridding intervals are sometimes used. You
must provide the final gridding intervals. Z-MAP Plus determine the
initial gridding intervals, based on the number of specified refinements.
ZNON Value
Enter the value to be used as ZNON (null value) when this field is
written by Z-MAP Plus. This value can be any valid number supported
by your computer. It is best not to use a number between the minimum
and maximum value in the field, as this creates many problems when
building grids and when drawing contours from those grids. The
Z-MAP Plus default is 0.1E31.
Search Radius
This is not really used as a radius but as a distance. Enter the distance
(Search Radius) that is the maximum allowed separation between
search-line/data-line intersection points, along a search line. When two
adjacent intersections are spaced wider apart than the specified Search
Radius, no grid node values will be Interpolated for that search line
using those two intersections.
Instead, the closest of the intersections to the grid node are used to
determine an Extrapolated value (a line is fit between two intersection
points on that side and closest to the node and projected to the node). If
interpolated values can be generated for any of that nodes other search
lines, then this extrapolation is disregarded and the interpolation(s) are
used. If all of that nodes search line values are determined by
extrapolation, then those values will be averaged to determine the
nodes initial value.
The default value is half the diagonal of the grid.
Extrapolation Mode
Extrapolation Mode controls whether grid nodes outside the data
perimeter are assigned Z-values up to the grid edges or just to a specified
distance from the perimeter. Possible choices for this parameter include:
X-Distance (default). Extrapolated values will be calculated away from
the data perimeter as far as the value entered in the Extrapolation
Distance parameter. Using this setting and setting the Extrapolation
Distance parameter to a very large number will have the same effect as
choosing Grid Edges.
Grid Edges. The Extrapolation Distance parameter will be ignored and
node values calculated everywhere in the grid.
Extrapolation Distance
Enter a number representing the distance away from the data perimeter
within which grid node values can be calculated. All nodes beyond this
distance are assigned a ZNON value. The default is 2 times the grid
increment.
Flexing Parameters
This dialog box allows you to select:
the type of flexing to perform
when to stop flexing
how much to honor the data
whether the input Line File data are used
upper and lower band (surfaces) within which the flexed surface
must remain
Flexing, sometimes called Filter or Relaxation, is used to
simultaneously smooth the grid and tie it to the data. Flexings primary
purpose is to remove small surface irregularities in the initial surface
that are not supported by data. These irregularities were put into the
surface during initialization and are undesirable in the final surface
model.
The Flexing parameters are common to many gridding methods. To
learn more, see page 524.
Type of Flexing
The Type of Flexing Type shows which type of flexing is specified
whether flexing is performed with a Biharmonic filter, Laplacian filter,
both filters or no filter.
Biharmonic (default) Adjusts grid values so that the surface
resembles a rigid surface (like a handsaw) that bends slowly and
smoothly from one inflection point to another. This is sometimes called
a minimum curvature or minimum tension surface.
Laplacian Adjusts grid values so that the surface resembles a
balloon or soap bubble that comes quickly back to the average surface
position away from inflection points. Sticking your finger into a balloon
would cause the surface to dimple at your finger and quickly return to
its original form away from your finger. This is sometimes called a high
tension surface.
Combination This is a repeated application of first the Biharmonic
and then the Laplacian filter. Its results are not easily predictable, but
fall somewhere between Biharmonic and Laplacian, probably a little
closer to the Biharmonic, since it is the first filter applied.
Cutoff
In the Cutoff box, enter a number to use as a test value to determine
when to stop flexing. Flexing continues until the amount of change from
one pass to the next is smaller than the Cutoff value. The default Cutoff
value is 0.25, which typically results in three to six flexing passes.
For information about how the Cutoff test works, see page 525.
Number of Refinements
Enter a value that represents the number of times the final grid intervals
are doubled when determining the settings for the initial grid increment
values. These initial grid increments will then be used to build an initial
grid. Next, that grid will be resampled to half its grid increments and
then flexed. This process is repeated Number of Refinement times until
the final grid increment is reached. This defaults to 0 and the range of
valid numbers is 0 to 5.
Control of Passes
Use the Control of Passes setting to specify one of these conditions:
FLEX = NUMPASS (default) Continue flexing until the
Number of Flex Passes value is met.
FLEX <= NUMPASS Stop flexing as soon as either the Cutoff
or Number of Flex Passes value is met.
Smoothness Modulus
In the Smoothness Modulus box, enter a value to specify the extent to
which you want to smooth the grid at the expense of honoring the data.
You can enter any value between 0 and 1. The default setting is 0.2.
With a value of 0 (zero), if smoothing pushes the surface away from the
data, Z-MAP Plus brings it back to exactly honor the data. A value of 1
(one) produces the smoothest grid, without regard for precisely fitting
the grid to the data. With the default value of 0.2, if smoothing pushes
the surface away from the data, Z-MAP Plus brings it back at least 20%
of the way toward the data. This Smoothness Modulus affects nodes that
are within 5 or 6 grid increments from the data.
To achieve an optimum trade-off between accuracy and smoothness,
you may need to produce several test grids that each use a different
smoothness modulus. The Smoothness Modulus is often used with
seismic data, with its value shifted towards 1. The effect is to remove
some of the wobble from contours that cross or run along seismic lines.
The Smoothness Modulus parameter is common to many types of
gridding methods. To learn more, see page 525.
Seismic Unused. Do not use the original Line File data when flexing.
If a fault file was input, it will still be used.
Seismic Used (default). Use the original Line File data when flexing.
Apply
Overview
Trend Fit Gridding produces a grid of the regional components of a
surface such as the general dip or the major highs and lows. A trend grid
can be built using either data or another grid. The extent to which the
trend grid fits the data is controlled by the number of terms that are used
to compute the trend.
Once a trend grid has been built, it can be subtracted from a
conventionally built grid (point, line, or contour gridding) to create a
residual grid. The residual represents the local (small) variations of the
surface from the trend. Often these variations are masked by the regional
component, and consequently this technique can provide significant
geologic insight. The trend grid will itself often provide significant
geologic information.
Another application of trend grids is to assist in building grids of
complex geologic surfaces. Standard algorithms may have difficulty
modeling a particular surface form. If the trend can be removed from
that data, then those algorithms will often be able to effectively model
the residuals. The trend and residual grids can then be combined to
create the final surface grid
.
Number of Terms
The Number of Terms used to build a trend grid controls the form of the
surface model produced. You can specify from 1 to 28 terms. As the
term increases in value, the curvature of the grid becomes greater, fitting
the data more closely. With lower terms (less curvature), there is less
chance for the grid to extrapolate wildly. With higher terms there is a
greater chance for wild extrapolations. However, large amounts of
evenly distributed data help control these extrapolations.
Term refers to the number of items in the equation for the surface. For
example, a 3-term equation would be Z = c + aX + bY. The values for
the coefficients of the equation (c, a, b) are determined in such a way
that the surface generated by the equation fits as close as possible to all
the data (i.e., it is like a Least Squares fit to the data).
There is a relationship between term and order of an equation. The order
refers to the highest power of the equation. For example, Z = c is a 0th
order, Z = c + aX + bY is a 1st order, Z = c + aX + bY + dX2 + eY2 +
fXY is a 2nd order. Most mappers try to work with a number of terms
that fill out an order. A term-to-order table follows:
Terms Order
----- -----
1 0
3 1
6 2
10 3
15 4
21 5
28 6
When computing a trend grid from an existing grid, you can block
average. Block averaging divides your grid into sets of blocks, each
containing an equal number of rows and columns. The grid nodes in
each block are averaged. These average values are used to determine the
trend fit instead of the individual grid nodes. This method reduces the
CPU time required to generate a grid, normally, without causing
significant changes in the results.
Trend gridding is sensitive to anomalous data values (spikes in the grid).
Block averaging can often reduce the effects of individual spikes.
Residual Display
Residual Display determines whether the residual as a fraction of the
standard deviation is displayed.
Display ResidDisplays the information.
No Display Resid Does not display the information.
Typically, you would first look at a map of the residuals and a map of
the surface input grid on which contours from the trend grid have been
overlaid. Alternatively, you can display the residuals as colorfill and
overlay the contours of the input surface grid and trend grids. Using
either of these methods, localized high or low residual features, which
are geologically regarded as anomalies, can be easily identified.
Many application scenarios exist. For example, this macro may be used
to generate residuals and a trend surface from a velocity grid. On
examining the residuals, you could then identify high velocity, pull-up
areas
.
A grid containing a trend surface and a grid for the residual between the
input grid and the trend grid is created.
Spatial Distribution
The spatial distribution of the data is of primary importance in trend
gridding. Data that is evenly spaced throughout a field, as is grid data,
produces a trend that models the surface in a consistent manner. On the
other hand, data that is clustered, such as control point data, produces a
trend grid that resembles the structure of only the clustered areas. (You
have the option of inputting control point data when executing
Gridding Trend Gridding.) For this reason, the impact type data
can strongly affect the resulting trend grid.
Number of Terms
Another consideration is the number of terms used in the trend fit. The
higher the number, the more flexion there can be in the trend surface and
the closer it fits the data. However, it also allows the trend surface to
climb or drop steeply in regions of low data concentration near the edge
of the grid. It is desirable to use the lowest number of terms that
adequately describe the surface.
When using evenly distributed data, a higher term number may be
selected to generate a trend model that closely fits the data. However, if
the data is not evenly distributed, the great amount of flexion from the
higher term numbers causes sporadic behavior in the trend.
Block Averaging
Block averaging divides your grid file into a set of blocks, each
containing an equal number of rows and columns. The grid nodes in
each block are averaged to produce a mean z value for each block. These
mean values are used to determine the trend fit instead of the individual
grid node values. Block averaging drastically reduces the CPU time
required by the Trend Gridding Algorithm without significantly
changing the results.
Limiting Z Values
Limiting the minimum and maximum z values of the grid eliminates
drastic overshoot of the grid values above and below the data values,
especially when you are using 3rd order, or higher polynomials. Set the
minimum z value slightly smaller than the smallest data value, and the
maximum z value slightly larger than the largest data value.
****** PROCESS DUALGRIDOPS USE 15508 ******
Apply operation SUBTRACT
GRID FILE:trend 1
CREATED: 21 JAN 93
AT: 13:33
Polynomial Number
Expression
Order of Terms
0 1 A (Constant)
1st 2 x
3 y
2nd 4 x2
5 xy
6 y2
3rd 7 x3
8 x2y
9 xy2
10 y3
4th 11 x4
12 x3y
13 x2y2
14 xy3
15 y4
5th 16 x5
17 x4y
18 x3y2
19 x2y3
20 xy4
21 y5
6th 22 x6
23 x5y
24 x4y2
25 x3y3
26 x2y4
27 xy5
28 y6
Boolean Grid
The Boolean Grid method creates a Boolean grid of 0.0s and 1.0s to
indicate where a formation lies at each node (as in the following
example, which shows a formation below, equal to, or above the Oil
Water Contact level). The Boolean Grid method calls the
GRID-LT-EQ-GT macro.
The Boolean Grid method reads an input grid and produces an output
grid in which each input node is replaced by a flag value that indicates
whether the input Z value is Less Than, Equal To, or Greater Than a
designated Z level value.
GRID-LT-EQ-GT takes the following input:
A grid file
A Z level and equality tolerance setting
Flag values
For more information about Boolean Grid parameters, see Help
Online Manuals Macros Manual, then locate the
GRID-LT-EQ-GT topic.
Constant Grid
The Constant Grid method builds a constant grid from user-defined
input. This Constant Grid method calls the EVALUATE-CONGRID
macro.
You are asked to supply:
name of the output grid file
constant value to insert in the output grid nodes
minimum and maximum x and y values for the output gridding
area
x, y gridding increment
For more information about the Constant Grid parameters, select
Help Online Manuals Macros Manual, then locate the
EVALUATE-CONGRID topic.
Polynomial Grid
Polynomial Grid evaluates a polynomial function over a user defined
area and stores the results as a new grid. The Polynomial Grid method
calls the EVALUATE-POLYN macro.
Polynomial trends of up to the 2nd order are possible with this process
(a maximum 9 term polynomial function in which the highest order of
term in the function is x2 or y2). The process produces a grid with the
node values being the values calculated by the polynomial. You can
control the AOI of the grid, as well as the x and y grid increments. You
can also input the coefficient for each of the corresponding terms in the
polynomial.
A grid with the requested AOI and grid increment and node values that
are resolved by the polynomial expansion using the supplied constant
and coefficients.
User-Defined Filter
The User-Defined Filter method filters a grid by means of a user-defined
filter operator grid. The filter operator grid may originate either from a
GRID file on an attached MFD or as an external diskfile which is
imported.
The filter operator can possess ring symmetry. Ring symmetry means
that the values in the grid nodes that are equal distance from the
centerpoint of the grid are equal. The macro can handle up to 99 rings.
The input grid file may contain undefined values. These values may
exist in the grid itself or may be caused by faults crossing the grid. The
macro employs one of two methods to handle undefined values. If the
operator is ring symmetric, a ring-symmetric compensation method is
used; otherwise, an asymmetric compensation method is used. If no
compensation is desired, it may be turned off.
Specify the following input values:
GRID file to be filtered
optional fault (FALT) file
GRID file to be used as the filter operator grid
symmetry type of the filter operator grid. The options are NONE
or RING
whether to compensate for null nodes in the filter operator grid
origin of the ring symmetric filter operator grid (optional). The
grid can already exist or come from ASCII files.
name of the external file that defines the ring weights
symmetric operator grid (optional)
name of the output GRID file
This gridding method executes the USER-FILTER macro. (For more
complete descriptions of each parameter, select Help
Online Manuals Macros Manual, then locate the USER-FILTER
topic.)
Flexing
Apply
Flexing Workflow
You can use flexing, sometimes called filtering or relaxation to smooth
small (high frequency) features on a grid. This smoothing process can at
the same time tie the surface to data points. You can choose from two
flexing methods (Biharmonic or Laplacian) or use a combination of the
two. Controls are provided for which nodes are flexed, how much the
data is honored, how much smoothing is done, upper and lower limits
for the output grid, and whether a constraint band (limit surface) above
and below the flexed grid is used.
(1)
o
(1)
o
The grid that results from one pass of the template will not perfectly
satisfy the Biharmonic or Laplacian equation. This is because, even
though the center point of the template is adjusted to an optimum value,
the other nodes that were used to adjust that one were also adjusted.
Thus, second and additional passes of the filter are required to
progressively bring the entire surface closer to the desired form. How
close the surface gets to this form before it stops is controlled by you.
Flexing Parameters
Input Grid
Select a grid file from the list that appears. This input grid is used when
the option executes.
Faults
If the surfaces are cut by faults, select a previously constructed fault file
from the list that appears. If you include fault data, the calculation for
each grid node uses only the data located on the same side of the faults
as the node.
Flexing Parameters
This dialog box allows you to select the type of flexing to perform, when
to stop flexing, how much to honor the data, whether the surface is tied
to data while flexing, as well as upper and lower Z-values for the output
grid. Flexing parameters also lets you specify an upper and lower band
(surfaces) in which the flexed surface must remain.
Type of Flexing
The Type of Flexing button shows which type of flexing is specified
whether flexing is performed with a Biharmonic filter, Laplacian filter,
or both filters.
Biharmonic (default) Adjusts grid values so that the surface
resembles a rigid surface (like a handsaw) that bends slowly and
smoothly from one inflection point to another. This is sometimes called
a minimum curvature or minimum tension surface.
Laplacian Adjusts grid values so that the surface resembles a
balloon or soap bubble that comes quickly back to the average surface
position away from inflection points. Sticking your finger into a balloon
would cause the surface to dimple at your finger and quickly return to
its original form away from your finger. This is sometimes called a high
tension surface.
Combination This is a repeated application of first the Biharmonic
and then the Laplacian filter. Its results are not easily predictable, but
fall somewhere between Biharmonic and Laplacian, probably a little
closer to the Biharmonic, since it is the first filter applied.
Control of Passes
Use the Control of Passes setting to specify one of these conditions:
No Flex Perform no flexing.
FLEX = NUMPASS (default) Continue flexing until the
Number of Flex Passes value is met.
FLEX <= NUMPASS Stop flexing as soon as either the Cutoff
or Number of Flex Passes value is met.
Cutoff
In the Cutoff box, enter a number to use as a test value to determine
when to stop flexing. Flexing continues until the amount of change from
one pass to the next is smaller than the Cutoff value. The default Cutoff
value is 0.25, which typically results in three to six flexing passes.
The Cutoff test value is compared to a Maximum-Relative-Change
value Z-MAP Plus calculates. If the Maximum-Relative-Change is
lower than the Cutoff value, flexing stops.
The Maximum-Relative-Change value is the absolute value of one
minus the ratio of the maximum change in the surface on the previous
flexing pass to the maximum change in the surface on this flexing pass.
o o o
+
o x o Key:
o = eight nodes used to smooth
x = node that is thrown away
o o o + = value used
If more than one point is close to the grid node, the process is repeated
for each point and the results are averaged.
This process returns a Z-value at the grid node based on the control
points. This node value is averaged with the node value returned from
the flexing process. You control how the two values are averaged with
the Smoothness Modulus parameter. The Smoothness Modulus is used
to get a weighting value from a look-up table. That value is then used in
the following equation:
Zf + W Zc
Z = -------------------------------
1+W
where:
Z = final node value
Zf = modified node value from flexing
Zc = modified node value from control points
W = weight from look-up table and Smoothness Modulus
The look-up table has the following form:
10,000 W S.M.
---------- ---------
|x 10,000.00 0.00
|x 50.00 .25
| x 10.00 .50
| x 1.00 .75
W | x .25 1.00
| x
| x
| x
| x
| x
.25 -----------------------------------------------------
0 .5 1
Smoothness Modulus
You can use a limiting band to remove small features created by noisy
data. Because the data creates the features, using the data prevents
removal of these features. This capability is often used to take the
wobble out of contours. A good first try for the values is to add and
subtract 20% of the contour interval used to display the surface. If the
contour interval were 10, then an upper bias of 2 and lower bias of 2
might produce desirable results.
The following table illustrates the effects of positive and negative values
in the Upper and Lower Surface Bias and Multiplier fields:
Control Points
When you select Control Points, a list of data files appears. Point to and
click the data file you want. A field will be selected from this file and
used as input when Flexing executes. If you do not want Flexing to tie
to data, then do not select this file. If a Control Points file is currently
selected, select None to nullify the selection. To learn how data is used
during flexing, see the Smoothness Modulus parameter on page 525.
Grid
A masking grid is an existing grid that you can use to control how a new
grid is created. Typical uses of masking grids are to limit gridding to
locations where the masking grid is null, or to limit gridding to locations
where the masking grid is not null. Masking grids also provide the
second and third function during filtering.
Click a grid from the list presented to select it as the masking grid used
when Flexing executes. To use no masking grid, do not select one. If a
masking grid is already selected, select None - use no field to clear the
selection.
Operations
Overview
Grid Operations
The Grid Operations are:
Single Grid Operations Create a grid by performing
operations on each grid node, such as scale, bias, square, and
clipmin.
Dual Grid Operations Create a grid by performing operations
between equivalent grid nodes of two input grids.
Antilog Base 10 (from Grid) Computes the antilogarithm of
the input grid to base ten (which is also called the common
logarithm).
Blank Grid Blank a grid, or set a grid to a constant, inside or
outside a defined polygon.
Resample Grid Use an existing grid to create a grid with the X
and Y limits changed.
Grid to Data Creates a data file based on the node values of a
Z-MAP Plus grid.
Data Operations
The Data Operations are:
Single Data Operations Perform mathematical operations
such as scale, bias, square, and clipmin, on every x,y location of a
single field in a data file.
Dual Data Operations Add, multiply, maximum, blankmax,
etc. at each x,y location between two fields in a file.
Antilog Base 10 (from Data). Compute the antilogarithm of the
input data to base ten (which is also called the common logarithm).
Blank Data Blank data inside or outside a given polygon.
Grid to Data Convert grids to data.
Data Selection Subset datasets in a way appropriate for your
project.
Merge Data Combine two sorted input files of the same type
into a new merged output file.
Range Editing. Keep or delete records in a data file, based on
whether values in one or more fields are inside or outside a
specified range.
Rotate Data Specify an angle for rotating a files records.
Geophysical Operations
The Geophysical Operations options are:
Append X-Y to Seismic Time File Attach an X (Northing) and
Y (Easting) value to a seismic time file by using a seismic location
file and interpolating the shotpoint numbers in the seismic time
file.
Grid to Seismic Lines Converter Convert a grids rows,
columns, or both to seismic lines and concatenate them together in
one output seismic file.
Migration, Reverse Migration Produce a control point file
containing migrated grid nodes.
Mistie Reduction Shift lines to correct seismic misties.
Seismic Data Thinning Reduce the number of lines or
horizons from a seismic survey before gridding.
Scale/Bias Line or Area Use a constant value to add or
multiply all the points of a selected Z field in a seismic line or in an
area.
Normalized Interval Velocity (Data) Produces a control point
file with data fields describing top-lapped, base-lapped depth, and
a final normalized interval velocity calculation.
Normalized Interval Velocity (Grid) Produce a control point
file with data fields describing top-lapped, base-lapped depth, and
a final normalized interval velocity calculation.
Faults
Balancer Remove small segments of crossing faults, add
vertices to each fault at bifurcation points, and balance throws at
the bifurcations.
Calculate Fault Fields Recalculate an entire field of fault data
using values found in the input file. For example, this option can
recalculate Throw values from Heave and Fault Angle field values
or Fault Angles from Throw and Heave fields.
Dip Symbol Generator Produce a VERT file that contains
polylines. Hachures added to these polylines mark downdip sides
of a fault.
Migrator Migrate faults to surrounding surfaces above or
below the originally defined structure surface.
Profiler Generate a trace parallel to an input fault trace with the
distance proportional to some data value on the fault trace, most
commonly Throw.
Shrinker Convert fault polygons to regular, center-line faults.
Remaining Operations
In addition to the grouped operations, Operations includes eleven other
options. Most of these options lend themselves to classification
according to their intended functions. The remaining operations include:
Back Interpolation
File Conversion
Coordinate Transformations
Transformation Coordinates (Overwrite Fields)
Lat/Lon (DMS) to Decimal Degrees
Line Generalization
Line Resampling
Surface Intersection
The remaining operations can be classified into three functional groups
plus miscellaneous operations:
operations with lines
operations that modify data
operations with cartographic applications
miscellaneous operations
Cartographic Operations
Cartographic operations include:
Coordinate Transformations Convert latitude and longitude
to northing and easting values, or convert northing and easting
values to latitude and longitude.
Lat/Lon (DMS) to Decimal Degrees Convert degrees,
minutes, and seconds to decimal degrees, or convert decimal
degrees to degrees, minutes and seconds.
Miscellaneous Operations
Miscellaneous operations include:
Back Interpolation Calculate Z-values from a grid for each x,y
location in a data file. Resulting Z-values replace an old field either
completely or in part, or create a field for the x,y location in the
data file.
Surface Intersection Find the point of intersection between a
subsurface rock unit with present day topography (outcrop). Find
the point of intersection between a subsurface rock unit and an
unconformity (subcrop). Find the point of intersection between a
reservoir rock and a fluid contact, such as oil/water or gas/oil.
Perform quality control checks on grids.
Calculator
Select Operations Calculator to create a series of grid or data
operations and save that series to use again. All the options for each type
of operation (single and dual data, single and dual grid, and back
interpolation) are available on the calculator. Use the Calculator to
perform these tasks:
Set up mathematical equation that use one or more grid files to
create a grid (grid operations).
Set up equations that take values from one or more fields in a data
file and create a field of information in the data file (data
operations).
This topic is a brief introduction to the Calculator. Detailed information
for the Calculator is available by clicking the Help button in the
Calculator dialog box. The topic Using the Calculator describes all the
Calculator configurations and buttons.
For a list of functions for each operation type, see the following topics:
Single Grid Operations on page 540
Dual Grid Operations on page 544
Single Data Operations on page 560
Dual Data Operations on page 565
Input
Files, Grids,
and Fields
Select the
type of
Operation
Name the
New File
and/or
New Field
Move, Edit,
Delete, Insert Above
Buttons
Grid Operations
Input Grid
From the list of input grids that appears, select a grid to use as input for
the single grid operation.
Operation
If you click the Operation button, a list of mathematical operations
appears. The operation you select is applied to each of the values in the
input grid.
The single grid operations are:
SCALE Multiply node values by a constant.
BIAS Add a constant to the node values.
SQUARE Multiply each node by itself.
POWER Raise each node to a power you specify.
SQROOT Generate the square root of each node.
ROOT Generate the nth root of each node.
ABS Convert each node to its absolute value.
EXP Raises the natural exponent of the node value.
LN Calculate the natural log of each node value.
LOG10 Calculate the log (base 10) of each node.
SIN Calculate the sine of each node. Input grid node values
must be in radians.
COS Calculate the cosine of each node. Input grid node values
must be in radians.
TAN Calculate the tangent of each node. Input grid node values
must be in radians.
ATAN Calculate the arctangent of each node.
NORMMAX Divide all nodes by the largest node value.
NORMSIG Divide all nodes by the standard deviation.
NORM For all nodes subtract the mean and divide by the
standard deviation.
CLIPMAX If nodes are greater than a constant, set to that
constant.
CLIPMIN If nodes are less than a constant, set them to that
constant.
BLANKMAX If nodes are greater than a constant, set them to
ZNON.
BLANKMIN If nodes are less than a constant set them to
ZNON.
Constant Value
Enter a number to use as the constant for the Scale, Bias, Power, Root,
Clipmax, Clipmin, Blankmax, or Blankmin operations.
Faults
A list of fault files appears. Include fault files only if you are building
surfaces that are cut by faults. If you use faults, grid nodes are calculated
by using only the data located on the same side of the faults as the node.
Fault files are available for this option only if they have been previously
constructed.
Select grid A
Select grid B
Specify
Gridin 1 Gridin 2
Enter X and Y direction increments
Apply
Grid A and B
Click the Grid A and Grid B buttons in the DUAL GRID
OPERATIONS dialog box. Select a grid for each from the list that
appeears. If the title at the top of the list says this is the A grid, it is used
as the first input grid when Dual Grid Operations executes. If it is the B
grid, it is used as the second input grid. If nodes of the two input grids
do not line up vertically (are nonconformal), by default the A grid is the
template and the B grid is resampled to match.
Operation
Click the Operation button in the DUAL GRID OPERATIONS dialog
box. Select an operation from the list of mathematical operations that
appears (the Select Dual Grid OPERATION list). The operation applies
to grid value pairs that have the same x,y location in both grids. The
result is placed in the new grid at the same x,y location. Nulls in either
input grid typically yield nulls in the output grid.
Usual Range
Antilogarithms can be calculated successfully only for numbers in a range from
about -40.0 to +38.0. The exact range depends on the machine used.
Blank Grid
Which
type of
blanking?
Blank Grid uses a polygon or contour file to blank a grids nodes either
inside or outside those polygons or contours. Input to this option is a
grid, a polygon or contour file, and a value to replace all nodes that are
being blanked. The term Blank is used for this option because the
default replacement value is ZNON.
Input Grid
From the list presented, select an input grid to use when the Blank Grid
operation executes.
Type of Blanking
Controls which areas of the grid are blanked relative to the input
polygons or contours. Possible choices for this parameter are:
Inside (default value) Set nodes inside the polygons to the
specified blank value. Or, set nodes inside (above) all contours on
the file to the specified blank value.
Outside Set nodes outside the polygons to the specified blank
value. Or, set nodes outside (below) all contours on the file to the
specified blank value.
Clevel Set nodes inside (above) a contour level to the value of
the contour they are above and adjacent to. Nodes outside the
lowest contour level are unchanged.
Blank Value
Enter a value to replace all node values in the area being blanked. This
value can be any number that is valid for your operating system. The
default blank value is 1.E+30, the standard ZNON value.
Resample Grid
Enter AOI
Resample Grid is commonly used to make one grids nodes line up with
the nodes of another grid. Operations between two grids can only be
done if the nodes of the two grids lie at exactly the same x,y locations.
Although resampling is automatically done when operations execute,
resampling before a long series of operations means that resampling is
only done once instead of at each operation. Resampling is also used to
create a finer grid from a coarser one or (vice versa) when the form of
the output grid must remain the same as the original grid.
Input Grid
A list of input grids is presented. Click the grid which you want to use
as input into this process.
Select Faults
A list of input fault files appears. Click the fault file you want to use as
input for this process.
Include fault files only if you are building surfaces cut by faults. If you
use faults, grid nodes are calculated by using only the data located on the
same side of the faults as the node. Fault files are available for this
option only if they have been previously constructed.
X and Y Increments
Enter numbers representing the distance in the X and Y direction,
respectively, across the grid cell. These define the X and Y gridding
increments for your grid. The increments default to the increments of the
input grid. You can change one, both, or none of these.
Often you are trying to reposition nodes of the input grid to match those
of another grid. In that case, use the X and Y increments of the grid you
are trying to match.
ZNON Value
Enter the value to be used as ZNON (missing value) when the grid is
created. Nodes of the new grid are ZNON where ever they cover ZNON
areas of the input grid or lie outside the limits of the input grid. This
value can be any valid number supported by your computer. Never use
a number between the minimum and maximum value in the grid, as this
creates many problems when drawing contours from the grid. The
default is the same as ZNON of the input grid.
Grid to Data
Grid to Data converts a grid to data. Nodes in the grid become records
in the data file. The output data file has three fields, X (Easting),
Y (Northing), and Z which contains the node values. You control what
the Z-field is named. The other two are named as indicated above. Only
one grid can be converted at a time, and ZNONs may or may not be
output. You can specify whether every, every second, every third, etc.
node is output. The counting starts in the upper left corner and works
top-to-bottom, left-to-right.
Grid to Data is commonly used to:
Automatically generate synthetic (dummy) data to combine with
original data for added control. This is usually done by converting
a grid having the general trend of a surface to data, merging that
data with the original data, and reconstructing the grid.
Create data for input to a program other than Z-MAP Plus (for
example, reservoir simulator). This is usually done by converting
the desired grid to data, then selecting File Save As to output
that data file to a flat (ASCII) file.
Input Grid
From the list presented, select a grid to use when the option executes.
Rate of Conversion
Enter an integer greater than 0 that represents the rate at which grid
values should be converted to X/Y data records. For example, 1 means
all grid values are converted, 2 means the 1st, 3rd, 5th, etc. are
converted, etc. Counting for node conversion starts in the upper left
hand (NW) corner of the grid and proceeds top-to-bottom and
left-to-right (column by column).
Convert ZNONs?
Controls whether ZNONs are output as X/Y records in the new data file.
Z-values for those records are the ZNON value you specify in the
Output ZNON Value parameter. Possible choices for this entry are:
YesZNON (default value) Outputs the ZNON records.
NoZNON Does not output the ZNON records.
Data Operations
Input Data
From the list of data files presented, select the file that contains the field
to use as input when the option executes.
Input Field
A list of fields is presented. Select the input field you want.
Operation
A list of mathematical operations is presented. The selected operation is
applied to each of the values in the input field. Operations are:
SCALE Multiply by a constant.
BIAS Add a constant.
SQUARE Multiply each value by itself.
POWER Raise each value to a power you specify.
SQROOT Generate the square root of each value.
ROOT Generate the Nth root of each value.
ABS Convert each value to its absolute value.
EXP Calculates the natural exponent for the value.
LN Calculate the natural log of each value.
LOG10 Calculate the log (base 10) of each value.
SIN Calculate the sine of each value; input must be in radians.
Output Field
From the list presented, select a field for writing the operation results
when the option executes. You can replace an existing field or create a
field. If you create a field, you can name it with the default name or a
custom name.
New Field
Enter the name to store with the field. The name can be a maximum of
20 characters long and can contain internal blanks. The default name is
Z VALUE.
Constant Value
Enter a number to be used as the constant for Scale, Bias, Power, Root,
Clipmax, Clipmin, Blankmax, or Blankmin operations.
Special considerations are needed for the following operations:
Power The constant must be positive. However, the grid values
can be positive or negative.
Root The constant must be positive. The grid values must be
zero or positive; negative values yield ZNONs.
Is output
Yes field a new No
field
Assign new field name
and/or new field type
Input Data
From the list of files presented, select a file that contains fields to use as
input when the option executes.
Operation
Click the Operation button in the DUAL DATA OPERATIONS dialog
box. Select an operation from the list of mathematical operations that
appears (the Select Dual Data OPERATION list). The operation applies
to the values of each field on each record (same x,y location) of the data
file. The result is placed in the new grid at the same x,y location. Nulls
in either input field typically yield nulls in the output field, unless
otherwise indicated. All operations output a null value if null is the
initial value.
The operations are:
(where: A = first input field, B = second input field, C = output field)
ADD Add A and B.
SUBTRACT Subtract B from A.
MULTIPLY Multiply A by B.
DIVIDE Divide A by B.
MAXIMUM Output the larger of A and B. If either is ZNON,
output ZNON.
MINIMUM Output the smaller of A and B. If either is ZNON,
output ZNON.
CLIPMAX Clip values of A to B if A exceeds B. If A = ZNON,
output ZNON. If B = ZNON, output A.
CLIPMIN Clip values of A to B if A is less than B. If A =
ZNON, output ZNON. If B = ZNON, output A.
BLANKMAX Set values of A to ZNON if A exceeds B. If B is
ZNON, output A.
BLANKMIN Set values of A to ZNON if A is less than B. If B
is ZNON, output A.
AZIMUTH Field A must represent the slope dZ/dX in the X
direction, and field B must represent the slope dZ/dY in the Y
direction. This value is expressed in radians. The new field
contains the direction of the dip angle, calculated clockwise from
the north.
Output Field
From the list that appears, select a field to use for writing operation
results. You can replace an existing field or create a field. If you create
a field, you can name it.
New Field
Enter the name to store with this field when you create it. The name can
be up to 20 characters long and can contain internal blanks. The default
name is Z VALUE.
Blank Data
Inside Outside
Blank Data uses one polygon on a polygon file to blank values of a field
in a data file either inside or outside that polygon. Input to this option
includes:
a data file
a field
a polygon file
a ZNON value to replace all values that are being blanked
How it Works
Blank Data automatically adds another vertex to the polygon so that the
first and last vertex are coincident. Then, each x,y location is checked
against this polygon. If the point is inside (or outside) the polygon the
value in the field you have specified is set to ZNON. The input file and
modified field are written to a new file. You can modify the contents of
the old field, replace the contents of another field, or create a field.
Input Data
From the list of data files presented, select a data file that contains a field
you want to use as input when the Blank Data operation executes.
Input Field
This input field is used when the option executes. Fields in this list are
picked from the Input Data file you previously selected.
Polygon File
From the list of vertex (VERT) files presented, select a vertex file that
contains a polygon you want to use for blanking when the Blank Data
operation executes.
Output Field
A list of fields is presented. Click the field you want, or select New
Field. The new Z-values calculated during this process are written to this
field. If you select an existing field, the default is to replace all contents
of that field. See the Output Name, Strategy selection of this option to
alter this default.
Grid to Data
Identical to the Grid to Data process described on page 555.
The output data values must satisfy all the criteria you select. The record
order in the output dataset is unchanged from the input dataset, and sort
flags (in file headers of sorted files) are preserved.
Edits are performed in the following order:
Range editing is performed first.
Data thinning is performed next.
Location editing is performed last.
Apply
Select Dialog Box: To execute the Data Selection process, click the
Apply button in the Select dialog box. The process executes
immediately using the currently specified parameters for all edits whose
Edits to be Perform check boxes are selected (checked). If the dialog
boxes associated with those edits are still open and contain unapplied
parameter settings, the parameter settings are automatically applied. The
Select dialog box remains open, and the current parameter values are
saved to the LASPARM.ZCL file.
Save
Select Dialog Box: To save parameter settings without executing the
Data Selection process, click the Save button in the Select dialog box.
The Select dialog box and subsidiary dialog boxes close, and the current
parameter values are written to the LASPARM.ZCL file.
Cancel
Subsidiary Data Selection Dialog Boxes: To close a data selection
dialog box without saving changes, click Cancel. The parameter
settings remain the same as when you first displayed the dialog box.
Help
To display the online Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual, click the Help
button in the Select dialog box or in one of the subsidiary data selection
dialog boxes.
Delete
Select Range Edit Equations Display Dialog Box: To delete
equations in this dialog box, select the DELETE check boxes next to the
equations, then click the Delete button.
Data Type
From the drop-down Data Type list, choose the type of file to use for
the Data Selection process. The data type you select determines which
files are available as source files (as described in Source File on
page 576).
You can apply Data Selection to the following file types:
DATA well data, seismic data, and profile files
CNTR contour files
FALT fault files
VERT vertex files
DWEL deviated well files
SSEC seismic section files
XSEC cross section files
TEXT text files
Note that you cannot perform Data Selection on grids (GRID files).
Output File
Enter the name of the output file to create in the Output File box. The
name can be up to 24 characters long and can contain internal blanks.
The file type is the same as the input file. If a file with the specified name
already exists, the last four characters of the name are replaced
automatically with a version number.
Output MFD
From the Output MFD drop-down list, select a destination MFD for
saving the output file. The list includes the currently attached MFDs, the
scratch file, and OpenWorks (if you are using OpenWorks).
Source File
Click the Source File button to display the Input List dialog box, which
you use to select an input file. The Input List dialog box displays all files
of the currently selected data type contained in the attached MFD(s) and
in the OpenWorks project. If no files match, a message appears and
informs you that no files are available.
Once you click on a file, it is selected immediately and the Input List
dialog box closes. You can change the selected file and data type at any
time. The selected file appears as white on black background. If you do
not see the file you want in the Input List dialog box, take these actions:
Use the scroll bar to view all the files in the dialog box.
Make sure the Data Type button displays the correct file type.
Make sure the appropriate MFD is attached.
Make sure the appropriate OpenWorks project is selected.
Edits to Perform
Select the edit(s) to perform. You can select multiple edits. The output
data values must satisfy all the criteria you select. To select edit types,
click the Edits to Perform check boxes next to the edit names. A dark
button is On; a light button is Off. If multiple edits are turned on, the
edits occur in the following order:
Range editing is performed first.
Data thinning is performed next.
Location editing is performed last.
If no edits are selected and you click the Apply button, a warning
message may appear, asking you to select an edit type. (If you do not
specify a source file, no warning message appears. Error messages
appear in the system window.)
Location Edit
In the Select Location Edit dialog box, you specify a polygon source
or method to define the location edit. If you specify a method other than
None, a selection dialog box for the method appears automatically.
Records are selected from a dataset located inside or outside one or
several polygons that are collectively called the select area. Records on
the boundary of the select area are considered to be inside the select
area.
If this is the first time you have performed a location edit or if you
selected a blank Z-MAP Plus parameter file, this dialog box appears. If
you performed a location edit previously, the dialog box appears that
you used to define your most recent location edit.
Polygon Source Allows you to specify the method used to
define the Select Area. The Select Area is the union of one or more
polygonal shapes that collectively are used to define an area within
which data is kept or deleted. Possible choices for this parameter
include:
None If a blank Z-MAP Plus parameter file was selected or
if this was the first time you choose the Location Edit option,
then None is the value for this parameter. None does nothing
and is not a common selection.
X,Y) Polygons from Menu You may specify up to ten
four-sided polygons. x,y coordinates of these polygons are
typed in from the keyboard.
Data (LL fields) trans LL+10% \ use LL1% \ use use LL+1% \
uses select area data files projected parameters use as is as is use LL
Data (XY and LL fields) use XY+1% \ use LL1% \ use use LL+1% \
use as is as is use LL
Key:
use as is Use the coordinates without use LL+1% The Lat/Lon coordinates of the select area
modification. are expanded by 1% (add and subtract 1% of the Lat. and
use XY The file or select area source has Lon. ranges to their respective maximum and minimum
both values) before being used by Location Edit.
X/Y and Lat/Lon coordinates, only the X/Y trans LL+10% The Lat/Lon coordinates of the select
coordinates are used. area are transformed to X/Y coordinates and then expanded
use LL The file or select area source has by 10% (add and subtract 10% of the X and Y ranges to their
both respective maximum and minimum values) before being used
X/Y and Lat/Lon coordinates, only the Lat/Lon by Location Edit.
coordinates are used. trans LL origin The Lat/Lon coordinates of the select
use XY+1% The X/Y coordinates of the area origin are transformed to X/Y coordinates.
select area are expanded by 1% (add and N/A This is not performed by Location Edit.
subtract 1% of the X and Y ranges to their
respective maximum and minimum values)
before being used by Location Edit.
Error Reporting
An error is reported and the Location Edit is not performed if the input file or
the select area source file does not contain projection parameters when they are
required. Projection parameter requirements are indicated in the Select Area
Coordinate Types column.
Polygon Source
Allows you to redefine the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is retained or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include:
None
(X,Y) Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Polygons from Menu
(X,Y) Rotated Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Rotated Polygons from Menu
Polygons from File
Picture From ZGF
Area Limits from Data File
Area Limits from Grid
For a detailed description of each polygon source, see Polygon Source
Allows you to specify the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is kept or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include: on page 577.
The table on page 579 indicates how Data Selection handles different
types of coordinates.
Delete
Allows you to delete selected polygons from the Polygon Entry Box. To
identify polygons for deletion, click the button to the right of each
polygon you wish to delete. Those polygons with darkened buttons are
selected for deletion. To delete selected polygons, click the Delete
button at the bottom right corner of the Polygon Entry Box. Undeleted
polygons are shifted up in the Entry Box to fill deleted positions.
Polygon Source
Allows you to redefine the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is retained or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter are:
None
(X,Y) Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Polygons from Menu
(X,Y) Rotated Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Rotated Polygons from Menu
Polygons from File
Picture From ZGF
Area Limits from Data File
Area Limits from Grid
For a detailed description of each polygon source, see Polygon Source
Allows you to specify the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is kept or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include: on page 577.
The table page 579 indicates how Data Selection handles coordinates of
different types.
Coordinate System
This parameter specifies how to enter the Lat/Lon coordinates (for
example, deg/min/sec, grads, or decimal deg.). If the input style is
switched from one type to another, the current values in the Polygon
Entry Box are updated.
To enter a value, click the line and position and enter the number. You
must click each position you wish to enter (i.e., Tab, Arrow, and Return
keys do not advance the cursor input position). All maximums must be
larger than minimums of the same coordinate type. Order of the
polygons and blank lines does not affect the result.
Delete
Allows you to delete selected polygons from the Polygon Entry Box. To
identify polygons for deletion, click the button to the right of each
polygon you wish to delete. Those polygons with darkened buttons are
selected for deletion. To delete selected polygons, click the Delete
button at the bottom right corner of the Polygon Entry Box. Undeleted
polygons move up in the Entry Box to fill unused space.
This dialog box allows you to specify up to ten four-sided polygons, the
union of which define the Select Area for Location Edit. To specify,
type from the keyboard, the x,y coordinate of the lower left corner, angle
of rotation, and the width and height of each polygon.
Location Edit selects records from the dataset you specified on the main
menu that are located inside or outside this Select Area. Records located
on the boundary of the Select Area are considered to be inside the area.
Polygon Source
Allows you to redefine the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is retained or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include:
None
(X,Y) Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Polygons from Menu
(X,Y) Rotated Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Rotated Polygons from Menu
Polygons from File
Picture From ZGF
Area Limits from Data File
Area Limits from Grid
For a detailed description of each polygon source, see Polygon Source
Allows you to specify the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is kept or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include: on page 577.
The table page 579 indicates how Data Selection handles coordinates of
different types.
Delete
Allows you to delete selected polygons from the Polygon Entry Box. To
identify polygons for deletion, click the button to the right of each
polygon you wish to delete. Those polygons with darkened buttons are
selected for deletion. To delete selected polygons, click the Delete
button at the bottom right corner of the Polygon Entry Box. Undeleted
polygons are shifted up in the Entry Box to fill deleted positions.
Polygon Source
Allows you to redefine the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area in which data is kept or deleted.
Possible choices for this parameter are:
None
(X,Y) Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Polygons from Menu
(X,Y) Rotated Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Rotated Polygons from Menu
Polygons from File
Picture From ZGF
Area Limits from Data File
Area Limits from Grid
For a detailed description of each polygon source, see Polygon Source
Allows you to specify the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is kept or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include: on page 577.
The tableSelect Area Coordinate Types on page 579 indicates how
Data Selection handles coordinates of different types.
Coordinate System
This parameter tells the program how the Lat/Lon coordinates are
entered (for example, deg/min/sec, decimal deg, or grads). When the
input style is switched from one type to another, the current values in the
Polygon Entry Box are also converted. However, if the values in the
Entry Box are newly entered and Apply was not clicked on before
changing the coordinate input style, then those new values can be lost!
To avoid this problem be sure to select Apply before changing this
parameter. Choices for this parameter are:
D.M.S Degrees, Minutes, and Seconds.
Grads The French coordinate system. Latitude being zero at
the equator, +100 at the North Pole, and 100 at the South Pole.
Longitude is zero at Paris, +200 measured east to the opposite side
of the world, and 200 measured west to the opposite side of the
world.
Decimal Degrees The whole portion of this number is the
degree and the decimal portion is the sum of the minutes and
seconds as fractions of a degree.
To enter a value click the line and position and enter the number. You
must click each position you want to enter. (The Tab, Arrow, and
Return keys do not advance the cursor position). The order of polygons
and blank lines does not affect the result.
Delete
Use the Delete option to delete selected polygons from the Polygon
Entry Box. To identify polygons for deletion, click the button to the
right of each polygon you wish to delete. Those polygons with darkened
buttons are selected for deletion. To delete selected polygons, click the
Delete button at the bottom right corner of the Polygon Entry Box.
Undeleted polygons are shifted up in the Entry Box to fill deleted
positions.
Location Edit selects records from the dataset you specified on the main
menu that are located inside or outside this Select Area. Records located
on the boundary of the Select Area are considered to be inside the area.
Polygon Source
Allows you to redefine the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is kept or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include:
None
(X,Y) Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Polygons from Menu
(X,Y) Rotated Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Rotated Polygons from Menu
Polygons from File
Picture From ZGF
Area Limits from Data File
Area Limits from Grid
For a detailed description of each polygon source, see Polygon Source
Allows you to specify the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is kept or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include: on page 577.
The tableSelect Area Coordinate Types on page 579 indicates how
Data Selection handles coordinates of different types.
For lines that cross the Select Area boundary, this parameter defines
whether an extra point on the line and outside the boundary is retained
(inside if records were retained outside). This is important for display
construction when retained lines are to be drawn up to the Select Area
boundary. This parameter has affect only with line-oriented data
(seismic DATA, FALT, VERT, SSEC, XSEC, and DWEL). Click
(darken) the appropriate button to:
Yes retains an extra point on the other side of the Select Area boundary.
No does not retain an extra point.
Segment Identifiers
A list of all Segment IDs on the selected vertices file is displayed when
Polygon(s) for Location Edit is set to Select Individual Polygons. Click
the polygons you want to use for the Location Edit. Although you can
click more than 10 polygons only the first ten (sequentially) highlighted
polygons are used.
Polygon Source
Allows you to redefine the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is kept or
deleted.
Possible choices for the polygon source parameter include:
None
(X,Y) Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Polygons from Menu
(X,Y) Rotated Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Rotated Polygons from Menu
Use this dialog box to select a DATA file from the attached MFDs or
from the files saved for the OpenWorks project. The minimum and
maximum values from coordinate fields in the selected data file define
the limits of the Select Area for this Location Edit.
Location Edit selects records from the dataset you specified on the main
menu that are located inside or outside this Select Area. Records located
on the boundary of the Select Area are considered to be inside the area.
Polygon Source
Allows you to redefine the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is kept or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include:
None
(X,Y) Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Polygons from Menu
(X,Y) Rotated Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Rotated Polygons from Menu
Polygons from File
Picture From ZGF
Area Limits from Data File
Area Limits from Grid
For a detailed description of each polygon source, see Polygon Source
Allows you to specify the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is kept or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include: on page 577.
The tableSelect Area Coordinate Types on page 579 indicates how
Data Selection handles coordinates of different types.
Polygon Source
Allows you to redefine the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is kept or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include:
None
(X,Y) Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Polygons from Menu
(X,Y) Rotated Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Rotated Polygons from Menu
Polygons from File
Picture From ZGF
Area Limits from Data File
Area Limits from Grid
For a detailed description of each polygon source, see Polygon Source
Allows you to specify the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is kept or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include: on page 577.
The tableSelect Area Coordinate Types on page 579 indicates how
Data Selection handles coordinates of different types.
Thinning Edit
Thinning edit can be performed on line-oriented data as well as on
non-line oriented data. The dialog box which appears when you click the
arrow to the right of Thinning Edit depends on the data type of your
input file. The Random Data File appears for non-line data files such as
text or well data files. The Line Data File appears if your input data is
line-oriented.
Retention Rate
Specify the number that is to be repetitively added to the start retention
number in order to define the sequential positions of records in the file
that are to be retained. In other words, this is the rate at which points are
to be kept.
Use this dialog box to specify how Thinning Edit is performed for
line-oriented data (such as seismic, fault, and vertex data). To perform a
Thinning Edit, specify the first record in the file you want to retain and
the frequency for the remaining retentions (for example, every second
or third). The specified records are copied to the output file. In this way,
you can reduce the number of records in a dataset without regard for
spatial distribution.
Key
Unsorted - The order of records in the file does not matter.
N/A - The operation is not performed by Data Selection.
Conditionally - If extra records outside the Select Area are to be retained, the file
must be sorted in line name, shotpoint order.
Sorted - The file must be sorted in line name, shotpoint order.
Load Order - The order of the records in the file should be as they were loaded or
generated.
Control Field
A list of fields that can be used for line-by-line thinning is presented. If
you wish to thin only certain lines then select one of these fields. If you
do not select a field from this list then all lines are thinned equally.
If you select a field, the field value in each record is compared to one or
more masks you specify. If the line does not match any masks, the line
is passed to the output file without thinning. If the line matches a mask,
the thinning criteria is used to thin the line.
Thin Mode
Use the Thin Mode option to control how thinning is applied to each
line. Choices for this parameter are:
Endpoints+Rate Retains the endpoints of the line. In addition,
retain every Retention Rate-th record on the file, beginning with
record Start Point. This uses Retention Rate and Start Point
parameters.
Endpoints+Divisible Retains the endpoints of the line. In
addition, retain ever Retention Rate-th record on the file that is
evenly divisible by Start Point. This uses Additive and Divisor
parameters and is appropriate only for seismic data.
Intervals Retains only those records which are at least Distance
units from the prior retained point. This uses the Distance
parameter.
Operator
This parameter is active if a Control Field has been selected to force
thinning on a line-by-line basis. Thinning Edit enables you to select
lines from a dataset based on each records value in the field (typically
line name or segment ID). You can instruct Data Selection to compare
a fields value to a Value by using the following operators:
EQ Equal to value.
NE Not equal value.
LT Less than value.
LE Less than or equal to value.
GT Greater than value.
GE Greater than or equal to value.
Null Equal to the ZNON (missing value) for the field.
Notnull Not equal to the ZNON (missing value) for the field.
Use the following operatiors to test field values for membership in a
range bounded by value A and value B:
Between Between value A and value B (endpoints included).
Outside Outside the interval bounded by value A and value B
(endpoints not included).
Start Point
This parameter is only used if the Thin Mode value is Endpoints+Rate.
Specify the sequential position of the first file record that you want to
retain. This record is written to the output file. Continuously adding the
Retention Rate value to this number defines the sequential position of
the other records in the file that are retained.
If you have selected a Control Field, then you may specify up to 10 Start
Point values. Each value is applied only to those lines that match the
Line/Area Identification Masks. The Operator parameter (EQ, GT, LT,
etc.) determines the relationship between the records Control Field
value and the Mask.
Retention Rate
This parameter is only used if the Thin Mode value is Endpoints+Rate.
Specify the number to add repetitively to the Start Retention number in
order to define the sequential positions of file records to retain. (This is
the rate at which points are to be kept.)
If a Control Field is specified, you can specify a maximum of 10
Retention Rate values. Each value is applied only to the lines that match
the Line/Area Identification Masks. The Operator parameter (EQ, GT,
LT, etc.) determines the relationship between the records Control Field
value and the mask.
Additive
The Additive parameter is used only for seismic data and only if the
Thin Mode value is Endpoints+Divisible. Every Additive point on the
file that is evenly divisible by Divisor is kept.
If a Control Field is specified, you can specify a maximum of 10
Additive values. Each value is applied only to the lines that match the
Line/Area Identification Masks. The Operator parameter (EQ, GT, LT,
etc.) determines the relationship between the records Control Field
value and the mask.
Divisor
The Divisor parameter is used only for seismic data and only if the Thin
Mode value is Endpoints+Divisible. Every Additive point on the file
that is evenly divisible by Divisor is kept.
Distance
This parameter is only used when Thin Mode is Intervals. Retain only
those records that are at least Distance from the previously retained
record.
If a Control Field is specified then you may specify up to 10 Distance
values. Each value is applied only to those lines that match the Line/
Area Identification Masks. The Operator parameter (EQ, GT, LT, etc.)
determines the relationship between the records Control Field value
and the Mask.
Delete
Allows you to delete selected entries in the scrolling windows on this
dialog box. These windows are only visible when a Control Field is
specified. To identify a line in the window for deletion, click the button
to the right of the line of entries. Those items with darkened buttons are
selected for deletion. To delete those selected items, click the Delete
button at the bottom right corner of the window. Undeleted lines are
shifted up in the window list.
EQ and NE
Masks used with the EQ and NE operators may contain arbitrary
patterns of wildcard characters.
Example 1
Assume you are testing for Between and you provide:
Lower test mask = ccc* Upper test mask = jjj*
String being tested and result of test:
ddddd = between, because the first three characters are between c
and j.
adddd = not between, because the first character is below c.
dkddd = not between, because the second character is above j, even
though the other characters are between.
akddd = not between, because the first character is below c and the
second is above j, even though the others are between c and j.
ejdz = between, because the first three characters are between c
and j. The fourth character is ignored since the fourth character of
the test masks is an *.
Example 2
Assume you are testing for Outside and you provide:
Lower test mask = d%d* Upper test mask = j%j*
String being tested and result of test:
ddddd = not outside, because the first and third characters are
equal to the lower test mask.
adddd = outside, because the first character is below d, even
though the third character equals d.
dkddd = not outside, because the first and third characters are equal
to the lower test mask characters. The second character of the test
masks is a single character wildcard, therefore the second
character of the string is ignored.
akddd = outside, because the first character is below d, even
though the third character equals d.
ejdz = not outside, because the first and third characters are
between. The second and fourth characters are ignored, because
the second character of the test masks is the wildcard % and the
fourth character of the test masks is the wildcard *.
This dialog box allows you to enter, display, edit, and delete Range Edit
equations. Up to 10 equations can be active. The equations are listed and
entered in a window with one equation per line. The equations consist
of four parts: field name, operator, value A, and value B. The equations
allow values in particular fields of a record to be compared to constants
to determine if the record should be retained.
To enter a new equation highlight an unspecified line in the equation
window. Whenever you request the creation of an equation or request to
change an existing equation, the Range Edit Equation Input dialog box
appears.
Clicking the position for Value A and Value B allows you to type entries
on those lines. When Apply is selected, the equations are saved. The
parts of this window include:
Field Name
This is a field name selected from a list of fields displayed on the Range
Edit Equation Input dialog box. Values in the field are compared to
Value A and Value B using the Operator (EQ, LT, GT, etc.) to
determine if the record should be retained.
Operator
This operator is used to compare a fields value in the record to Value A
or Value B to determine if the record should be retained. Valid
Operators include: EQ, NE, LT, LE, GT, GE, Between, Outside,
Notnull, and Null.
Value A
This is a constant numeric or alphanumeric value used to test the value
contained in the field of a record to determine if the record should be
retained. This constant is used with all Operators except Notnull and
Null.
Value B
This is a constant numeric or alphanumeric value used to test the value
contained in the field of a record to determine if the record should be
retained. This constant is used only with the Between and Outside
Operators.
Delete
Allows you to delete lines (equations) from the Range Edit Equation
window. To identify lines for deletion, click the button to the right of
each equation you wish to delete. Those equations with darkened
buttons are selected for deletion. To delete selected equations, click the
Delete button at the bottom right corner of the window. Undeleted
equations are shifted up in the window to fill deleted positions.
You can use this dialog box to define or edit a Range Edit equation.
Selecting a Field displays parameters in the lower half of the dialog box.
Selecting Line Name displays Text A (and Text B, if the Operator
value is set to Between or Outside). Selecting any other Field opens
Value A (and Value B, if the Operator value is set to Between or
Outside).
Fields
A list of fields found in the Input file is displayed. Click the field you
wish to use to perform the test. The selected field appears as white text
on a black background. You may change your selection at any time.
Operator
The operators are defined in the Thinning Edit section. See Operator
on page 605.
Click this popup menu and the available operators are displayed. In each
of the above tests, Value must be of the same type (numeric or character)
as the field being tested.
When you specify multiple Range Edit selections, they are applied in the
following way:
1. Selections on a common field are combined into one selection
using a logical Or operation (for example, a record that satisfies
one of the Range Edit conditions satisfies the entire condition for
that field).
2. Selections for distinct fields are combined using a logical And
operation (i.e., the fields of a record must satisfy all of the Range
Edit conditions to be retained in the output dataset). Multiple
selections on the same field are combined (case 1 above) and
treated as a single Range Edit condition when considered with
those for other fields.
3. When the EQ and NE operators are applied to character fields, the
entry for Value may contain wildcard characters. For a discussion
of wildcard characters, see Wildcard Characters Definition on
page 609 and Wildcard Characters Application on page 610.
Value A
Enter a numeric value that is to be the constant for operations EQ, NE,
LT, LE, GT, and GE. This value is also the lower constant for the
Between and Outside operations.
Value B
Enter a numeric value that is to be the upper constant for operations
Between and Outside.
Text A
Enter a text string that is to be the constant for operations EQ, NE, LT,
LE, GT, and GE. This value is also the lower constant for the Between
and Outside operations. Wildcard characters (* for multiple
characters and % for single characters) can be used to define masks
for this text string. For a discussion of wildcard characters, see
Wildcard Characters Definition on page 609 and Wildcard
Characters Application on page 610.
Text B
Enter a text string that is to be the upper constant for operations Between
and Outside. Wildcard characters (* for multiple characters and %
for single characters) can be used to define masks for this text string. For
a discussion of wildcard characters, see Wildcard Characters
Definition on page 609 and Wildcard Characters Application on
page 610.
Merge Data
Select Operations
Data Operations
Merge Data
Apply
Use Merge Data to combine two sorted input files of the same type into
a new merged output file. You can concatenate, output the intersection
or union of the files, or create two files, one file being the intersection
and the other file being the exceptions. If the merge method is
intersection, union, or intersection with exceptions, then both input files
must be sorted using the same sort fields and both files must be of type
DATA.
Input Data A
Click the Input Data A button in the MERGE dialog box. Select the
primary input file from the list presented. The output file orders its fields
to match the primary input file. Values from the primary input file
records are output, however, only if the secondary input files equivalent
field and record has a null value or does not exist. The primary values
are written first, then the secondary values overwrite them.
Input Data B
Click the Input Data B button in the MERGE dialog box. Select the
secondary input file from the list presented. This file must be of the same
type as the primary input file. (If the file types do not match, an error
message appears.) For an Intersection or Exception Merge operation,
the values from the secondary input file are included in the output file if
the fields match those in the primary input file.
CONCATENATION
Concatenation appends two files of the same type onto each other by
appending the secondary file (B) to the primary file (A). This type of
merge operation can be performed on all file types except grids.
Example:
(X and Y fields are sort fields)
Primary File | Secondary File
|
X Y Top Thick | Xcoor Ycoor Top Net
----------------------------|----------------------------
27.3 75.8 4324.1 37.8 | 27.3 75.8 4324.1 12.6
32.4 41.5 3345.1 47.5 | 41.9 91.4 4112.8 33.3
54.2 23.4 1123.4 53.0 | 54.2 23.4 1111.3 38.4
Merged File
X Y Top Thick Net
--------------------------------------------
27.3 75.8 4324.1 37.8 1.E30
32.4 41.5 3345.1 47.5 1.E30
54.2 23.4 1123.4 53.0 1.E30
27.3 75.8 4324.1 1.E30 12.6
41.9 91.4 4112.8 1.E30 33.3
54.2 23.4 1111.3 1.E30 38.4
UNION
Union outputs all records unique to the primary file, all records unique
to the secondary file, and all records that are common to both. Common
means that all sort fields that are common to both files and have the
same value in both files. Union can be applied only to files of type
DATA.
Example:
Merged File
X Y Top Thick Net
--------------------------------------------
27.3 75.8 4324.1 37.8 12.6
32.4 41.5 3345.1 47.5 1.E30
41.9 91.4 4112.8 1.E30 33.3
54.2 23.4 1111.3 53.0 38.4
INTERSECTION
Intersection outputs only records common to both the primary (A) and
secondary (B) input files. Common means that all sort fields that are
common to both files and have the same value in both files. You can
apply Intersection only to files of type DATA.
Example:
Merged File
X Y Top Thick Net
--------------------------------------------
27.3 75.8 4324.1 37.8 12.6
54.2 23.4 1111.3 53.0 38.4
EXCEPTION
This is identical to the Intersection Merge Operation in that records
common to both the primary and secondary file are output to the merge
file. However, in addition, all other records of both files are output to the
exception file. You can apply Intersection only to files of type DATA.
Example:
Merged File
X Y Top Thick Net
--------------------------------------------
27.3 75.8 4324.1 37.8 12.6
54.2 23.4 1111.3 53.0 38.4
Exceptions File
X Y Top Thick Net
--------------------------------------------
32.4 41.5 3345.1 47.5 1.E30
41.9 91.4 4112.8 1.E30 33.3
Range Editing
Select Operations
Data Operations Range Editing
Apply
Input Data
Select a file from the list that appears. One or more fields are selected
from this file and used as input when the option executes.
Keep Values
Controls which points are deleted, either those inside or those outside
the specified range. Possible choices for this parameter include:
Inside (default). Keep all records whose Select Field values lie inside
the Selected Ranges.
Outside. Keep all records whose Select Field values lie outside the
Selected Ranges.
Scope of Edit
Controls whether the entire data set, or a subset based on Line name,
Area name, or a Text string is Range Edited. Whether inside or outside
was selected, only those records that meet the Scope of Edit criteria are
output. Possible choices for this parameter include:
Entire Dataset (default). Apply the range edits to the entire data set.
Line Match. Apply the range edits to all records whose value in the
Line Name Field (Field type 22) match the value you enter in the
Matching String for Limiting Scope of Edit. Records that do not match
are ignored for this edit.
Area Match. Apply the range edits to all records whose value in the
Area Name Field (Field type 23) match the value you enter in the
Matching String for Limiting Scope of Edit. Records that do not match
are ignored for this edit.
Text Match. Apply the range edits to all records whose value in the
Character Text Field (Field type 20) match the value you enter in the
Matching String for Limiting Scope of Edit. Records that do not match
are ignored for this edit.
Select Fields
The ordered selection dialog box is required when the user has the
option of determining the order in which field labels or symbols are
posted, or the order in which fields are printed on a report. The ordered
selection dialog box has two lists side by side. The left window is the
Source List. These fields are listed from your input data file. The right
window is the Destination List. When you click a field name from the
Source List, the field appears on the Destination List. By clicking a field
on the Source List, you indicate that you want to place that field on your
Output File.
The order of the fields on the Destination List determines the order of
the fields on the output file.
There are three mode buttons on the Ordered Selection dialog box:
Append, Delete, and Insert. These three buttons only affect the fields
on the Destination List. You can add (append), delete, and change the
order of (insert) the fields on the Destination List. Normally, the
Append button is the usual button to use when selecting fields to be
placed on the output file. Append is the default mode.
Append. To place a field on the Destination List, the Append button
must be depressed. Simply click the fields you want on the output file.
They appear on the Destination List.
Delete. You can delete any field on the Destination list. With the Delete
button depressed, click the fields you wish to delete from your output
file.
Insert. Insert allows you to pick a field on the Destination List and
Insert a field from the Source List on top of it.
Rotate Data
Select Operations
Data Operations
Rotate Data
Apply
Applications
This option can be used as part of a series of steps which incorporates a
directional bias into a grid. Given that there is an angle (say N33E), and
bias (say 3:1), to the surface, the steps would be:
1. Rotate to North-South (33 degrees, use all other defaults).
2. Divide Y-coordinate by 3 (scale by 1/bias magnitude).
3. Build a default grid.
4. Convert the grid to data (name Z-field same as the original data
Z-field).
5. Multiply the Y-coordinate by 3 (scale by bias magnitude).
6. Rotate back to original position (33 degrees, use all other defaults).
7. Merge (Concatenate) with the original data.
8. Build a grid of the merged data.
Data rotation can also be used when an equally spaced data array, such
as 3D seismic data, is not oriented in the NS-EW direction. To do this,
import the data as control points, rotate so that the data is aligned
NS-EW, and build a grid. Contours from this grid are not in the original
datas coordinate system. To display the contours in that orientation,
contour the grid, save the contours as a contour file, rotate the contours
back to the original data orientation, and then contour again using the
rotated contours as input rather than the grid.
Input Data
A list of data files appears. A field is selected from this file and used as
input when the option executes. The X and Y coordinates of this file are
changed so that the data are rotated about a point per specified number
of degrees.
Sort Data
Select Operations
Data Operations in
Z-MAP Plus window.
Input Data
A list of files is presented. Select the input file you want.
Sort Fields
You can select up to 10 Sort Fields. The file is sorted in ascending order
with respect to values in the first sort field. If that field has two identical
values, then the second sort field is used to sort those values. If records
have identical values for each of the sort fields, then those records are
output in the same order they occurred in the Input File, and adjacent to
one another.
Output Name
Use this dialog box to specify the name of the output data file and MFD
to use for storing the file (or use the OpenWorks project).
Field Operations
Use the Field Operations options to copy, rename, and delete fields from
all nongrid files. The file that contains the fields to be modified is never
changeda copy of the file is created.
Copy Only Selected Fields, Copy Original Fields and Add Additional Fields
Copy Original Fields and Add Additional Fields has the same menu as
the Copy Only Selected Fields procedure, but the results are different.
Copy Original and Add copies all fields in the input file to the output
file, and enables you to select fields to add. The field parameters for
additional fields can be altered to create additional fields in the output
file. You can also modify field parameters for copied fields.
Select one of
two copy fields
methods Copy original fields and
Copy only selected fields
add additional fields
Change
Yes any field No
parameters?
Change field name, type,
format and/or ZNON
Apply
field type
stored format descriptors (FORTRAN format)
ZNONs
destination MFD or OpenWorks project
The fields source file is not altered. You name a new file and select the
output MFD.
Input File
A list of non-grid files is presented. Point to and click the file you want.
This file is used as input when the option executes.
If you are in the Copy Original Fields and Add Additional Fields menu, you are
not selecting fields to copy; you are copying all your fields and you are selecting
fields to add.
Append Mode
This mode is the default mode and is used to copy an item in the source
list to the end of the destination list. You put the dialog box into append
mode by selecting the append radio button.
Delete Mode
Use this mode to delete items from the destination list. You put the
dialog box into delete mode by selecting the Delete button. In delete
mode, you delete an item from the destination list by selecting it.
Even Multiples
The maximum size is an even multiple of 4.
Example:
Example:
New ZNON
Enter the new default ZNON value to be stored with this field when it is
copied. The standard Z-MAP Plus ZNON is 0.1E+31.
Rename Fields
Apply
Overview
Fields of any type in the selected file can be renamed. The process of
renaming is actually a copy of the old file to a new file, renaming the
fields in the process. All fields in the old file are copied to the new file;
only those fields selected are renamed. The original file is unaltered.
Input File
Select an input file from the list of files that appears.
Fields to Rename
A list of Fields is presented. Point to and click the Fields you want to
rename. Fields selected to be renamed appear as white letters on a black
background. You can toggle these fields on and off until you are ready
to rename.
Delete Fields
Apply
To verify, select the output file name. When you select Fields
to Delete, it should have only the fields you did not delete.
Input File
A list of files is presented. Point to and click the file you want. This file
is used as input when the option executes.
Fields to Delete
Select one or more fields to delete from the list that appears. The
selected fields are deleted immediately when Delete Fields executes. No
confirmation message box appears. Once you Apply field deletion, the
fields are deleted. However, since Z-MAP Plus never modifies an
existing file, you can go back to the original file to get a deleted field.
Geophysical Operations
For example:
Velocity Grid
Click the Velocity Grid button in the MIGRATION, REVERSE
MIGRATION dialog box. From the list that appears (the Select
VELOCITY GRID list), select a velocity grid to use. The depth units in
this grid must match the depth units used in supporting fault or control
point files. The time units must match those used in the selected time
horizon grid.
Velocity Faults
Optional: If the map has faults and you want to use a fault file for the
velocity grid, click the Velocity Faults button in the MIGRATION,
REVERSE MIGRATION dialog box. From the list that appears (the
Select VELOCITY FAULTS list), select a fault file to use. If the fault
file contains Z-fields, the Z-field units must be consistent with the
velocity units in the velocity grid.
Control Points
Optional: To use control points, click the Control Points button in the
MIGRATION, REVERSE MIGRATION dialog box. From the list that
appears (the Select CONTROL POINTS list), select a control point file
to use. The Z-field units in this file must be consistent the depth units in
the velocity grid.
Output Files
Optional: To create output files, click the Output Files button in the
MIGRATION, REVERSE MIGRATION dialog box. Use the Name
OUTPUT files dialog box that appears for specifying a maximum of six
output files. Name each file and specify the MFD to use for storing it.
Output file names can have a maximum of 24 characters and can contain
internal blanks. You are asked for an output file name and output MFD
or OpenWorks for the following:
migrated nodes
migration vectors
unmigrated nodes
migrated time faults
migrated control points
unmigrated control points
If you do not specify output file names and locations, output is stored in
the scratch file.
Migration Parameters
Optional: To set migration parameters, click the Migration
Parameters button in the MIGRATION, REVERSE MIGRATION
dialog box. Use the MIGRATION parameters dialog box that appears
for specifying the following options:
Direction of Migration From the Direction of Migration list,
select FORWARD or REVERSE migration.
Type of Time From the Type of Time list, select ONE WAY
TIME or TWO WAY TIME. Select the option that is consistent
with the time horizon grid.
Time Units From the Time Units list, select SECONDS or
MILLISECONDS. Select the option that is consistent with the
time horizon grid.
Fill gap on fault migration failures? From the Fill gap on
fault migration failures list, select CONNECT or BREAK. If a
fault passes through a grid cell that is either overmigrated or not
defined (null), the fault is broken into two separate faults (the
BREAK option) or it is connected across the grid cell by a straight
line (the CONNECT option).
Sampling Rate for Time Horizon Faults From the Sampling
Rate for Time Horizon Faults list, select one of the following rates
for sampling the input fault file.
To migrate a fault correctly, at least one vertex point must exist per
grid cell. However, in order to ensure proper fault migration, you
may need to use a higher sampling rate two, four or eight
vertices per cell. As a general rule, the smaller the grid interval, the
coarser the sampling rate.
The available fault file sampling rates are defined as follows:
COARSEST One vertex point per grid cell.
COARSE Two vertices per grid cell.
MEDIUM Four vertices per grid cell.
FINE Eight vertices per grid cell.
Output Z-field
Optional: If you have specified a control point file to be migrated, you
must assign a name to the Z-field that contains the migrated control
points. The Select output Z-FIELD for Migrated Control Points list
appears, which shows the Z-fields in the selected control point file. To
overwrite one of these Z-fields, select that field. To create a new Z-field
for the migrated control points, select the Create a new Z-FIELD
option and enter the field name in the New Z-FIELD dialog box.
Mistie Reduction
Input Z-field
This is the name of the Z-field whose values are to be shifted to reduce
misties. The names of the Z-fields on your input seismic line data file
are displayed. Select the Z-field whose values you wish to check for
misties. The default Z-field is the first Z-field in the input seismic line
file.
Adjustment Desired?
This option enables you to select which Z-fields are shifted in the course
of reducing misties. When additional Z-fields are also shifted, their
Z-values are also shifted by the same amount as the value of the selected
Z-field.
Horizon Only
Only the Z-values on the present horizon (selected input Z-field) are
shifted.
If the fields are not in top-down order, use Field Operations to copy
them into a new seismic file in the correct top-down order before
running this Mistie Reduction process.
All Horizons
This selection results in the shifting of Z values for all Z Fields in the
input seismic data file.
Select Operations
Geophysical Operations
Seismic Data Thinning
Window
Yes data in the No
file?
Select up to 10 fields for
windowing
Input File
Select the name of a data file to thin from the list that appears.
X Field
Select the field that you are using for X values in your dataset. This
defaults to the first field with X values in your data, so you do not need
to select this unless you have more than one X field.
Y Field
Select the field that you are using for Y values in your dataset. This
defaults to the first field with Y values in your data, so you do not need
to select this unless you have more than one Y field.
Shotpoint Field
Select the field that you are using for the shotpoints in your dataset. This
defaults to the first field with shot point values in your data, so you do
not need to select this unless you have more than one shot point field.
This is necessary for seismic thinning, but you dont need this for well
data. Seismic thinning thins by shotpoint you select a starting
shotpoint and an increment to thin by.
Segment ID Field
Select the Segment ID field if you are thinning digitized line (vertex)
data such as coastlines, faults, or lease boundaries. Any points in a
vertex type file that have the same Segment ID are connected by a line
when the line is drawn. When a different Segment ID is reached, the
program interprets it as a separate line. Z-MAP Plus defaults to the first
field of this type in the dataset, so you would usually not need to select
this unless you have more than one Segment ID field.
Enter Scale/bias value for line Enter Scale/bias value for area
Input File
From the list that appears, select the input file to scale (multiply) or bias
(add) a constant to.
Scale/Bias Field
Select the field that you would like to have a constant multiplied or
added to. A list of the numeric (non-character) fields that is on the
selected data file is provided.
Faults
Fault operations help you condition faults to increase accuracy during
gridding. The example workflow that follows shows how to use several
operations to condition a fault file so it can be used with the Z-MAP Plus
non-opaque fault (faults with throws) gridding methods (Point Gridding
Plus, Line Gridding Plus, or Trendform Gridding).
.
Post the fault traces derived from the Shrinker process on a map.
Visually check the heave and vertical separation values using
Operations Faults Profiler.
Examine the new fault angle fields using the Faults Profiler.
Using the Z-MAP Plus Edit Data Editor option,
edit the fault angle and vertical separation values.
Balancer
The fault Balancer option helps to balance fault bifurcations to adjust
the throw values on fault traces that are in close proximity to each
bifurcation. Balancing means that the throws around each bifurcation
point add to zero. The Balancer operation:
locates bifurcations in a regular fault file
removes small segments of the crossing faults that are not needed
extends (snaps) fault traces that almost touch another fault so that
the two faults meet
adds vertices to each fault at the bifurcation points
balances vertical separation at the bifurcations
reports the Segment I.D. of faults that appear to have incorrect
patterns of vertical separation
Balancer normally seeks out each bifurcation point in a set of regular
fault traces with throw information obtained by running the
Operations Faults Shrinker option. So you would typically run
Shrinker before Balancer.
You are asked to specify:
name of the input fault file and its associated MFD
the vertical separation (throw) field on the input fault file
extent of the output report
tolerance distance to be used in determining whether one fault
touches another
maximum distance to extrapolate vertical separation (throw) along
the fault
name of the output balanced centerline fault
MFD for the output balanced centerline fault
Output includes a regular fault file with:
center-line fault traces snapped and clipped at bifurcation or
compensation points
the vertical separation along splitting faults balanced at the fault
trace intersection
You may need to perform minor touch up to the vertical separation
values calculated in this operation before running one of the non-opaque
fault geometry gridding methods.
Balancer calls the FAULT-BALANCER macro. For detailed
information about parameters for this operation, select Help
Online Manuals Macro Manual, then locate the
FAULT-BALANCER topic.
When regular fault files are output, they can require editing before you
process them further in Z-MAP Plus gridding methods. Once you have
edited the fields in a regular fault file, you can use the enhanced fault
processing available in Point Gridding Plus, Line Gridding Plus or
Trendform Gridding. The three field types used by these gridding
methods to create expanded faults are vertical separation, heave, and
fault dip angle.
When regular fault traces emerge from the Operations Fault
Shrinker option, the unedited fields usually do not have consistently
good vertical separation and heave values. In editing the regular fault
files, you get a good idea what the vertical separation values should be,
but a poor understanding of what the heaves should look like. Since
these heaves are used to produce the geometry of the expanded fault
polygon traces, they are the focus of the field value editing.
You must input a regular fault file. This fault file must have vertical
separation, heave, and fault dip angle fields.
Migrator
The Migrator produces a set of centerline traces adjusted from their
current map position to the position they would have on a structure
surface either above or below the structure surface to which the faults
belong. Faults with small vertical separation at the ends are shortened
automatically.
You must input a fault file containing regular, centerline faults with dip
and vertical separation information. The isochore thickness (thickness
between the faults horizon and the horizon to which the faults are
migrated) may be encoded on the input fault file or input directly as a
constant value. You can specify rates of change of dip and vertical
separation (throw) to model the migration of listric faults.
The thickness field in the input fault file is normally created by
interpolating values from an unfaulted isochore grid that represents
thickness between the surface for which faults exist and the surface to
which the faults are migrated.
After migration, some minor editing is usually required to fix
bifurcations that may have separated and to remove or add faults that
die-out or start-up on the target structure surface. Balancer can aid in
this task.
You are asked to specify:
a required fault file, its associated MFD, and field parameters
whether larger or smaller values are deeper
constant dip value if there is no dip field
constant thickness value if there is no z field for isochore thickness
change in dip angle and vertical separation (throw) for depth unit
minimum acceptable length of fault traces
minimum acceptable vertical separation (throw) value
output centerline fault file and its associated MFD
Before You Use the Output File for Other Fault Processing Macros
You must eliminate the isochore thickness value from the file before you can use
the output file for other fault processing utilities.
Original Fault
Profiler
This process creates a fault file and a vertex file which graphically
describe an attribute distribution along a centerline fault. The attribute
could be throw, heave or fault angle. The output, when displayed on a
map with the original faults, provides a visual representation of the
chosen attribute field in the fault file. The output can be thought of as a
cross-section profile of the attribute laid on its side. The input fault
traces are the baseline for the cross section and represent a value of zero
for the attribute on the section. Positive deviations from the centerline
faults (positive throws, for instance) appear by default on the upthrown
side of the fault, while negatives appear on the downthrown side. The
display of output from this process can be used to:
identify reversals in direction of throw along a fault
detect high variations in throw along the fault
evaluate how well the fault balances at bifurcations
Using closed polygons, you can colorfill the area between the input
faults and the profile faults that result from this process. The closed
polygons consist of the input faults tied with the profile faults. You can
save both the polygon and the map view profile fault file.
You are asked to specify:
required fault file and its field parameters
map scaling profile method
maximum profile height
depth in positive or negative units
side of trace on which the profile should appear
output fault and polygon profile file names
color and posting information for polygons and lines
Profiler calls the FAULT-PROFILE macro. For detailed information
about parameters for this operation, select Help Online Manuals
Macro Manual, then locate the FAULT-PROFILE topic.
Shrinker
Shrinker automatically converts fault polygons to regular, center-line
faults. If a seismic data file is also input, then the process can calculate
the vertical separations (called Throw in the parameter prompts),
heave, and dip angle at each point where the seismic lines cross the
newly created regular faults. If the faults are already regular faults, then
the process does not modify them but calculates vertical separation at
seismic crossings (heave is returned as zero and dip as ninety).
Centerline faults with vertical separation, created by this process are
standard inputs used by gridding methods that produce faults with
throws (non-opaque faults.
Only the X, Y, and ID fields are carried through from the input fault file to the
output fault file. All other fields (throw, dip and heave) are created by the
Shrinker.
The expanded fault file is not normally made but can be used as a check to see
how well the regular, center-line construction and heave calculation processes
have operated.
Remaining Operations
In addition to the groups of similar operations, Operations includes 14
remaining options. These options are not grouped together on the
Operations main menu, but most of them lend themselves to
classification according to their intended functions. The remaining
operations are listed in alphabetical order, and include:
Back Interpolation (page 677)
File Conversion (page 681)
Coordinate Transformations (page 686)
Transformation Coordinates (Overwrite Fields) (page 700)
Lat/Lon (DMS) to Decimal Degrees (page 701)
Line Generalization (page 704)
Line Resampling (page 710)
Surface Intersection (page 735)
The remaining operations can be classified into these groups:
operations with lines
data modification operations
operations with cartographic applications
miscellaneous operations
Cartographic Operations
Cartographic operations include:
Coordinate Transformations Convert latitude and longitude
to northing and easting values, or convert northing and easting
values to latitude and longitude.
Transform Coordinates (Overwrite Fields) Adds the ability
to overwrite existing fields onto all the Coordinate
Transformations functionality.
Lat/Lon (DMS) to Decimal Degrees Convert degrees,
minutes, and seconds to decimal degrees, or convert decimal
degrees to degrees, minutes and seconds.
Miscellaneous Operations
Miscellaneous operations include:
Back Interpolation Calculate Z values from a grid for each x,y
location in a data file. Resulting Z values replace an old field either
completely or in part, or create a new field for that x,y location in
the data file.
Surface Intersection Find the point of intersection between a
subsurface rock unit with present day topography (outcrop). Find
the point of intersection between a subsurface rock unit and an
unconformity (subcrop). Find the point of intersection between a
reservoir rock and a fluid contact, such as oil/water, gas/oil.
Perform quality control checks on grids.
Back Interpolation
Is output
Yes field a new No
field?
Select Faults
A list of fault files is presented. Point to and click the fault file you want.
Faults are needed only when building surfaces cut by faults. When faults
are used, grid nodes are calculated using only data located on the same
side of the faults as the node. A fault file must have been previously
constructed in order to be available for this option.
Output Z-field
From the list of fields that appears, select a field you want, or select New
Field. The Z-values calculated during Back Interpolation are written to
this field. If you select an existing field the default behavior is to replace
all contents of that field. To change the default behavior, see the Output
Name, Strategy parameter topics that follow.
New Field
Enter the name to store with the field. The name can be a maximum of
20 characters long and can contain internal blanks. The default name is
Z VALUE.
Strategy
Controls what is replaced when the back interpolated values are written
to an existing field. Possible choices for this parameter include:
All (default). Write to all locations in the field, replacing both Z-values
and ZNONs.
No ZNON. Write to only Z-value locations in the field; do not replace
ZNONs.
Only ZNON. Write to only ZNON locations in the field; do not replace
existing Z-values.
ZNON Value
Enter the value to be used as ZNON (missing or null data value)
when this field is written by Z-MAP Plus. This value can be any valid
number supported by your computer. Never use a number between the
minimum and maximum value in the field, as this creates many
problems when building grids and drawing contours from those grids.
The default is the ZNON of the field being replaced, or, if a new field is
being created, the default is 0.1E+31.
File Conversion
Apply
From To
Input File
Select an input file from the list that appears.
Separate (DATA-CNTR)
Any two points in the X/Y/Z data file further apart than this distance are
considered to belong to different contours (even if their Z-values
match).
Connect (DATA-CNTR)
If the first and last point of a contour line are closer than this distance,
then the contour is closed.
X Field
A list of fields from your input file is presented. Select the one you want
to use.
Y Field
Select the Y-field you want from the list. Y-fields in this list were picked
from your input file.
Z Fields
Select the Z-field you want from the list. Z-fields in this list were picked
from your input file.
Shotpoint Field
Select the Shotpoint Field you want from the list. Shotpoint Fields in
this list were picked from your input file.
Coordinate Transformations
Select and name output X and Y fields Select and name output Lat/Lon fields
Projection from user input Projection from data or picture Projection from State Plane
Select projection code Select source data file or picture Select state and zone for state
for projection plane projection
Select spheroid and enter
value for semi-major and
semi-minor axes
Activate/deactivate projection
Spheroid
The earth is neither flat nor spherical but is an oblate-spheroid, flattened
at the poles and bulging at the equator (a flattening of about 1/300). This
oblate-spheroid is not perfect but is highly irregular due to variations in
material density and the affects of gravity and recent geologic activity
on that material. Defining and measuring position on this surface
requires that a definition of the spheroid (earth shape) be made.
Depending on where on the earth you are, one shape should match the
earth better than another. Also, depending on the size of the area,
different spheroids provide better results than others, therefore there are
many spheroid definitions. You must select the spheroid appropriate for
your area. Usually a company has a standard for each area it works in.
Once the shape of the earth is defined then latitude and longitude lines
are laid on that shape in their correct position.
Projection
The next problem is to unwrap the spheroid so that it can be viewed
as a flat map. This is, in fact, impossible to do with a sphere; however,
it can be done with a cone, cylinder or other shape representing a plane
that has been wrapped. Planes are sometimes used in the manner
described in the following text. So, rather than try to unwrap a sphere,
we run a cone, cylinder, plane, or other easily unwrapped geometric
form (projection surface) through the spheroid near the area we want to
map. All of the spheroid information is then projected mathematically
onto the geometric form. This usually involves moving the object from
the spheroid onto the projection surface following a line normal to the
projection surface, although other methods are used.
The point or line where the projection surface intersects the spheroid
does not have to be projected since the two forms have the same
position. Therefore, when the projection surface (cone, cylinder, etc.) is
unwrapped, that point or line is not distorted. Points not on this
intersection point or line are distorted by the process of projecting along
a normal to the projection surface. This can be visualized in the diagram
that follows.
spheroid
Input File
Coordinate Transformations can be performed on any data file
containing X/Y coordinates or latitude/longitude. Control point data
consists of scattered x,y,z data where x,y is the horizontal position of the
data point and z denotes the value of some griddable surface.
A list of files is presented. Point to and click the file you want. This file
is used as input when the option executes.
Projection Code
A list of projection codes is presented. Point and click the projection
code you want. Projections can be Cylindrical, Conic or Planar
Azimuthal. The available projections are shown in the following
illustration. For a complete description of each available projection, see
Map Projections on page 875.
Unlocking Parameters
It is highly recommended that you unlock parameters when you change
projections in order to prevent AOI incompatibility.
Reference Spheroid
The Reference Spheroid is a theoretical geometric figure whose
dimensions closely approach the dimensions of the earth for a particular
area. As a result, there are a number of defined Reference Spheroids. For
a complete description of each of the following reference spheroids
including the dimensions for the semi-major axis and the semi-minor
axis. seeReference Spheroid on page 893. From these two
dimensions, the program calculates the ellipticity for you. Select the
desired reference spheroid from the popup menu. Selections include:
.
Projection Parameters
This dialog box contains a list of the parameters required for the
specified projection. These parameters may include:
Unit Code
Unit Factor
Reference Latitude
Latitude Scale Factor
Reference Longitude
Longitude Scale Factor
False Northing and False Easting
Central Meridian
Mapping Across the Dateline
Unit Code
Unless you select to use a UTM projection where units are always
defined in meters, you have the option of projecting your data in eight
units of measurement. These include: user-supplied, meters, feet, yards,
inches, kilometers, nautical miles, statute miles.
False Northing
False Northing represents a value assigned the origin of northings, or
grid coordinates to avoid the inconvenience of using negative
coordinates.
False Easting
False Easting is a value assigned a central meridian of a coordinate
system to avoid the inconvenience of using negative coordinates.
Central Meridian
The line of longitude located at the center of a projection on which the
projection is generally based. This parameter is also known as the
reference longitude.
When you click either NAD27 or NAD83, a list of all 50 states, as well
as Samoa, Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands and the Old and New regions
for Michigan is presented. Point to and click the selection you want.
Select Region
A list of regions associated with the selected state is presented.
Depending on the state, regions are listed as East, West, North, South,
Central, or by number, i.e., Region 1, Region 2, Region 3, etc.
Activate Projection
Select this option to activate the currently defined projection
parameters. These parameters remain in effect until you select the
Deactivate Projection option or reactivate and change the current
projection parameters by reselecting the Activate Projection option.
Deactivate Projection
Select this option to deactivate a projection when you wish to generate
a picture using northing/easting parameters.
Select
DEG to DMS direction of DEG to DMS
conversion
Select input latitude &
longitude fields to convert
Input File
The format of this DMS file should be 98 50 20 with no commas. In
this example, 98 is degrees, 50 is minutes, and 20 is seconds. Degree
values can be negative, and seconds values can be decimal (for example,
20.3453). Be sure to use the DMS-LATITUDE and DMS-LONGITUDE
files for the import.
From the list of files that appears, select an input file to use.
Conversion Direction
DEG to DMS converts decimal degrees into degrees, minutes, and
seconds.
DMS to DEG converts Latitude/Longitude information that is in
degrees, minutes, and seconds into decimal degrees.
Latitude Field
Input the field that you would like to use as the decimal degree input
Latitude field. This would be the field that you would like to convert into
Degree-Minute-Second Latitude information.
Longitude Field
Input the field that you would like to use as the decimal degree input
Longitude field. This would be the field that you would like to convert
into Degree-Minute-Second Longitude information.
Line Generalization
Increasing Generalization
As the map scale decreases the amount of generalization that can be performed
increases.
Input File
If you select Line Generalization, a list of input file types that contain
line data appears on your screen. The input file may contain any of the
following types of line data: contour, fault, seismic lines, cross section,
profile and vertex. Select the file you want.
Keep the following points in mind when you select a seismic data file:
All lines on the file are generalized.
Only one Z-field at a time can be generalized.
Points for a particular line may not be segmented throughout the
data file.
Points describing a line must smoothly cross through the x,y plane.
If you are trying to thin seismic data (for example, to keep every
10th shotpoint in the data file) use the operation Data Thinning
instead of line generalization. Generalization may throw out may
more points than you intended along straight line segments, since
it only tries to maintain the same line shape.
Output Filename
Enter the name of the grid to be created. The name can be a maximum
of 24 characters long and can contain internal blanks.
Algorithm
You can choose from two algorithms when performing Line
Generalization. Either of these algorithms reduce the size of the line data
file. However, the Douglas Poiker algorithm produces a smaller output
file and is slightly more accurate than the Williams algorithm. On the
other hand, the Williams algorithm is faster, but produces a larger output
file.
Douglas Poiker Algorithm. This is a global curve thinning algorithm.
The first and last points of the input curve are always included in the
output curve. The algorithm begins by drawing an imaginary baseline
between these two points. To select a third point, the algorithm
measures the deviation of all intermediate points from this baseline. If
its distance is greater than the user-specified tolerance, the point furthest
away from the baseline is chosen for inclusion. On selection, the third
point divides the curve into two parts, each of which is recursively
analyzed in the same manner. The algorithm continues to select points
based on their deviation from the output curve until all nonselected
points lie within the specified tolerance.
Williams Algorithm. This is a curve-scanning algorithm. As in the
Douglas Poiker Algorithm, the first and last points are automatically
included in the output curve. Subsequent points are chosen based on
purely local calculations.
Temporary Points
The last temporary point in each sequence is the only temporary point that is
actually included in the output curve.
Statistics Level
You may specify that full, partial or no statistics be displayed in the
processing window.
Full Statistics provides statistics as shown in the following example.
INPUT FILE STATISTICS
-----------------------
2 12 12
3 13 12
4 16 14
5 12 12
6 29 28
7 6 5
8 11 11
9 5 5
10 6 6
11 1 1
12 4 4
12 3 2
Partial Statistics displays the input file statistics and the output file
statistics without the print out for each line in the file.
Tolerance
The generalization tolerance is a user-defined threshold value that is
measured in the same units as the data. The distance between input curve
points and various algorithm baselines is compared to this threshold.
Data thinning is inversely proportional to the selected tolerance. A
tolerance that is only a very small fraction of the total X or Y range of
the data is usually appropriate for planimetric data. A tolerance that is a
very small fraction of the Z-range of the data is usually appropriate for
seismic data. Choosing a best tolerance can require several trial runs,
but most digitized cartographic data is so highly oversampled that a very
small tolerance produces immediate improvements.
Z Field
A list of Z-fields is presented. A Z-field is usually depth or time values.
Point to and click the field you want. This input field is used when the
option executes. Fields in this list were picked from a previously
selected file.
Segment ID Field
Vertex points that have the same Segment ID are connected as a line.
When vertex data is digitized or input interactively, a Segment ID is
automatically assigned to each line input.
A list of fields is presented. Point to and click the field you want. This
input field is used when the option executes. Fields in this list were
picked from a previously selected file.
Line Resampling
Line Resampling creates a new output dataset and does not change the
input dataset. The output dataset contains exactly those fields found on
the input dataset. Sort flags and projection information are preserved in
the output dataset.
Line Resampling allows choices and entries for the following:
Data Type
Files (Input)
Output File and Master File
Operation Parameters (Resampling or Propagation)
Choose Field
Data Type
Allows you to select which type of file to resample or propagate. File
type choices are listed in a popup menu that appears when you click this
parameter box. A list of files of that type is listed in the Files window.
Only files in the currently attached MFDs and the OpenWorks project
are displayed.
Possible choices for this parameter include:
DATA
CNTR (Contour)
FALT (Fault)
VERT (Vertex lines)
SSEC (Seismic Section)
XSEC (Cross Section)
DWEL (Deviated Well)
Files
This option allows you to select the input file. Click the name of the file
you want to be the input file. To display the subsidiary Line Resampling
dialog boxes, you must firs select an input file.
Output File
This option allows you to name the output file. The name can be up to
24 characters long, and can contain interval blanks.
Output MFD
From the popup menu, select the scratch file or MFD to use for saving
the output file.
Resampling Parameters
Lines to Resample
Increment
Rectangular Increment: DISTINCXY
Arc Distance: DISTINCLL
Shotpoint Increment: SHINCREM and NMINCREM
Distance along Baseline: DISPLACE
Base: SHINCREM, NMINCREM, DISPLACE
Discontinuity Usage
Geographic Coordinate Technique: DISTINCLL
Geographic Arc Distance Units: DISTINCLL
Geographic Arc Units/Meter
3-D Line Divisor
Records to Retain
Resampling Tolerance
Distance Break
Shotpoint Break: SHINCREM and NMINCREM when Lines to
Resample = All
Ellipsoid Method: DISTINCLL
Spheroid: DISTINCLL
Semi Major Axis A: DISTINCLL when Ellipsoid Method =
ELLIPSD
Semi Minor Axis B: DISTINCLL when Ellipsoid Method =
ELLIPSD
Axis Units: DISTINCLL, Ellipsoid Specified
Axis Units/Meter
Resampling Method
Controls which resampling method is used to position new points along
the line. Possible choices for Resampling Method include:
DISTINCXY (Distance Increment X/Y). This is the Distance
Increment process for Resampling in a rectangular x,y coordinate
system. Line Resampling creates new points at a regular increment of
distance along the line. One parameter controls this process: Distance
Increment value, I.
Where Pj is the distance from the first point on the line,
Pj = jI, for j = 1,2,3
Lines to Resample
Controls whether to resample all or some of the lines. Possible choices
for this parameter include:
All (default). Resample all the lines from the input file.
Some. Resample only some of the lines from the input file. A mask
Line Identification Parameters dialog box appears to allow you to select
which lines are resampled. See Line Identification Parameters on
page 730 for a discussion of this dialog box. Before you select Some,
you should have selected the Choose Fields button on the main dialog
box; when you do (or if you havent) the Choose Fields dialog box
appears. See Choose Fields on page 728 for a discussion of this
dialog box. You should also have chosen a Primary Line Select Field
on the Choose Fields dialog box.
Increment
This option allows you to choose the resampling increment or distance
between successive new points on a line. The type of distance depends
on Resampling Method chosen. Increment is defaulted only if
Resampling Method is SHINCREM.
You can increase or decrease the value of the Increment by clicking the
up or down arrows on either side of the parameter window.
There are two main categories of resampling:
resampling based on coordinate fields (X/Y or Lat/Long)
distance increment method (DISTINCXY)
geographic coordinate method (DISTINCLL)
resampling based on attribute fields
shotpoint increment (SHINCREM)
numerical increment (NMINCREM)
Rectangular Increment
If Resampling Method is DISTINCXY, then the Increment, or distance
between two new points on the line which is being resampled, is
rectangular distance. This distance is computed using the Pythagorean
Theorem. Line Resampling uses the first set of X- and Y-fields on the
dataset (unless the user specifies another set of X- and Y-fields using the
control parameters). Line Resampling fills all other fields in the dataset
with nulls, even other X and Y coordinate fields.
Arc Distance
If Resampling Method is DISTINCLL, then the Increment, or distance
between two new points on the line which is being resampled, is
distance along an arc. With DISTINCLL, Line Resampling uses the first
set of Latitude and Longitude fields on the dataset (unless the user
specifies another set of Latitude and Longitude fields using the control
parameters). Line Resampling fills all other fields on the dataset with
nulls, even other Latitude and Longitude fields.
When Line Resampling uses geographical coordinates to resample the
dataset, it calculates the distance between new points along a line
(Increment) along a great circle joining the adjacent original points.
Line Resampling needs ellipsoid parameters to calculate the parameters
of the arc defining the great circle. In Z-MAP Plus, there are three ways
Line Resampling can get the ellipsoid parameters:
If the dataset has been projected in a Landmark product, Line
Resolution can get the ellipsoid parameter values recorded in the
history information.
You may specify the name of the ellipsoid (for example, Clarke
1866).
You may specify the lengths of the axes of the ellipsoid.
Shotpoint Increment
When Resampling Method is SHINCREM, then the value is shotpoint
increment. The base shotpoint value could be a beginning shotpoint
value. Line Resampling creates new shotpoints at a specified interval.
With a base shotpoint number of 1127 and an increment of 50, the next
new point is 1177.
When the Resampling Method is NMINCREM, then the value is
numerical increment. The increment represents a constant value along a
numerical field, such as time or depth.
Arc Distance
The Increment, or distance between two new points on the line which is
being resampled, is distance along an arc. With DISTINCLL, Line
Resampling uses the first set of Latitude and Longitude fields on the
dataset (unless the user specifies another set of Latitude and Longitude
fields using the control parameters). Line Resampling fills all other
fields on the dataset with nulls, even other Latitude and Longitude
fields.
When Line Resampling uses geographical coordinates to resample the
dataset, it calculates the distance between new points along a line
(Increment) along a great circle joining the adjacent original points.
Line Resampling needs ellipsoid parameters to calculate the parameters
of the arc defining the great circle. In Z-MAP Plus, there are three ways
Line Resampling can get the ellipsoid parameters:
If the dataset has been projected in a Landmark product, Line
Resolution can get the ellipsoid parameter values recorded in the
history information.
You may specify the name of the ellipsoid (for example, Clarke
1866).
You may specify the lengths of the axes of the ellipsoid.
There are two methods for resampling a dataset based on geographic
coordinates.
The Great Circle Method starts with a pair of original points, and places
new points on the great circle passing through the original points.
The Rhumb Line (loxodrome method) starts with a pair of original
points, and places new points on the rhumb line between the original
points. (A Rhumb Line is a line marking out a constant compass
direction. When drawn on a map, a Rhumb Line cuts across all
meridians at the same angle). Parallels of Latitude at 90 or 270 degrees
are handled by the Rhumb Line method.
You can select a different method for each line on the dataset if they
desire to do so. Some lines can be resampled according to the Rhumb
Line (RL), others according to the Great Circle (GC) method. If no
method is specified, the program uses the operative default for the
Resampling Method you have chosen.
Base
For computational purposes, the base is the starting value for three of the
Resampling Methods. The base is not necessarily the starting value of
the resulting line. For example, a 2D seismic line with original shotpoint
values of 7,9,11,13 that is resampled with SHINCREM and base = 0,
increment = 2, RETAIN=ENDPOINTS results in a line of 7,8,10,12,13.
(Not 0,2,4,6,7,8,10,12,13.)
This option allows you to choose the base value (defined in the
following text). It is needed if the Resampling Method is SHINCREM,
NMINCREM, or DISPLACE. You may enter the value in the box or
click the up or down arrow to increase or decrease the value in the box.
In the SHINCREM method, Base refers to the starting shotpoint
number.
In the NMINCREM method, Base refers to the starting value in some
specified numerical field, such as a time field or depth field.
In the DISPLACE method, Base refers to the starting value on the
baseline of a Cross-Section dataset. Line Resampling depends on the
X-EASTING field in the cross-section baseline to determine linear
displacement.
Discontinuity Usage
This option allows you to choose how to treat the presence of
discontinuity fields during the resampling process.
Discontinuity flags are a way of letting the program know that an
unconformity exists on a surface subject to resampling. Resampling
does not consider the geometry of the underlying surfaces when creating
new points at regular intervals along a line. If discontinuity flags are not
used, attribute propagation computes values at the new points for all the
attributes attached to the points.
Ignore. Ignore the discontinuity fields during the resampling process.
Some. Preserve any original point for which any of the propagation
discontinuity fields is positive.
All (default). Preserve any original point for which any of the
discontinuity fields in the dataset is positive.
Records to Retain
Controls which original records to keep during the resampling process.
It is applied globally to all lines. Possible choices for this parameter
include:
All. Line contains newly created points plus all the points from the
original line.
Endpoints. Line contains newly created points plus the endpoints from
the original line.
Resampling Tolerance
For the increments in which tolerance values can be expressed, see the
definition of Increment for each of the resampling methods in the
following topics.
Tolerance values refer to the maximum allowable distance between
points. If the user-specified maximum tolerance distance is exceeded (in
the units of each resampling method), Line Resampling does not create
a new point.
This option allows you to define a resampled point closeness tolerance.
A resampled point is discarded if it is within the specified tolerance
distance from any original point. This check applies only to the
endpoints if the Records to Retain parameter = ENDPOINTS. A
tolerance value of 0.0 disables the tolerance check. You can enter the
value or click the up or down arrow to increase or decrease the value in
the box.
Distance Break
The Increment parameter, discussed above, has a more complete
discussion of the units of distance required by each of the Resampling
Methods.
You may wish to suspend line resampling between two points if the
distance between successive points on a line is too large. You may do so
by specifying a break distance.
If the distance between any adjacent points on the line is greater than the
break value, then no resampling occurs between these points. This
option allows you to choose the distance break value. Break value of 0.0
disables distance break checking. You may enter the value in the box or
click the up or down arrows to increase or decrease the value in the box.
For a definition/explanation of the units in which you can specify
distance break, see the Increment topic on page 716.
If Resampling Method is DISTINCXY, then Distance Break is assumed
to be in rectangular units (x,y units).
If Resampling Method is DISTINCLL, then Distance Break is assumed
to be arc distance (Lat, Long units).
If Resampling Method is SHINCREM, DISPLACE, or NMINCREM
and if the X-field and Y-field are specified by the user, then the
following rules apply. If the X- and Y-fields are rectangular coordinate
fields, then the Distance Break is assumed to be in rectangular units. If
the X- and Y-fields are geographic coordinate fields, then the Distance
Break is assumed to be arc distance in units specified by Geographic Arc
Distance Units.
Shotpoint Break
If the distance between any adjacent shotpoints on a line is greater than
break value, then no resampling occurs between these points. This
option allows you to choose the distance break value. Break value of 0.0
disables shotpoint break checking. You may enter the value in the box
or click the up or down arrows to increase or decrease the value in the
box.
Ellipsoid Method
Use this option to specify the method for defining ellipsoid parameters.
This option is used if the Resampling Method value is DISTINCLL.
Choices for this parameter are:
File (default value) Parameters are obtained from the history
records of the input file if one is available.
Projection Parameters are obtained from the currently defined
projection. (not currently available)
Ellipsd Parameters are defined by naming the ellipsoid using
the standard spheroids available from the Spheroid menu.
Specified Parameters are specified in Semi Major Axis A and
Semi Minor Axis B parameters.
Spheroid
The Spheroid defines the size of the semi-major and semi-minor axes.
You only need to define the Spheroid when the Ellipsoid Method is
Ellipsd. Each spheroid on this list has a semi-major and semi-minor axis
defined. The Reference Spheroid has dimensions which closely
approach the dimensions of the earth for a particular area of interest.
From these two dimensions, the program calculates the ellipticity for
you. Select the desired Reference Spheroid. For a complete description
of each of the following reference spheroids including the dimensions
for the semi-major axis and the semi-minor axis, see Reference
Spheroid on page 893.
Axis Units
Axis Units are required when the Resampling Method is DISTINCLL
and the Ellipsoid Method is user-specified. The units of the Semi-Major
and Semi-Minor Axis are converted into the units you select.
Choices for this parameter include:
File
User Supplied
Meters (default)
International Feet
Us Survey Feet
Yards
Inches
Kilometers
Nautical Miles
Statute Miles
File. Get the information from projection information in the input file
dataset.
User Supplied. You supply the units in Axis Units/Meter.
Axis Units/Meter
The Units/Meter parameter is in effect when the Ellipsoid Method is
User-specified. The Units/Meter number is a multiplier. If you have
specified the semi-major axis to 100,000, and the axis units/meter to 1.0,
the semi-major axis is 100,000 meters. if you have a semi-major axis of
100,000, and a units/meter factor of 0.5, then the semi-major axis is
50,000 meters.
You may either enter the number in the box or use the arrow to increase
or decrease the multiplier.
Propagation Parameters
Method
Line Resampling assumes a default propagation mode for each type of
field. For example, the default propagation method for X-field, Y-field,
and TOPO is Interpolate. For Symbol Code and Well ID, the method of
propagation is Copy Closest.
As you select fields to be propagated, a propagation method appears in
the adjacent Method window. You may change the listed method using
the Methods parameter box.
For example, if Well ID appears in the Fields to Propagate window, the
default Method is Copy Closest. If you do not want the Symbol Code for
the new point to be copied from the closest point Symbol Field, click the
method you prefer in the Method Mode menu. The Method Mode menu
resides in the bottom half of the Line Propagation Parameters menu. To
change propagation for WELLID from Copy Closest to Copy Prior,
click Copy Prior under methods. Next click WELLID in the Fields to
Propagate area, and on Copy Closest in the Method column. The
Method changes to Copy Prior.
Discontinuity Field
You should consider Discontinuity Usage when you wish to propagate
fields along a surface which is not continuous. Common examples of
special discontinuity points on a surface are terminations on faults,
washouts, pinchouts, and truncations. If a field has a discontinuity field
attached, then values are propagated only when there are no
discontinuities (as defined in the attached Discontinuity Fields).
You may change the listed method using the Discontinuity Usage
parameter box.
Mode
There are three mode buttons in the Mode dialog box: Append, Delete,
and Insert. These three buttons only affect the fields in the Fields to
Propagate list. You can add (append), delete, and change the order of
(insert) the fields in the Fields to Propagate list. Normally, the Append
button is the usual button to use when selecting fields to be propagated.
Append. To move a field from the Source List window to the Fields to
Propagate window, the Append diamond must be depressed. Simply
click the fields you want on the output file. If qualified, they appear in
the Fields to Propagate list.
Delete. You can delete any field in the Fields to Propagate list. With the
Delete diamond depressed, click the fields you wish to move back into
the Source List.
Insert. Insert allows you to move a field from the Source List to the
Fields to Propagate list. It inserts the selected field above a highlighted
item in the Fields to Propagate window.
Lines to Fill
You may choose whether to use Attribute Propagation for some of the
lines or all of them. Choices for this parameter includes:
All (default). Propagate all the lines from the input file.
Some. Propagate only some of the lines from the input file. A Line
Identification Parameters dialog box appears to allow you to define
which lines are propagated.
Methods
You may choose how to propagate each field. You must first choose
which method you want specified by clicking a diamond in the Method
dialog box. Afterward, click the Method window next to the Fields to
Propagate you want the method assigned to. Choices for this parameter
include:
Interpolate. Interpolate field value from the field value in the
surrounding records. Valid for numeric fields only.
Copy Prior. Copy field value from the field value in the previous
record.
Copy Post. Copy field value from the field value in the next record.
Copy Closest. Copy field value from the field value in the record
closest (by coordinate distance) to the present record.
Discontinuity Usage
Each field being propagated can be assigned a discontinuity field. You
must click the Discontinuity Usage dialog box to enable the process. To
choose the discontinuity field, click the Discontinuity Field and then
click Discontinuity Field window next to the Fields to Propagate
window you want it assigned to.
Choose Fields
This dialog box allows you to select a field that is involved in the
Resampling and/or Propagation processes. The fields you can choose
from depend on the fields actually present in your input dataset.
There can be more than one field of a certain field type in the input file.
This dialog box allows you to define which field is the field type default.
Clicking the button next to the Field Type you want to define causes one
or more choices to appear in the Choices window. Click which field you
want to choose and it appears in the Chosen Field window next to the
chosen Field Type.
Shotpoint 3D 3D
X/ Y/ Line Survey Segment Horizon
Number/ Shotpoint Line
Lon Lat Name Name ID Name
Distance Number Name
Operator
This parameter is active only if a Primary Line Select Field has been
selected. Only those lines for which the value of the field Primary Line
Select Field satisfies the comparison are processed. You may instruct
Line Resampling to compare a fields value to a Value using the
operators listed under Operator on page 605.
For each of the operators, Value must be of the same type (numeric or
character) as the field being tested.
Wildcards
For a complete discussion of wildcards, see Wildcard Characters
Definition on page 609 and Wildcard Characters Application on
page 610.
Mask Entry
When defining the Mask, wildcard characters (* = multiple characters,
% = single character) can be used. Rules for using wildcard characters
are described starting on page 609. The Operator is used to determine
whether the records value must equal, be greater than, etc. the Masks
value. Rules for how operators work with Masks and with alphabetic
characters are described after the wildcard discussion.
Mask A Entry
Edit the Textual Mask A in this window. Click Apply to save, or Delete
Selected to delete this mask from the Line Identification Textual
Mask A window.
Mask B Entry
Edit the Textual Mask B in this window. Click Apply to save or Delete
Selected to delete this mask from the Line Identification Textual
Mask B window.
Accept
Clicking Accept indicates that you wish to use the masks you see listed
from either or both of the Textual Mask windows.
Clear
Clicking Clear indicates that you wish to clear the masks you see listed
from either or both of the Textual Mask windows.
Delete Selected
Clicking Delete Selected causes the mask you selected in Line
Identification Textual Mask A or B to be deleted.
Increment
Double-clicking one of the entries copies it to the Increment Entry boxes
where you may edit it. If more than seven entries are present, then a
scroll bar appears.
Note that both single and double clicking a mask entry highlights its
associated entries in the Line Identification Textual Mask A, Line
Identification Textual Mask B, Base, Distance Break, and Shotpoint
Break windows.
Increment Entry
Allows you to edit an Increment entry. Click Apply when you have
completed the edit.
Base
Double-clicking one of the entries copies it to the Base Entry boxes
where you may edit it. This window is inactive if Resample Method is
SHINCREM. If more than seven entries are present, then a scroll bar
appears.
Note that both single and double clicking a mask entry highlights its
associated entries in the Line Identification Textual Mask A, Line
Identification Textual Mask B, Increment, Distance Break, and
Shotpoint Break windows.
Base Entry
Allows you to edit a Base entry. Click Apply when you have completed
the edit.
Distance Break
Double-clicking one of the entries copies it to the Distance Break Entry
box where you may edit it. If more than seven entries are present, then
a scroll bar appears.
Note that both single and double clicking a mask entry highlights its
associated entries in the Line Identification Textual Mask A, Line
Identification Textual Mask B, Increment, Base, and Shotpoint Break
windows.
Shotpoint Break
Double-clicking one of the entries copies it to the Shotpoint Break Entry
box where you may edit it. If more than seven entries are present, then
a scroll bar appears.
Note that both single- and double-clicking a mask entry highlights its
associated entries in the Line Identification Textual Mask A, Line
Identification Textual Mask B, Increment, Base, and Distance Break
windows.
Surface Intersection
Input Grid 1
This is one of the grids that are used as input for Surface Intersection.
Their order is not important. Select a grid from the list that appears,
which lists the grids stored in the currently attached MFDs.
Input Grid 2
This the second of two grids that are used as input for Surface
Intersection. The grid order is not important. Select a grid from the list
that appears, which lists the grids stored in the currently attached MFDs.
Macros
Overview
In addition to standard Z-MAP Plus commands, you can execute ZCL
macros from Z-MAP Plus. A macro is a collection of ZCL processes
packaged so you can call and execute them as a group. The macros are
fully described in the Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL.
You can execute only macros that have already been written: The
Macros menu does not have a dialog box for creating macros. The
directory used to store macros must be specified in the Directory Paths
for Macro Files (described on page 115). A macro can be executed only
if its name ends with .ZCLMAC.
Macros are organized into the following groups.
User Macros
Lists user created macros from the user macro directory.
When you select User Macros, the SELECT a MACRO Dialog box
appears. The SELECT a MACRO dialog box lists the macros located in
the directories specified in the Directory Paths: Macro dialog box. Only
macros whose names end with .ZCLMAC appear in the list.
If no macros are found when you select the User Macros option, an
error message like the following one appears.
Quick-look
The Quick-look macros are shown in the following illustration:
Graphics
The Operations macros are shown in the following illustration.
Operations
The Operations macros are shown in the following illustration.
Geophysics
The Geophysics macros are shown in the following illustration.
Utilities
The Utilities macros are shown in the following illustration.
Execute Macro
The EXECUTE MACRO dialog box allows you to supply all of the
parameter values required by the macro you selected and then to execute
that macro. Defaults set in the macro can be viewed when working with
the Macro Parameter menus. These dialog boxes are dynamically built
from information in the macro. Because of this, the order, names, and
information in the dialog boxes are directly related to the quality of
macro construction.
When you select a macro, the system window gives a brief description
of the macro, its input needs, and result, and the EXECUTE MACRO
dialog box appears.
CARM
Overview
The CARM (Computer Aided Reservoir Management) menu contains
the following items:
Volumetrics
Reservoir Envelope Volumetrics
Surface Correction
Water Saturation Averaging
Area/Depth Plot
Quick Volumetrics (2 Polygons)
Quick Volumetrics (40 Polygons)
Volumetrics
Use volumetrics to compute areas and volumes from a grid. Volumes
are computed by intersecting the grid limits of the input grid with the
input polygons that define the areas for which volumes are calculated.
Surface Correction
Executes the SURFCORRECT macro. SURFCORRECT offers a way
of correcting a surface or of conformably merging a surface with a set
of new well picks. Using residual correction techniques,
SURFCORRECT ties a grid to new well data. SURFCORRECT outputs
a corrected grid, optional quality control data files, and optional maps
and cross sections, all of which can be assembled into a presentation
quality montage (composite map).
Area/Depth Plot
Runs volumes by slice increment on a surface and converts the output
into a line suitable for plotting on a plot of area versus depth. Volumes
for each increment can also be plotted.
Volumetrics
Volumetrics is designed to compute areas and volumes from a grid.
Input to this subtask is:
a grid (normally of thickness)
a value for a base plane (normally zero)
one or more polygons that define the areas for which volumes are
desired (for example, lease block boundaries)
Volumes are then calculated between the grid and the base plane and in
each polygon.
Additional controls allow you to specify:
whether faults are used
to save the results to a file
to define area and volume scale factors for units conversion
optionally to calculate the grid surface (undulating) area
to define incremental adjustments for the base plane
to use grids or polygons to define additional areal constraints
Volumetrics Report
VOLUMETRICS REPORT 22-SEP -90 13:43
----------------------------------------------------------------------
BODY (SURFACE) NAME ...............: THICK NEW X/Y INC
PROPERTY POLYGON FILE .............: ENTIRE GRID AOI
PROPERTY POLYGON ID ...............: 1
PROPERTY POLYGON CENTROID COORDS...: ( 2631000.0000 , 668000.00000)
FAULT FILE ........................:
1ST CONSTRAINT POLYGON ............:
2ND CONSTRAINT POLYGON ............:
1ST CONSTRAINT GRID ...............:
2ND CONSTRAINT GRID ...............:
Baseplane LEVEL ..................: 0.000000000000E+00
SLICE INCREMENT (ZINC) ............: 0.000000000000E+00
VOLUME (AREA) SCALE FACTOR ........: 1.00000000 (1.0000000)
PROPERTY POLYGON AREA IN(OUT) AOI : 108000000.000 (0.000000000E+0)
UNRECOVERABLE NULL AREA ...........: 0.000000000000E+00
AREA OF COMPOSITE POLYGON (NET) ...: 108000000.000
POSITIVE AREA ( NEGATIVE AREA ) ...: 93093937.7975 (14906062.2025)
SURFACE AREA ......................:
POSITIVE SURFACE AREA (NEGATIVE SA):
POSITIVE VOLUME (NEGATIVE VOLUME)..: 503340474.589 (11066788.2448)
NET VOLUME ........................: 492273686.344
Positive Area (Negative Area) Area of the grid as projected onto the
base plane that was not unrecoverable ZNON, was inside the property
polygon, within any restrictions related to constraint polygons or grids,
and that represents positive volumes (grid that is above the base plane).
(Negative Area) is a similar area but representing negative volumes
(grid that is below base plane).
Surface Area Area of the grid (the undulating or actual grid surface
area) that was not unrecoverable ZNON, was inside the property
polygon, and within any restrictions related to constraint polygons or
grids.
Positive Surface Area (Negative SA) Area of the grid (the
undulating or actual grid surface area) that was not unrecoverable
ZNON, was inside the property polygon, within any restrictions related
to constraint polygons or grids, and that represents positive volumes.
(Negative SA) is a similar area but representing negative volumes.
Positive Volume (Negative Volume) Volume of the grid that is
above the base plane, below the Input Grid, inside the property polygon,
and within any restrictions related to constraint polygons or grids.
(Negative Volume) Volume of the grid that is below the base plane,
above the Input Grid, inside the property polygon, and within any
restrictions related to constraint polygons or grids.
Net Volume Volume of the grid that is between the base plane and
the Input Grid (regardless of whether it is above or below either), inside
the property polygon, and within any restrictions related to constraint
polygons or grids.
Input Grid
From the list of grids presented, click a grid to use as an input grid. The
input grid is used as the control grid when the subtask executes.
Normally this grid is an isochore bounded above by the top structure,
upper fluid contact and any overlying unconformities, and bounded
below by the base structure, lower fluid contact, and the next lower
unconformity. However, any grid is eligible for input.
Select Faults
If you are building surfaces cut by faults, select a fault file from the list
of fault files presented. If you use faults, grid nodes are calculated by
using only the data located on the same side of the faults as the node. To
be available for this subtask, a fault file must have been previously
constructed.
When faults are used, the mathematical surface model that is integrated
is calculated using only grid nodes located on the same side of the faults
as the cell for which the model is being defined. If the grid cell being
mathematically modeled straddles a fault then two models are built, one
for each side of the fault and each using appropriate grid nodes.
The original faulted structure surfaces used to derive the isochore
typically has faults with gaps between the up-side traces and low-side
traces. If nodes in those gaps are ZNON, the isochore in those areas are
also ZNON. This is undesirable and produces incorrect (low) volumes.
Try to get Z-values in the gaps that represent the fault plane (face).
Field
Field Name
Number
1 X-COORDINATE
2 Y-COORDINATE
3 SURFACE NAME
4 POLYGON FILENAME
5 POLYGON INDEX
6 BASE PLANE
7 NET AREA
8 NET VOLUME
9 NET SURFACE AREA
10 POSITIVE AREA
11 POSITIVE VOLUME
12 POSITIVE SURFACE AREA
13 NULL AREA
14 SLICE THICKNESS
15 AREA OUTSIDE AOI
16 NEGATIVE VOLUME
17 NEGATIVE AREA
18 NEGATIVE SURFACE AREA
19 VOLUME SCALE FACTOR
20 AREA SCALE FACTOR
Area Scale
Enter a value that is used to multiply all areas by before they are written
to the screen or an output file. Before this scale factor is applied, the
areas is in terms of the Grids X-coordinate unit times the Y-coordinate
unit. For example, if the grids X and Y coordinates are measured in
feet, the areas before scaling are in square feet. To convert square feet
to acres, you would use an Area Scale of 2.295684E5. Following are
some commonly used Area Scales:
Volume Scale
Enter a value to use for multiplying all volumes before they are written
to the screen or an output file. Before this volume factor is applied, the
volumes are in terms of the Grids X-coordinate unit, times
Y-coordinate unit, times Z-value unit. For example, if the grids X and
Y coordinates are measured in meters, and the Z-value is in feet, the
volumes before scaling are in meters squared feet. To convert this to
barrels, you would use a Volume Scale of 1.9171346E+0. This was
arrived at by:
(M2Ft)(2.471054E4 Acre/M2)(7.758368E+3 Acre-Foot) =
1.9171346E+0
The following table shows some commonly used Volume Scales:
Volume to Compute
Use the Volume to Compute to control which volumes are calculated.
These volumes are measured as being above or below the Base Plane
and between the Base Plane and the Input Grid. If your input grid is an
isochore and your Base Plane value is zero, the only volumes that make
sense to use are the Positive Volumes. Net Volumes are almost never of
any use. Possible choices for this parameter include:
Positive+Net (default value) Output both POSITIVE and NET
volumes. Positive Volumes are those volumes above the Base
Plane and below the Input Grid. Net Volumes are the volumes
below the Base Plane and above the Input Grid (Negative
Volumes), subtracted from the Positive Volumes.
Net Only Output only NET volumes. Net Volumes are the
volumes below the Base Plane and above the Input Grid (Negative
Volumes), subtracted from the volumes above the Base Plane and
below the Input Grid (Positive Volumes).
Slice Thickness
Enter a value to use for incrementally raising the Base Plane when
calculating volumes above the Base Plane and below the Input Grid.
This defaults to 0, which means no incremental adjustments are made.
When this parameter is active, incremental Base Plane adjustments are
made and multiple volumes are calculated up to the level specified in the
parameter Slice Limit. If you do not change the Value of Slice Limit,
then nothing happens. If you enter a negative value for Slice Thickness,
it is made positive before it is used. To move down rather than up, set
Slice Limit lower than Base Plane Value.
The first volume is above the Base Plane and below the Input Grid (Slice
#1 in figure). The second volume is above the Base Plane plus one slice
increment and below the Input Grid (Slice #2 in figure). The process is
repeated for each additional slice.
----------------------------------------
|
*| * |--- (Slice Increment)
*| | * |
-----------*--|--|------*---------------(Base Plane/Slice #3)
* | | * |
* | |Slice #2 * |--- (Slice Increment)
* | | * |
------*-------|--------------*----------(Base Plane/Slice #2)
* | * |
* Slice #1| * |--- (Slice Increment)
* | * |
--*------------------------------*------(Base Plane/Slice #1)
* *
Slice Limit
Enter a value that represents the upper level to which slicing is to go.
The default value is 0. This must be changed in order for the Slice
Thickness parameter to have an effect. If this number is less than the
Base Plane value, Slicing causes the Base Plane to move downward.
Scroll up for figure.
Purpose The purpose of this macro is to produce net hydrocarbon pore thickness
grids and to perform quick, visual, reportable results for HC
volumetrics for a prospect or field.
Description The macro analyzes a two phase reservoir system using basic grid file
and numerical input. Quick turnaround and accurate results make this
work flow ideal for use in sensitivity analysis.
Results The output of the macro consists of a montaged picture for each phase,
showing the following elements:
a Gross Rock Volume Isochore for each HC zone that can display
disconformities
a Net Hydrocarbon Volume Isochore posted with information as in
the map described above
a map with the primary polygon Net HC Volumes Posted, with
units
a map with the secondary polygon Net HC Volumes Posted, with
units
Surface Correction
Use the Surface Correction option to execute the SURFCORRECT
macro. This macro offers a way of correcting a surface or of
conformably merging a surface with a set of new well picks. Using
residual correction techniques, SURFCORRECT ties a grid to new well
data. SURFCORRECT outputs a corrected grid, optional quality control
data files, and optional maps and cross sections, all of which can be
assembled into a presentation quality montage (composite map).
For more information about this macro, select Help
Online Manuals Macros Manual, then locate the SURFCORRECT
topic.
Macro Name SURFCORRECT
Description You can restrict the area of the surface to be modified by the new well
data using one of four modes:
Use default gridding to distribute the change in the surface over the
entire area (MMETHOD = DEFAULT GRIDDING).
Specify a radius of influence around the selected well data
(MMETHOD = SYNTHESIZED DATA + RADIUS).
Use one or more closed polygons to specify where you want to
change the surface grid (MMETHOD = SYNTHESIZED DATA +
POLYGON).
Use a correction grid that you build independently of the macros
execution (MMETHOD = INPUT GRID).
Results The primary output of this macro is a new grid that shows how the new
wells affect the surface. Optional output includes quality control data
files that you can save to an MFD of your choice. SURFCORRECT
also creates maps and cross sections of its results.
Top
If you click the Top parameter, a list of grids in the attached MFDs or
OpenWorks appears. Select a grid to be the top grid of the reservoir
structure.
Bottom
If you click the Bottom parameter, a list of grids in the attached MFDs
or OpenWorks appears. Select a grid to be the bottom grid of the
structure.
Porosity Curves
Porosity curve (J-curve) data may be stored on either a contour file or
a profile file. There are two acceptable formats for contour files. See
File Structures on page 851.
Profile files must contain:
X-field (water saturation)
Y-field (height above the OWC)
Z-field (porosity)
Line ID field (must have a different number for each consecutive
constant porosity curve)
Elevation at OWC
The elevation at OWC is the Y value of elevation of the OWC for either
the top and bottom formation grids or the midpoint formation grid. If the
formation is defined in height above the OWC, the Elevation at OWC is
zero. The default setting is 0.0.
Area/Depth Plot
This option checks the results of the volumetrics task as compared to
volumetrics results arrived at by hand. This macro runs volumes by slice
increment on a surface and converts the output to a line suitable for
plotting on an area versus depth plot.
The input depth grid is scaled to a negative value, then biased by a value
you specify. The volume of the grid covered by the polygon area is then
calculated using the following values that you supply:
volume and area scaling factors
slice limit
increment
This isochore grid is based on true triple point geometry from fault plane
models. The area bounded by the box is processed to generate the area
depth curve.
This process trades off accuracy for speed. You can increase accuracy
by:
refining your grid to a smaller cell size
making your evaluation polygons adhere to the non-ZNON edges
of the grid being evaluated, e.g. OWC
incorporating a shape factor in the specified scale factor to account
for unusual geometric shapes defined by your surfaces
Quick Volumetrics (2 Polygons) calls the QUICKVOL-TWOPOLS
macro, which in turn executes ZCLs QUICK VOLUMETERICS
process. (For more detailed descriptions of each parameter, select
Help Online Manuals Macro Manual, then locate the
QUICKVOL-TWOPOLS topic.)
This process trades accuracy for speed, but you can increase accuracy
by:
refining the grid to a smaller cell size
making the evaluation polygons hug the non-ZNON edges of the
grid being evaluated (for example, OWC)
incorporating a shape factor in the scale factor specified in the
macro to account for unusual geometric shapes defined by the
surfaces
Quick Volumetrics (40 Polygons) calls the QUICKVOL-FORTYPOLS
macro, which in turn executes ZCLs QUICK VOLUMETERICS
process. (For more detailed descriptions of the parameters, select
Help Online Manuals Macro Manual, then locate the
QUICKVOL-FORTYPOLS topic.)
Tools
Overview
Use the Tools menu options in the Z-MAP Plus window to perform the
following tasks:
Spawn Unix Process Execute the SPAWN-PROCESS macro,
which enables another program or system command to run in
Z-MAP Plus (next topic).
System Window Create a new Z-MAP Plus System Window
(page 773). This option is useful if you closed the original
Z-MAP Plus System Window.
Process Logging Create a log of your actions in Z-MAP Plus,
written in ZCL format (page 774). Non-ZCL options become
comments in the job stream.
System Switches Control when parameter values are cleared
out (parameter unlocking mode), whether diagnostic messages or
pictures are automatically displayed, and the background color of
the display area (page 776). You can also choose English (in.) or
Metric (cm.) units for text heights and plotter information.
OW Sort Order Specify the order for displaying OpenWorks
files in Z-MAP Plus dialog boxes (page 779).
SIL Debug Print Switch Toggle on or off the debug printouts
in SIL modules (page 780).
Description You enter a system command. For example, the command could be ls,
cd, rm, mv, or ls - l on a Unix system.
System Window
The Z-MAP Plus System Window menu contains the following options:
Raise
Log Output
Always On Top
Raise
Raise moves the system window to the top or deiconifies it if it has been
iconified.
To execute the Raise option, select System Window Raise or click
the Raise System Window icon shown at the left.
Log Output
Log Output allows you to write system window output to a file.This
option is useful because it allows you to create a permanent record of the
output of a Z-MAP Plus process.
Always On Top
Always On Top allows you to set the system window so that it is
displayed on top of the Main Window.
Process Logging
You can create a file (log) that keeps a record of what you do in a
Z-MAP Plus sessions. When Process Logging is turned on, all the
options you execute in Z-MAP Plus are written to a text file. They are
written as ZCL processes with all the parameters written for each
process. Only those Z-MAP Plus options that are executed are logged.
Therefore, if you Cancel a process, that process is not logged. Once
logging is turned on, it continues until you turn it off. If Process Logging
is turned on when you exit Z-MAP Plus, when you restart Z-MAP Plus
the logging continues to the same file. You can point to an old Process
Log file or any other text file and append more process information.
With modifications, the logged job stream can be executed as a ZCL
batch job. Of course, the job executes properly only if MFDs, ZGFs,
data files, and pictures used by the logged processes are available and
attached. The logged job stream can be edited like any text file in order
to modify parameter settings, delete processes, or add others.
Extra Parameters
When you create a process log in Z-MAP Plus, some parameters are created
that are not documented as ZCL parameters. These extra parameters affect only
the graphical interface. ZCL ignores the additional parameters.
Logging Option
Controls whether Process Logging is turned on or off. Use this switch to
terminate logging, start logging to a new file, or start logging to an old
file. Possible choices for this parameter are:
Terminate Logging (default value) Stops printing information
to the Process Log file. This is the setting to use when you are not
creating a Process Log or wish to stop creating a log.
Begin Logging Starts printing information to a new Process
Log file. This setting creates a new Process Log file or, if the
Process Log file already exists, creates a new version of the file.
Resume Logging Starts printing information to the end of an
existing Process Log file or any other flat (ASCII) file. If this
setting is used and the specified Process Log file does not already
exist, the following error is printed:
THE REQUESTED FILE DOES NOT EXIST
If this happens, enter the correct, existing file. If you do not have a
file, set the parameter value to Begin Logging.
System Switches
You can control certain Z-MAP Plus settings (switches). These settings
control when parameter values are cleared out, whether messages or
pictures are automatically displayed, and the appearance of the picture
background (dark or light) etc. Once a switch is set, it remains set unless
you return to this panel and change it, or you select a Parameter File with
different System Switch settings.
None of the colors for items on the picture are changed. Possible choices
for this parameter include:
Black (default value) Make the graphics screen background
dark.
White Make the graphics screen background light.
Units
The Units toggle affects picture and feature measurements, but no other
measurements. You can choose whether the program calculates and
reports distances in Metric units (centimeters) or English units (inches).
If you choose Metric, the UNITSPERINCH scale refers to units per
centimeter.
Confirm Exit
Yes (default value) A confirmation box appears and prompts
you to confirm that you want to exit from Z-MAP Plus.
No No confirmation box appears before you exit from
Z-MAP Plus.
OW Sort Order
OW Sort Order controls the order in which OpenWorks files are
displayed in input dialog boxes. OW Sort Order only affects the sorting
of OpenWorks dataset lists and does not affect the displaying of MFD
file lists.
Sort By Date
Allows you to sort the by date. When you select Sort By Date the Source
List and Destination List fields become disabled and the Ascending and
Descending options change to Oldest First and Most Recent First, as
shown below.
Appendix A.
Graphics Feature Codes
Graphics
Feature
Graphics Feature Name Graphics Feature Description
Number
1 BORDERS Borders
2 BORDER LABELS AND TICK MARKS Border labels and tick marks
3 CONTOURS Contours
4 POSTED CONTROL POINTS AND VALUES Posted control points and values
5 POSTED GRID NODES AND VALUES Posted grid nodes and values
6 TEXT Text
7 POLYGON LINES Polygon lines
8 TITLE BLOCK Title block
9 REFERENCE CROSSES AND GRID LINES Reference crosses and grid lines
10 NORTH ARROW North arrow
11 CROSS SECTION TRACES Cross-section traces
12 CROSS SECTION LABELS Cross-section labels
13 CROSS SECTION POSTED WELLS Cross-section posted wells
14 PERSPECTIVE FISHNET Perspective fishnet
15 SEISMIC LINES Seismic lines
16 FAULT TRACES Fault traces
17 RESIN LATTICE RESIN lattice
18 COLORFILLED CONTOURS Colorfilled contours
19 PROFILES Profiles
20 GRID DIP (GRADIENT) ARROWS Grid dip (gradient) arrows
21 RESIN CELL CONTOURS Contours of RESIN cells
22 ALBERTA TOWNSHIP SURVEY POSTING Alberta Township Survey posting/lines
23 TOWNSHIP BASEMAP LINES Township map lines
24 SECTION BOUNDARY LINES Section boundary lines
25 TOPOGRAPHIC DATA Topographic data
26 PERSPECTIVE AXES Perspective axes
27 SEISMIC SECTIONS Seismic sections
28 DEVIATED WELLS Deviated wells
29 AREA OR VOLUME BOUNDARY Area or volume boundary
Graphics
Feature
Graphics Feature Name Graphics Feature Description
Number
Graphics
Feature
Graphics Feature Name Graphics Feature Description
Number
Appendix B.
File and Field Codes
Data FORTRAN
Type Data
Code Type Default Field Name Description
* South and west coordinates must be entered as negative numbers; minutes should be input as fractions of the
whole (for example, 7020E input as 70.3333). For degrees, minutes, seconds type of input, see Field Type
51 and 52. Latitude/Longitude coordinates cannot be used by most mapping processes; convert to x,y coordi-
nates using the Coordinate Transformation operation.
Currently not used by Landmark geological programs.
Cannot import interactively in Z-MAP Plus.
Data FORTRAN
Type Data
Code Type Default Field Name Description
21 Real SYMBOL CODE Code of symbol to plot
22 Char*80 LINE NAME Seismic line name or geologic cross-section name
23 Char*80 AREA NAME Seismic area name or any other name identifying a
data group
24 Char*4 RESHOT CHARACTER Reshot points identification
25 Real SEISMIC LINE NUMBER Seismic line number (non-textual)
26 Char*80 WELL TRACK NAME Alphanumeric identifier for a well track
27 Char*80 DEVIATED WELL NAME Alphanumeric identifier for a group of well tracks
or PLATFORM IDENTIFIER drilled from a single platform or well top
28 Char*80 API OR WELL CODE API or other unique alphanumeric code that
identifies the well
29 Real LOG RUN NUMBER Well log run number
30 Real X-FAULT JOINT x coordinate of fault joint
31 Real Y-FAULT JOINT y coordinate of fault joint
32 Real ZL-LEFT SIDE Z-value on left side of fault
33 Real ZR-RIGHT SIDE Z-value on right side of fault
34 Real DELTA Z-THROW Fault throw
35 Real SEG I.D. Fault or line identifier (all vertices for the same line
have the same identifier)
36 Real FAULT BANDWIDTH Width of a fault band
37 Real DIP ANGLE Angle of dip below the horizontal either in degrees
or radians
38 Real DIP AZIMUTH ANGLE Azimuth angle in degrees or radians of the
direction of dip clockwise from north
39 Real VOLUME BASEPLANE The baseplane used for a volumetrics calculation
40 Char*80 HORIZON NAME Surface or Horizon name
41 Real COLOR Color index
42 Real LINE NAME ANGLE Seismic track direction
43 Real SHOTPOINT LOCATION Distance along seismic track
44 Real POINT SEQUENCE NO. Sequence number for a point along a line
45 Real LOG DEPTH TYPE Type of depth:
1. True Vertical Depth, 2. Measured Depth, 3. True
Vertical Thickness, 4. True Stratigraphic Thickness
46 Real LOG DEPTH UNITS Log depth units: 1. feet, 2. meters
47 Real GRADS LATITUDE Latitude based on the Paris grads system
48 Real GRADS LONGITUDE Longitude based on the Paris grads system
Data FORTRAN
Type Data
Code Type Default Field Name Description
49 Real AREA SYMBOL Code to guide hachuring and colorfill in B-MAP
lease posting
50 Char*80 AREA IDENTIFICATION Lease polygon identification field to use in B-MAP
lease posting
51 Char*80 DMS-LATITUDE * Character string for Degree-Minute-Second
Latitude, with integer degrees, integer minutes and
decimal seconds separated by blanks
52 Char*80 DMS-LONGITUDE * Character string for Degree-Minute-Second
Longitude, with integer degrees, integer minutes
and decimal seconds separated by blanks
53 Real HEAVE The horizontal displacement of a fault
54 Real STANDARD DEVIATION Statistical standard deviation
55 Real DISCONTINUITY CODE Number that identifies the termination type of a
seismic horizon (for example, fault cu or diapir)
56 Char*8 FEATURE CODE Character field used to differentiate between
different kinds of data in the same ZIMS file, e.g.,
rivers, highways and political boundaries in the
same VERT file
57 Real 3D LINE NUMBER 3D line identifier
58 Real 3D SHOTPOINT NUMBER 3D shotpoint number
59 Char*8 WELL STATUS Character field containing well status information
60 Real SYMBOL ROTATION Field containing the rotation angle for a symbol in
degrees
61 Real LINE PATTERN NUMBER Field containing numbers indicating ZIGS line
pattern number
62 Real I-COORDINATE i coordinate for i,j coordinate system
63 Real J-COORDINATE j coordinate for i,j coordinate system
64 Real VELOCITY Seismic velocity
65 Real DEPTH Depth in linear units (such as m or ft)
66 Real TIME Depth in time units (sec or ms)
67 Real THICKNESS Interval thickness (isopach, isochore)
68 Real DZ2/DX2 Second derivative in X direction
69 Real DZ2/DY2 Second derivative in Y direction
70 Real DZ/DS Gradient amplitude
71 Real DZ/DS AZIMUTH Azimuth of the gradient amplitude
* South and west coordinates must be entered as negative numbers. These values can currently be converted to
decimal degrees in Operations.
Currently not used by Landmark geological programs.
Cannot import interactively in Z-MAP Plus.
Data FORTRAN
Type Data
Code Type Default Field Name Description
Appendix C.
Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns
Introduction
Z-MAP Plus now uses the OpenWorks well symbol table. This appendix
begins with a description of the OpenWorks symbol set, then describes
the Z-MAP Plus fonts and line patterns.
Line
5 -0.000471 -0.400000 -0.000942 -0.799999 0 0
Line
5 0.000471 0.399999 0.000942 0.799999 0 0
Line Width
Start X Start Y End X End Y Line Style
Circle
5 0.000000 0.000000 0.040000 1 0 0 5 0 0 0 0
Line Width
Center Y Edge Line Width
Color Fill Edge
Center X Radius Line Style
Fill
Pattern Edge Color
To edit this type of file, use a text editing program (such as vi or emacs).
The following information lists the column order of each graphic
element. In the text files, columns are delineated by a blank space. In
this list, a comma is used to show column separation simply to make the
list easier to read.
Arc
Color, Center X Position, Center Y Position, Radius, Start Angle, End Angle, Line Style, Line Width, Fill, Fill
Pattern, Edge, Edge Color, Edge Line Style, Edge Line Width
Circle
Color, Center - X Position, Center - Y Position, Radius, Fill, Fill Pattern, Edge, Edge Color, Edge Line Style, Edge
Line Width, Line Style, Line Width
Disk
Color, Center X Position, Center Y Position, Radius, Inner Radius, Start Angle, End Angle, Line Style, Line Width,
Fill, Fill Pattern, Edge, Edge Color, Edge Line Style, Edge Line Width
Ellipse
Color, Center X Position, Center Y Position, Major Radius, Minor Radius, Fill, Fill Pattern, Edge, Edge Color, Edge
Line Style, Edge Line Width, Line Style, Line Width
Line
Color, Start Point X Position, Start Point Y Position, End Point X Position, End Point Y Position, Line Style, Line
Width
Polygon
Color, Line Style, Line Width, Fill, Fill Pattern, Edge, Edge Color, Edge Line Style, Edge Line Width, Number of
Points
Polyline
Color, Line Style, Line Width, Number of Points
Rectangle
Color, Line Style, Line Width, Fill Fill Pattern, Edge, Edge Color, Edge Line Style, Edge Line Width, Number of
Points
Spline
Color, Line Style, Line Width, Number of Points
Text
Color, Start Point X Position, Start Point Y Position, Character Width Legible, Character Height Legible,
Character Width WYSIWYG, Character Height WYSIWYG, Font, Mode, Angle, Justification, Path
Well Symbol IDs
Font Types
Line Patterns
Appendix D.
Color Editing
Introduction
In a color graphics terminal, Z-MAP Plus picture features appear in
different colors. The colors assigned to each feature or part of a feature
are stored in the pictures color table.
Each picture in a graphics file has a color table associated with it. If you
edit the color editing for a picture, previously generated pictures are not
affected.
Use the color editing options to display and modify the current color
table. You can perform these actions:
Change the color that makes up a color index. *
Change the color of one or more features.
Change the default colors for displaying graphics features.
Read the color table from a disk file. *
Write the color table to a disk file. *
This appendix begins with an overview of how the program determines
the color of a specific feature. This is followed by a general description
of the Color Table.
For information about using the Color Table and Color Indices editing
options, see the View Menu Options section in the Z-MAP Plus
Reference Manual.
Terminology
The following terms are important for understanding color table basics.
Color Index is a number assigned to a color in the color table.
Graphic Primitives are the lines, text, symbols, and polygons used to
generate a feature.
Graphics Features are graphic primitives that have been grouped into
map features, such as contours, seismic lines, and borders.
* The RGB model describes the colors in ranges of 0 to 1, as evidenced in page 813. However, Z-MAP Plus
uses ranges of 0 to 100 in the interactive Color Table Edit.
BLUE
(0, 0, 100)
WHITE
(100, 100, 100)
MAGENTA
(100, 0, 100)
E
AL
SC
Y
G RA
GREEN
(0, 100, 0)
BLACK
(0, 0, 0)
YELLOW
(100, 100, 0)
RED
(100, 0, 0)
* The RGB model describes the colors in ranges of 0 to 1, as evidenced in page 813. However, Z-MAP Plus
uses ranges of 0 to 100 in the interactive Color Table Edit.
A very dark color might have a low combined total, such as Index 94 (R<0.2, G=0, B<0.05, total<0.25) or
Index 122 (B<0.4, G<0.01, B=0, total<0.41). A very light color might have a high combined total, such as
Index 150 (R=1, B<1, G<0.9, total<2.9).
Blue = 0
Magenta = 60
Red = 120
Yellow = 180
Green = 240
Cyan = 300
75
Lightness
Red 120 60 Magenta
25
BLACK 0
RGB HLS
COLOR
Red Green Blue Hue % Lightness % Saturation
Blue 0 0 1 0 50 100
Magenta 1 0 1 60 50 100
The illustration below shows the settings as seen in the Display Color
Table Edit window for Color Index 119 for both the RGB and HLS
systems.
Color Table Edit RGB and HLS settings for Color Index 119
Color Table
The Color Table defines 256 colors. The first eight default Z-MAP Plus
colors are:
0 = background (black/white) *
1 = normal foreground (white/black) *
2 = red
3 = green
4 = blue
5 = cyan
6 = magenta
7 = yellow
An index number is assigned to each cell in the Color Table. The Color
Index Number of each cell in the Color Table can be determined by
adding the number on the left side of the row to the number at the top of
the column.
* The background of the Z-MAP Plus window display area is independent of the RGB value associated with
color 0. The display depends on the System Switches Background setting, which toggles the display of color
indexes 0 and 1. Setting color 0 to red does not cause the display area background to be red, but may have
other unexpected results. It is advised that you not change the colors for indexes 0 or 1.
These color associations are valid the first time you enter the program.
The color table used in future sessions is based on any changes you
make in the current session.
Printing Color
Z-MAP Plus comes with the graphics file COLORWHEEL.ZGF *. If
you plot the single picture on this graphics file on an electrostatic plotter,
you see a graphical representation of all the 256 color choices provided
by the color table. This representation also helps you understand the
logic behind the design of the color table, explained below.
Electrostatic plotters can render have significant differences in the way
colors are rendered even though the machines are given exactly the same
instructions for ink combinations. Differences can occur even on
machines made by the same manufacturer. Color variation can be
caused by many factors, including:
the model of the machine used
the state of maintenance of the machine
rasterization software employed, and the version
the control setting, such as the contrast knob on the plotter
the source and batch number of the inks used on the machines
the source and batch number of the paper used on the machines,
and the humidity at which paper has been stored
The color table is optimized for use with Landmarks own 400 dpi
Versatec plotter. (This is why the picture in COLORWHEEL.ZGF is
named VERSATEC SAMPLE COLOR.) Color combinations are likely
to appear slightly different on other machines.
For a particularly complex map you may wish to use more than 100
distinct color indexes of your own design for different map features.
Assuming that you start with index 56 and use up indexes in order from
56, then 150 user-defined color indexes takes you to color index 205.
To provide maximum flexibility for such a power user, Landmark has
mapped the color wheels corresponding to 50% and 75% lightness into
indexes 206 to 230 and 231 to 255, respectively. For more information
about color representation, see page 813.
Default Changes
The default starting color index for colorfill contours is cell 56.
Remember that 56 through 93 are place-holders that you are expected to
change in order to develop a range of colors for a particular operation
such as deviated well posting or colorfilled contouring.
The two tables that complete this section show the RGB settings for all
256 color indexes (Color Representative Area) and the color indexes
associated with the four types of graphic primitives for each of the
graphics feature types (Color Index Section).
* Select Write in the Display Color Table editing window to create an ASCII file of the color table. After
editing this file, select Read in the Color Table editing window to create a color table from the ASCII file.
2 1 1 1 BORDERS 1
3 9 1 1 CONTOURS 3
1 12 1 1 TEXT 6
13 1 1 1 POLYGON LINES 7
16 17 16 1 NORTH ARROW 10
6 7 7 1 PERSPECTIVE FISHNET 14
18 1 1 1 FAULT TRACES 16
26 27 1 1 PROFILES 19
1 1 1 1 TOPOGRAPHIC DATA 25
7 1 1 1 PERSPECTIVE AXIS 26
10 10 1 1 SEISMIC SECTIONS 27
28 28 1 1 DEVIATED WELLS 28
1 1 1 1 COLORFILLED POLYGONS 30
1 1 1 1 MAP LEGENDS 34
2 7 1 7 GRAPHICS MENU 40
1 1 1 1 PICTURE LIMITS 41
1 1 1 1 NTS BOUNDARIES 42
1 1 1 1 NTS LABELS 43
1 1 1 1 MAP SCALES 44
Appendix E.
Import/Export
Introduction
You can move files into or out of an MFD by using the File Import
and File Save As options in the Z-MAP Plus window (as described
in this topic). (You can also move files into or out of an MFD by using
the File Manager, as described in Using the File Manager on
page 60.)
MFDs are files used by Z-MAP Plus and other Landmark geological
products for storing data, such as the data to create maps or cross
sections. Files you import into an MFD can be in almost any
column-oriented format since the import process allows you to describe
and locate each part of the input file. Similarly, the Save As operation
gives you complete control of the output format when you move files
out of an MFD.
If you use OpenWorks, you have a direct connection with the
OpenWorks project data. You do not need to perform explicit import
and export operations to transfer data between the OpenWorks database
and Landmark applications. If you use Z-MAP Plus with an OpenWorks
project, you can read and save grids, pointsets, and faults directly to the
OpenWorks database.
For more information about OpenWorks, see the topic OpenWorks on
page 13.
As shown in Appendix B. File and Field Codes on page 785, you can
import only file types 1-14 into Z-MAP Plus.
Common Terms
The following terms are used to discuss file transfer.
Physical Record
Each formatted disk file is composed of a number of lines of
information; each line is referred to as a physical record. Normally the
physical records are 80 characters (columns) long; however, the length
of the record may vary so that it is longer or shorter than 80 characters.
Logical Record
A group of related information that may extend to several lines (physical
records) of a formatted disk file is called a logical record.
For example, information brought into Z-MAP Plus is commonly tied to
an x,y location. Many measurements may be recorded at that x,y
location, such as top and base elevation of rock units, porosities, ore
grades, etc. This recorded information may take up several lines
(physical records) in the file. A logical grouping of information related
to one x,y position is followed by another logical grouping of
information related to another x,y position and so on. These logical
groups of related information, which may extend over several physical
records, are called logical records.
Multiple Formats
If multiple formats follow one another, you do not need to enter an end @ sign
until you enter the last format.
Example
@GROUP 1
.
.
.
@GROUP 2
.
.
.
@
Comment Symbols
You can place comment lines anywhere in the format. You use another
special symbol to identify a comment line, typically an exclamation
point (!). Place the ! in the first column of each comment line.
History Symbols
You can store history information in a file created by the import
operation. History information consists of the date the file was created,
who created it, and other useful facts. To identify a line of history
information, another you use another special symbol, typically a plus
sign (+). Place the + in the first column of each history line. You can
include a maximum of 23 lines of historical information anywhere in the
format.
Example
You can build the basic form of the format with the three types of format
lines just described. The following example shows the types of format
lines in use.
@
!
! Date: 04 February, 1996
! Author: VAB
! Purpose: This Format Group demonstrates how
! special symbols are used to define:
!
! 1) The Format Group "@"
! 2) Comments "!"
! 3) History information "+"
!
Record Limits
There is a maximum of ten physical records per logical record.
Example
@Seismic Section, SSEC, 80, 1
@Alaskan Well Data, DATA, 200, 4, HEADER
@ Alaskan Baseline , VERT, 80, 3
@Alaskan Cell Table, CELL, 80, 1
The name Alaskan Baseline would have to be referenced elsewhere with two
spaces in front and one behind.
Example
@Alaskan Topography, GRID, 6
@Alaskan Top Lisburne, GRID, 1, HEADER
Example
375, 1, 0,, 42 . . .
In the above example, the fourth parameter has no value but its position
is held.
Any ending parameters on a line that are allowed to default and not
followed by other parameters may be dropped and no commas used to
hold their position.
Example
X-Field, Z-Field, Segment ID., etc.
For a list of standard default field names, see Appendix B. File and Field
Codes, starting on page 785.
When exporting from an MFD out to a formatted data file, the output
Field Name must match the name of the field being exported. If left
blank, by default the name of the field in the MFD is used. This means
that fields to be exported are not selected by Field Index instead of by
Field Name.
7 = Export
Sorting is performed by other operations than import and export. In the import
and export operations, you have the option to override the sort priorities.
Example
X-FIELD, 1, 1, 1, 1, 15, 7, 1.0E+30, NULL, 15, 7, 0
Y-FIELD, 2, 2, 1, 16, 30, 7, 1.0E+30, , 15, 7, 0
TOPO, 3, 3, 1, 31, 45, 7, 9999, , 15, 7, 0
SYMBOL CODE, 8, 21, 2, 31, 40, 3, -9999, , 10, 3, 0
WELL ID, 9, 20, 2, 41, 52, 12
BIASED TOPO, 10, 3, 2, 53, 67, 7, 1.0E+30, , 15, 7, 0
Example
If you are importing a 7 row by 9 column grid in
which there are 4 node values per record, then
IMPORT would read the top 4 rows of column 1 from
the first record and the bottom 3 rows of column
1 from the second record. IMPORT would start on
a new record (record 3) and begin reading values
from column 2, and so on until the grid is read.
The grid field description parameters are specified on three lines of the
format. Certain parameters belong on each line and cannot be carried
from one line to the next. As with non-grid field description parameters,
these parameters must be entered in the same order listed in the
following description.
They must also be separated by commas, and two commas must be used
to hold the position of parameters that are not specified (allowed to
default). Lines containing description parameters have no special
symbols at their start. Following are the grid field description
parameters.
It includes the decimal point and places to the right and left of the
decimal. If the grid value is an integer, the value is right-justified in this
space. If the value has a decimal point, the decimal is positioned
according to your specification in the Number of Decimals parameter
(Parameter 4 of this line). This value must be at least 7 greater than the
Decimal Location (Parameter 4.)
Default Value:15
Example
15, 9999.0, , 5, 10
, ,UNKNOWN
Example
3, 2, 0.0, 9765.01, -400.32, 900.25
501, 301, 0., 10000., 0., 900
Example
10.0, 20.0, 40.0
0.0, 10.0, 0.0
Example
If you are importing a 7 by 7 lattice file, then
IMPORT would read the first 7 vertical spacings
followed by the 7 horizontal spacings.
The lattice field description parameters are specified on two lines of the
format. Certain parameters belong to each line and cannot be carried
from one line to the next. As with non-grid field description parameters,
these parameters must be entered in the same order as they are listed
below.
They must also be separated by commas, and two commas must be used
to hold the position of parameters that are not specified (allowed to
default). Lines containing description parameters have no special
symbols at their start. Following are the lattice field description
parameters.
Example
7, 1, NOTUNIF, 7, 7, 43.11157
5, 2, UNIFORM, 5, 4, 0.0
Example
304344.3125, 1507823.750
0.0, 0.0
Format File
Many file formats referring to a variety of different datasets may be
stored in one file. The file is a standard formatted disk file built with a
text editor. The formats are stored one after the other with no extra lines
between them.
To use a format in a format file you must specify the format file name.
You must also specify the format in the format file.
The format file concept has been carried to the format that is placed at
the top of the actual data file. Sometimes it is desirable to read a file
using several different descriptions. For example, you may want to read
some of the fields in one transfer and other fields in another transfer.
Several formats can be placed on top of the file being transferred. To get
the description you want to use, specify the name of that format.
If several formats are at the top of a file and no format name is specified,
the first group is used when the data is transferred.
Examples
The examples in the following text illustrate the file and field
description parameters for non-grid and grid files.
Non-Grid Examples
Grid Examples
Example 1:
@ TOPOLOGICAL GRID, GRID, 5
!
! Date: 04 February, 1996
! Author: VAB
! Purpose: This Format Group may be used for grid
! formatted files
!
+ This file covers the Nomans Land Basin in Anywhere, Alaska.
+ It was obtained in May of 1985 from Crater Company.
!
15, 9999.0, , 5, 10
3, 2, 0.0, 9765.01, -400.32, 900.25
1000.0, 200.0, 200.0
@
Example 2:
@BASELINE GRID, GRID, 5
!
, , UNKNOWN
501, 301, 0., 10000., 0., 900
500.0, 0.0, 0.0
@
Introduction
How files are structured for transfer into an MFD depends on: 1) the
type of data being transferred, and 2) the process in which the data is
used. This section contains important information regarding these
different file types and how they must be structured for use in the
selected Z-MAP Plus process.
Among the many different types of data that Z-MAP Plus supports are:
contour, control point, deviated well, fault, grid, profile, text, vertex,
seismic sections, and geologic sections. When you transfer data to an
MFD, keep the following points in mind:
Not all data that can be transferred into an MFD can be used
by the Z-MAP Plus program.
Some types of data may be input as more than one file type. For
example, you can bring in contour data as a contour file or a
control point file, depending on the data structure.
Fields may consist of any number of characters and may be in
any order.
Some file structures are rigid; others are free format. Seismic
section data is an example of a rigid file structure, while contour is
an example of a free format structure.
Control Point files may contain anywhere from two to fifty
fields. However, two fields must always be either X and Y or
latitude and longitude. When latitude and longitude fields are
substituted for the X- and Y-fields, you must generate the X- and
Y-fields before using the file in most processes. You may do this by
performing coordinate transformation on the file.
Vertex files must have a minimum of three fields: the X-field,
the Y-field, and the Segment ID.
File Structures
Each of the charts in this section is dedicated to a different type of data.
The purpose of these charts is to:
List the file structures associated with each file type.
Help you select the correct data type for the selected structure.
Tell you the minimum number of fields you should transfer in
when you use a particular structure.
Help you match the correct file structure with the process you use.
Comments specific to each file structure are also provided, as well as an
example of the structure.
START
NCOLS = 4
NROWS = 3
Contour Files Structured As: Are Imported As: Can Be Used By:
Contour Gridding
ZNON/Marker* Contour Level CONTOUR Data Contour Editing
X Y with 2 Fields Contour Digitizing
Contour Drawing
Example: Comment:
0.1000E+31 9500 ZNON (the null data value) or a unique marker value is
1200. 826.1 the first value read from the record. All subsequent
1400. 832.2 records beginning with this value are recognized as
0.1000E+31 9600. divider records.
1522 1000.
1568 1200.
1578 1400
* Marker can be any value not found in the data. All subsequent records having this value is considered as divider
records. A file with the marker in the latitude or Y-field cannot be converted by the coordinate transformation
operation.
ZNON
ZNON Continuation
Contour Level Flag
X Y CONTOUR Data Contour Editing
with a Minimum Contour Gridding
of 2 Fields Contour Drawing
ZNON ZNON (optional line,
not required for input)
Example: Comments:
Contour Files Structured As: Are Imported As: Can Be Used By:
Example:
9500. 0.1000E+31
1200. 826.1
1400. 832.2
9600. 0.1000E+31
1522. 1000.
1568. 1200.
1578. 1400.
1593. 1600.
* Marker can be any value not found in the data. All subsequent records having this value is considered as divider
records. A file with the marker in the latitude or Y-field cannot be converted by the coordinate transformation
operation
Example: Comments:
0.1000E+3 99999. 99999. Any number can be entered as a "Dummy" value, as the
1 826.1 9500. program ignores these values.
1200. 832.2 9500.
1400. 1000. 9600. The contour level changes each time the Z-value changes.
1522. 1200. 9600.
1568. 1400. 9600
1578.
Contour Gridding (with
careful attention to
Control Point Data
X Y Z error checking
with 3 Fields
parameters)
Post Data/Grids
Example: Comment:
1200. 826.1 9500. The contour level changes each time the Z-value changes.
1400. 832.2 9500.
1522. 1000. 9600.
1568. 1200. 9600.
1578. 1400. 9600.
1593. 1600. 9600.
1200. 826.1 9600.
1096. 800.0 9600.
Vertex Files Structured As: Are Imported As: Can Be Used By:
Example: Comment:
585.6 1600. 1.0 These are polygonal vertices without symbol code field.
600.0 1578. 1.0
686.4 1400. 1.0
1200. 1461. 2.0
1264. 1400. 2.0
1220. 1200. 2.0
Any process that
SYMBOL Vertex Data
X Y SEG ID requires polygons or
CODE with 4 Fields or Lines
lines
Example: Comment:
584.6 1600. 1.0 24 These are polygonal vertices without symbol code field.
600.0 1578. 1.0 24
686.4 1400. 1.0 24
1200. 1461. 1.0 24
1264. 1400. 1.0 24
1220. 1200. 1.0 24
Vertex files may also contain additional fields such as Color, Area Identification, etc.
Profile Files Structured As: Are Imported As: Can Be Used By:
Example: Comment:
0.1000E+3 99999. 99999. Any number can be entered as a "Dummy" value, as the
1 1.4000 400.0 program ignores these values.
7.6000 2.7510 398.0
7.7500 99999. 99999.
0.1000E+3 4.4750 405.0
1 5.8800 412.0
7.7000
7.1500
SEG Control Point Data Post Data/Grids
X Y Z
ID with 4 Fields
Example: Comment:
7.6000 1.4000 400.00 1.0 Each time the Segment ID changes, a new profile line
7.7500 2.7510 398.00 1.0 begins.
7.7000 4.4750 405.00 2.0
7.1500 5.8800 412.00 2.0
6.4000 6.1900 413.00 3.0
6.4500 6.6100 414.00 3.0
6.8500 0.3980 406.00 3.0
5.4920 0 409.50 4.0
4.4280 0.5560 416.00 4.0
3.5090 0 423.00 4.0
2.4250 1.3910 430.00 4.0
2.0500 1.7900 434.00 4.0
1.4940
1.3000
Fault Files Structured As: Are Imported As: Can Be Used By:
Point Gridding
SEG DELTA DIP Faults Plus
X Y HEAVE
ID Z-THROW ANGLE with 6 Fields Line Drawing
Post Data/Grids
Example: Comment:
585.6 1600. 1.0 10.5 85 3.0 This is the center-line fault structure used in
600.0 1578. 1.0 10.7 82 2.9 Point Gridding Plus.
686.4 1400. 1.0 10.2 87 2.7
1200. 1461. 2.0 10.9 81 3.5
1264. 1400. 2.0 11.3 78 3.6
1220. 1200. 2.0 11.1 77 3.8
SEG BAND Faults Point Gridding
X Y
ID WIDTH with 4 Fields
Example: Comment:
585.6 1600. 1.0 10.0 This structure includes a fault bandwidth field
600.0 1578. 1.0 25.0 used only by point gridding. Contour
686.4 1400. 1.0 10.0 Gridding can use this file, but ignores this
1200. 1461. 2.0 10.0 field.
1264. 1400. 2.0 25.0
1220. 1200. 2.0 10.0
Point Gridding
Plus
SEG Faults
X Y Point Gridding
ID with 3 Fields
Contour Gridding
Line Drawing
Example: Comment:
585.6 1600. 1.0 These are faults with no fault band data.
600.0 1578. 1.0
686.4 1400. 1.0
1200. 1461. 2.0
1264. 1400. 2.0
1220. 1200. 2.0
SEG Faults Contour Gridding
X Y Zleft Zright
ID with 5 Fields Line Drawing
Example: Comment:
Fault Files Structured As: Are Imported As: Can Be Used By:
585.6 1600. 1.0 25.0 36.0 Contour Gridding accepts this format. Using
600.0 1578. 1.0 27.0 30.0 Zleft and Zright avoids having to create
686.4 1400. 1.0 28.0 37.0 separate profile lines around faults to help
1200. 1461. 2.0 27.0 35.0 control Contour Gridding.
1264. 1400. 2.0 26.0 36.0
1220 1200. 2.0 27.0 37.0
ZNON 0
X1 Y1
Faults
Xn Yn
(Faults with No Contour Gridding
ZNON 0
Bands)
X1 Y1
Xm Ym
Example:
0.1000E+31 0
1200. 826.1
1400. 826.2
1522. 1000.
1568. 1200.
1578. 1400.
1593. 1600.
0.1000E+31 0
Example:
Example:
Comment:
The X-field is a non-integer shotpoint number and the Y-field measures time. However, the X- and Y-fields are used
instead of the shotpoint number field and the Z-field because it represents the x,y axes of a seismic section.
Text
File Type: TEXT
Minimum No. of Fields = 3
Can be used by: All text processes
X-FIELD Y-FIELD TEXT FIELD
Example:
Comment:
Text files may also define location mode, font, character size and orientation.
Cross Section
File Type: XSEC
Minimum No. of Fields = 4
Can be used by: (generated by) Z-CAP
X-FIELD Y-FIELD LINE NAME HORIZON NAME
Example:
Comment:
The X-field represents linear displacement along the profile baseline, while the Y-field represents depth. However,
X- and Y-fields are used instead of the linear displacement field and the Z-field because it represents the x,y axes of
a cross section.
OpenWorks
You can use the ASCII (Import) option to save the following data in an
MFD or in OpenWorks:
Well Data (X, Y, Z)
Grids
Contours
Vertices
Profiles
Faults
Other Tools
OpenWorks also contains tools you can use to load mapping data into
the OpenWorks database. These tools accessible from the OpenWorks
menu under Data Import. (For more information about these
options, see the OpenWorks Data Loading guide).
The following OpenWorks tools are of particular interest to
Z-MAP Plus users:
Data Import ASCII Well Loader
Data Import Curve Loader
Data Import Map Data I/O (Point sets and Fault
polygons)
Data Import MFD Cultural Loader
Step 1:
Click the Output Name button in
the IMPORT FILES dialog box.
Step 2:
Select OpenWorks
from the Output
MASTER FILE
drop-down list. A
default Fault Set Name
appears in the Output
File Name box. Click
the OW button. The
OpenWorks Output
Specification dialog
box appears.
Step 3:
Review and change, if necessary,
the Fault Set Name and other
parameters. Click OK.
Step 1:
Click the Fill in Macro Parameter Defaults
button, then click the View Parameter Panels,
Change/Assign Parameters Values button
on the EXECUTE MACRO dialog box.
Fill in appropriate macro parameters until the
following dialog box appears.
Step 2:
Select OpenWorks for
the MFD to Contain the
Output Grid File. A
default map data set
name appears in the
Name of the Output
Grid File. Click the OW
button. In the OpenWorks
Output Specification
dialog box that appears,
make any needed
changes and click OK.
Step 3:
Review and change, if necessary,
the Map Data Set Name and the
other parameters. Click OK.
After you complete these steps, the grid data is written to the
OpenWorks database and is accessible in Z-MAP Plus.
Appendix F.
State Plane Codes
State Plane
NAD 27 NAD 83
No. State/Territory
Zone Zone
Char. Code Num. Code
7 Connecticut CT 0600
8 Delaware DE 0700
State Plane
NAD 27 NAD 83
No. State/Territory
Zone Zone
Char. Code Num. Code
20 Maryland MD 1900
State Plane
NAD 27 NAD 83
No. State/Territory
Zone Zone
Char. Code Num. Code
State Plane
NAD 27 NAD 83
No. State/Territory
Zone Zone
Char. Code Num. Code
42 Samoa AS 5300
State Plane
NAD 27 NAD 83
No. State/Territory
Zone Zone
Char. Code Num. Code
45 Tennessee TN 4100
48 Vermont VT 4400
Appendix G.
Mapping and Cartographic Projections
Overview
Projections transform coordinates between geodetic format (latitude and
longitude) and projected format (northings and eastings).
A map projection may be associated with each picture you generate.
Once you project a picture, however, all data to be plotted in the picture
must be compatible with the pictures projection parameters. (This
applies to all picture data, such as contour, vertex, control point, and grid
data.). Before you can plot the picture data, geodetic coordinates must
also be transformed to northings/eastings by using the correct map
projections.
To set up a projection, you must perform these tasks:
Choose a control point dataset.
Specify the projection direction (for example, Lat/Long to N/E).
Select a projection and specify the applicable parameters.
Enter the output file name and coordinate field names.
Map Properties
As a flat two-dimensional map cannot accurately represent the curved
surface of the earth, a compromise must be found in the resultant
distortion to satisfy the needs of each application. Cartographic
projections generally are classified by the properties preserved in
transforming the curved face of the earth to a flat map. Shape, area,
distance and direction are the most important properties that may be
retained by a map. A single map projection can at best only meet one or
two of these properties. Each is discussed below.
Shapes
If a map represents the true shape of each localized region on the earth,
it is said to be conformal. The shapes and angles of a local region are
preserved, along with the contours of boundaries, borders and
coastlines. Lines representing parallels and meridians always cross at
right angles. The three most common conformal projections are:
Areas
When a map accurately represents the relative proportions of different
areas of the earth, it is called an equivalent or equal-area map.
Consequently, a penny placed anywhere on the map covers the same
total surface area. Note that conformality (correct shapes) does not
imply equivalence (correct area proportions). For example, the Standard
Mercator projection correctly depicts the contours of both Greenland
and South America. However, it scales the surface area of Greenland as
almost equal to that of South America when in reality, Greenland is only
about one-ninth the size of South America.
As a rule, equivalent projections are considered only when working with
a very large area, such as world maps.
Distances
Although the area scale of a map may be kept constant (equivalent), this
is usually not true for the scale distance between two points on a map.
The scale varies along a line between two locations, even if the scale
areas are in correct proportion. The optimal situation is one where true
scale is preserved on the map along a particular line on the earth. This
line is called a standard parallel or a central meridian.
Directions
Since the earth is globular, compass directions at a location bend in the
direction of the earths curvature and can actually overlap on the
opposite side of the earth. This may be illustrated by imagining a ship
headed toward the North Pole. Once the ship passes the pole it is then
headed south, opposite from its original direction. Thus, it is not
possible to obtain a true azimuth from one location to another simply by
measuring the apparent angle on a flat map. However, a special class of
projections allows the measurement of true azimuth from the reference
point at the center of the map to any other point on the map. Such maps
are called azimuthal projections. Unfortunately, azimuthal projections
suffer distortions in other important map properties such as shape, area,
and distance.
Control Parameters
Input Dataset
Coordinate Transformations can be performed on control point, contour,
fault, vertex, and/or any other datasets having x and y coordinates.
Control point data need only consist of x,y fields where x is the
horizontal distance of the data point and y is the distance of that point
perpendicular to x.
Direction of Projection
Data may be transformed between geodetic and northing/easting
coordinate system, using either a forward or inverse projection.
Forward Projection
A forward projection translates latitude/longitude locations to
northing/easting locations given a set of map projection parameters.
Geodetic locations on a data file must first be projected before you can
display the information on a map.
Inverse Projection
An inverse projection recovers latitude/longitude coordinates from
northing/easting coordinates. This option is useful when the input data
comes from a projection that is incompatible with the desired map
projection.
Map Projections
Most map projections are either geometric or semi-geometric so that
geographic features are projected onto a geometric surface that can be
laid flat like a map. The geometric surfaces employed in most
cartographic projections are the cone, the cylinder and the plane. The
position of points projected upon the surface may be determined by
constructing a straight line from the reference point of the projection
through the desired location on earth, and intersecting the projection
surface at a point. Imagine a line from the center of the earth passing
through New York City and intersecting a cylinder lying tangent at the
Equator. The location of New York City would be determined uniquely
on the cylinder, which could then be cut along its length and unrolled to
produce a rectangular map. The shape formed by numerous locations on
the earth produces the shape appearing on the map. Figure 1 exactly
describes the case of the Standard Mercator
.
Projections
The available projections are listed below. They have been organized
into two groups depending on their source of origin. The first group
contains the traditional Z-MAP Plus projections and the second group
contains projections obtained from Blue Marble. The groups are listed
below.
Z-MAP Plus projections
UNIVERSAL TRANSVERSE MERCATOR
GENERAL TRANSVERSE MERCATOR
STANDARD MERCATOR
SINGLE PARALLEL LAMBERT
DOUBLE PARALLEL LAMBERT
AZIMUTHAL GNOMONIC
AZIMUTHAL STEREOGRAPHIC
AZIMUTHAL ORTHOGRAPHIC
MODIFIED POLYCONIC
ALBERS EQUAL AREA
AMERICAN POLYCONIC
OBLIQUE MERCATOR
NEW ZEALAND MAP GRID
CASSINI-SOLDNER
BIPOLAR OBLIQUE CONIC CONFORMAL
VAN DER GRINTEN I
EQUIDISTANT CONIC
STEREOGRAPHIC
POLAR STEREOGRAPHIC
ROMANIA STEREOGRAFICA
NEDERLAND STEREOGRAFISCHE
Cylindrical Projections
Landmarks geological mapping programs support four cylindrical
projections.
Standard Mercator
Oblique Mercator
Transverse Mercator
Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM)
Conic Projections
Landmark geological mapping programs support five conic projections.
Lambert with One Standard Parallel
Lambert with Two Standard Parallel
Modified Rectangular Polyconic
Albers Equal Area Projection
Cassini-Soldner
Other Projections
New Zealand Map Grid
STANDARD MERCATOR
When a Standard Mercator projection is applied, the map is conformal,
but has serious distortions in area proportions for regions located more
than a few degrees apart in latitude. Distance scale is constant along the
equator, which serves as the standard parallel, but becomes increasingly
distorted away from the equator approaching infinity at the pole. A
Standard Mercator projection is most accurate within 15 degrees of the
Equator, but may be used up to approximately 85 degrees latitude for
illustrative purposes. This projection is useful in navigation since, in its
spherical form, a straight line on the map represents a rhumb line or a
line of constant bearing.
AZIMUTHAL GNOMONIC
This projection places the reference point at the center of the earth. The
map is not conformal. Distortion in area and shape grows quickly away
from the center of the map. Although distance scale is distorted, the
shortest distance between two points appears as a straight line on the
map. Chiefly used for obtaining azimuths, this projection may also be
used to preserve shapes, areas, and distances if the scale is large enough.
The Azimuthal Gnomonic, Stereographic and Orthographic projections
always provide an accurate azimuth from the center point of the map to
any other location on the map. While there are considerable distortions
for maps of large areas, azimuths from the reference remain true.
AZIMUTHAL STEREOGRAPHIC
This projection places the reference point on the surface of the earth,
opposite the center of the mapping plane. It is conformal for all
orientations. However relative areas and distance scale quickly distort
away from the center of the map, although not as quickly as in the
Gnomonic projection. It produces a near perfect map if used for circular
areas of a few degrees in size such as large islands, small countries and
continents, and polar areas. One of its notable properties is that any
circle on earth, unless it passes through the point opposite the origin of
projection, appears as a circle on the map. The Z-MAP Plus Azimuthal
Stereographic projection uses a spherical earth model.
AZIMUTHAL ORTHOGRAPHIC
This projection places the reference point at an infinite distance away
from the earth and is analogous to a plan or elevation view of the earth.
This projection produces the same distortion present when the earth is
viewed from outer space. This projection is not conformal. This
projection suffers severe distortions in other map properties far away
from the center of the projection plane, although this could be
considered a visual aid. An Orthographic projection is used when an
accurate pictorial view of the earth is desired, and is limited to the
hemisphere visible from space.
MODIFIED POLYCONIC
In a polyconic projection, each parallel of latitude is constructed as
though it were the standard parallel of a true conic projection. Thus, a
complete projection requires an infinite number of cones, one for each
value of latitude, with cones successively flatter towards the pole.
In a rectangular polyconic projection, the parallels are evenly spaced,
and meridians and parallels meet at right angles. This projection is used
extensively to map north of the 80th parallel in Canada. The modified
rectangular polyconic projection is neither conformal, equivalent, or
azimuthal. However, it is possible to produce a map of a small region
with excellent properties since the user may alter the scale in a desired
manner by choosing both a central meridian and a standard parallel,
along with their respective scale errors.
AMERICAN POLYCONIC
This is a conic projection in which meridians are complex curves
concave toward a straight central meridian. Parallels are nonconcentric
circles except for a straight equator. This projection is used for areas
with a north-south orientation. Only along the central meridian does it
portray true shape, area, distance, and direction. Individual sheets of this
series can be edge-joined since they are drawn with straight meridians
for convenience. They cannot be mosaiced beyond a few sheets.
OBLIQUE MERCATOR
This is a conformal cylindrical map projection. Points on the surface of
a sphere or spheroid, such as the earth, are conceived as developed by
Mercator principles on a cylindrical tangent along an oblique great
circle. This projection may be useful for plotting linear configurations
situated along a line oblique to the earths equator.
CASSINI-SOLDNER
This projection is similar to a polyconic map projection except that it
uses but one central meridian for a whole series. It is best adapted for
north-south belts and large-scale maps of small areas.
EQUIDISTANT CONIC
A conic projection with scale true in the north-south direction, but in the
east-west direction only along the two standard parallels. Neither
conformal nor equal area. This Projection provided by Blue Marble
Geographics.
STEREOGRAPHIC
This is like the Azimuthal Stereographic, but it uses a spheroidal model
of the earth rather than a spherical model.This Projection provided by
Blue Marble Geographics.
POLAR STEREOGRAPHIC
This is a special case of the Stereographic projection, with the center of
the projection at the pole. It is used mostly for mapping polar
regions.This Projection provided by Blue Marble Geographics.
ROMANIA STEREOGRAFICA
This is a custom projection promoted by the Romanian government for
the mapping of Romania. It is designed to product very low-distortion
maps of that region, and is not recommended for mapping anywhere
else. Because it is a custom projection, almost all of the parameters are
standard and users have to supply very few. This Projection provided by
Blue Marble Geographics.
NEDERLAND STEREOGRAFISCHE
This is a custom projection promoted by the government of the
Netherlands for the mapping within the Netherlands. It is designed to
product very low-distortion maps of that region, and is not
recommended for mapping anywhere else. Because it is a custom
projection, almost all of the parameters are standard and users have to
supply very few. This Projection provided by Blue Marble Geographics.
Mercator
The Mercator is a cylindrical, conformal projection with no distortion
along the equator.When a Mercator projection is applied, the map is
conformal, but has serious distortions in area proportions for regions
located more than a few degrees apart in latitude. Distance scale is
constant along the equator, which serves as the standard parallel, but
becomes increasingly distorted away from the equator approaching
infinity at the pole. A Standard Mercator projection is most accurate
within 15 degrees of the Equator, but may be used up to approximately
85 degrees latitude for illustrative purposes. This projection is useful in
navigation since, in its spherical form, a straight line on the map
represents a rhumb line or a line of constant bearing.
Transverse Mercator
Maps generated using the Transverse Mercator projection have a
constant scale along the central meridian and overcome the extreme
scale distortion toward the poles found in the Standard Mercator
projection. The projection is conformal and approximately equivalent
for areas within a few degrees of the central meridian. Scale distance is
exact along the central meridian for a tangent cylinder, and exactly
reduced in proportion to the scale factor along the central meridian for a
secant cylinder. Directions are fairly accurate over a few degrees.
Distortions become significant three or four degrees East or West of the
Central Meridian. This projection should not be used to create maps
with large east-west extent.
Cassini-Soldner
This projection is best suited for regions predominantly north-south,
rather than for east-west regions. This projection has been replaced by
the Transverse Mercator in many modern applications. This projection
is cylindrical, but is neither equal area nor conformal. This projection is
similar to a polyconic map projection except that it uses but one central
meridian for a whole series. It is best adapted for north-south belts and
large-scale maps of small areas.
Lambert Conic
The Lambert Conic is often used for maps of countries and regions with
predominant east-west expanse. Its parallels are unequally spaced arcs
of concentric circles, more closely spaced near the center of the map.
Meridians are equally spaced radii of the same circles, thereby cutting
parallels at right angles. Scale is true along two standard parallels,
normally, or along just one. Pole in same hemisphere as standard
parallels is a point; other pole is at infinity.
Stereographic
This is like the Azimuthal Stereographic, but it uses a spheroidal model
of the earth rather than a spherical model.Hotine Oblique Mercator
(1 point and azimuth)
Azimuthal Equidistant
The most noticeable feature of this azimuthal projection is the fact that
distances measured from the center (of the map) are true. Therefore, a
circle about the projection center defines the locus of points that are
equally far away from the plot origin. Furthermore, directions from the
center are also true. The projection, in the polar aspect, is at least several
centuries old. It is a useful projection for a global view of locations at
various or identical distance from a given point (the map center).
Bonne
Bonne projection is best suited for the continents in the northern
hemisphere. The Bonne projection is pseudoconical and equal area. The
central meridian is a straight line. Other meridians are complex curves.
Bonne projection has no distortion along the central meridian and the
standard parallel. It is used for atlas maps of continents and for
topographic mapping of some countries.
Equidistant Conic
A conic projection with scale true in the north-south direction, but in the
east-west direction only along the two standard parallels. Neither
conformal nor equal area.
Equidistant Cylindrical
Equidistant Cylindrical projection--probably the simplest of all map
projections to construct and one of the oldest, dating back more than
2000 years. It is now used primarily for maps covering small areas,
where distortion is less important than the ease of displaying special
information. This projection is cylindrical, and neither equal area nor
conformal
This projection is similar to a polyconic map projection except that it
uses but one central meridian for a whole series. It is best adapted for
north-south belts and large-scale maps of small areas.
Miller Cylindrical
Miller Cylindrical projection--basically a modified Mercator projection,
with a better balance between shape and area distortion. This projection
is cylindrical, and neither equal area nor conformal. Often used for
world maps this projection avoids some of the scale exaggerations of the
Mercator
Mollweide
The Mollweide projection is a pseudocylindrical projection that
resembles cylindrical projections in that parallel latitude lines are
straight, but lines of longitude are curved. The Mollweide is equal-area
and its central meridian is straight. The 90th meridians are circular arcs.
Parallels are straight, but unequally spaced. Scale is true only along the
standard parallels of 40:44 N and 40:44 S. Because of its shape, the
Mollweide is often used for world maps.
Orthographic
The orthographic azimuthal projection is a perspective projection from
infinite distance. It is therefore often used to give the appearance of a
globe viewed from space. As with Lamberts equal area and the
stereographic, only one hemisphere can be viewed at any time. The
projection is neither equal area nor conformal, and much distortion is
introduced near the edge of a hemisphere. The directions from the center
of projection are true. The projection was known to the Egyptians and
Greeks more than 2,000 years ago.
Polar Stereographic
This is a conformal, azimuthal projection that dates back to the Greeks.
Its main use is for mapping the polar regions. In the polar aspect all
meridians are straight lines and parallels are arcs of circles.
Polyconic
Polyconic projectionbest suited for small regions. When used for a
small area, this projection preserves shapes, areas, distances, and
azimuths in their true relation to the surface of the earth. The Polyconic
projection is not suited for large areas, as gross exaggeration of details
occurs. This projection is neither equal area nor conformal.
Robinson
Uses tabular coordinates rather than mathematical formulas to achieve
a correct look. Better balance of size and shape for high-latitude areas
than Mercator. Van der Grinten or Mollweide. Directions are true along
all parallels and along central meridian Not conformal, equal area,
equidistant or perspective. Pseudocylindrical right appearing
projection.
Reference Spheroid
The Reference Spheroid is a theoretical geometric figure that has
dimensions closely approaching the dimensions of the earth for a
particular area of interest.
Note that the reference spheroid may be user defined. In such instances,
you are asked to specify the semi-major and semi-minor axes.
The following Z-MAP Plus tasks use reference spheroids:
File New Basemap
Operations Coordinate Transformations
Operations Line Resampling
The following descriptions provide the dimensions for the semi-major
axis and the semi-minor axis. From these two dimensions, the program
calculates the ellipticity for you. Select the desired reference spheroid
from the popup menu. Selections include:
User-Defined The reference spheroid may be user defined. In
such instances, you must specify the semi-major and semi-minor
axes.
Everest 1830 A reference spheroid, used in India, Burma,
Pakistan, Laos, Cambodia, Thailand, and Vietnam, which has the
following dimensions:
semi-major axis = 6,377,276.345 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,075.413 meters
Malayan Everest 1830 A reference spheroid with the
following dimensions:
semi-major axis = 6,377,304.063 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,103.039 meters
Bessel 1841 A reference spheroid with the following
dimensions:
semi-major axis = 6,377,397.2 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,078.962 meters
Airy 1858 A reference spheroid with the following dimensions:
semi-major axis = 6,377,563.396 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,256.909 meters
Introduction
This section describes how to create a customized logo in the title block
logo area.
Height LOGO
XLOGO,YLOGO
TopHorz
WIDTH
XLL,YLL
Line Drawing of Title Block
Understanding LOGOFILEs
ZCL and Z-MAP Plus use an ASCII flat file to determine the
appearance and location of your customized logo. The table below
describes the structure of the LOGOFILE according to line numbers and
pre-defined areas in the file.
Fortran
File Group File Area Variables Assigned
Format
Header Info First Line (7X,F14.7,I7) TopHorz, NameIncluded
Second Line (I5,3F10.4) NumPolys, XLOGO,
YLOGO, Height
Polygon Block (as many Polygon Block Header Line (2I5) NumVertices, Color
as specified by
NumPolys)
Polygon Block Vertex Line (as (2F14.7) X, Y
many as specified by
NumVertices).
The table below explains the purpose of each variable you can use in the
LOGOFILE.
Variable Description
TopHorz Allows you to specify the amount of space allowed for the logo area of the Title Block
(See Figure 1). Its value is expressed as a percentage of the Title Block Width. The
default value for TopHorz is 0.4. For reference, the overall height of the Title Block is
0.52.
NameIncluded Allows you to specify whether the company name is digitized with the logo. If it is, this
value should be 1; otherwise specify 0.
NumPolys Specifies the number of polygon blocks to follow in the file.
XLOGO, Specifies the X,Y coordinates of the lower-left corner of the logo (see Figure 1). These
YLOGO values are expressed as a percentage of the Title Block Width.
Height Allows you to specify the actual height of the logo. The value is expressed as a
percentage of the overall Title Block Width.
NumVertices Specifies the number of vertices (lines in the file) in the polygon block.
Color Specifies the color index to use for this polygon block.
X,Y Specifies the X,Y coordinates of a vertex in a polygon. The coordinates are expressed as a
percentage of the logo height. For example, if the X,Y coordinates were 0.0,0.0, the
vertex would be located at XLOGO,YLOGO. If the X,Y coordinates were 1.0,1.0, the
vertex would be located at (XLOGO + Logo height), (YLOGO + Logo height).
Example LOGOFILE
The following shows a short sample LOGOFILE.
NumVertices NameIncluded
TopHorz
NumPolys XLOGO YLOGO Height
Color
0.3 1 Header
1 0.1250 0.4100 0.2000 Info
10 201
-0.3488372 0.4813953
0.1772093 0.4813953
0.1877907 0.4639535 Polygon
0.1981395 0.4488372 Block
0.2077907 0.4290698
0.2176744 0.4093023
0.2245349 0.3930233
0.2348837 0.3709302
0.2419767 0.3465116
-0.3488372 0.4813953
X Y
You can calculate the actual plotter locations of your polygon vertices
using the following equations:
Plotter X = X ( Height Width ) + ( XLOGO Width ) + XLL
Plotter Y = Y ( Height Width ) + ( YLOGO Width ) + YLL
A real LOGOFILE is in the /files area of the /ZMAPPlus directory. The
file is called COMPANY.LOGO.
Using LOGOFILEs
To use a LOGOFILE in Z-MAP Plus or ZCL, you need to set the
environment variable LOGOFILE to the path for the LOGOFILE. For
example, if the LOGOFILE is located in the following path:
/landmark/logofiles/LOGO.FILE
Execute the following command in the run scripts for ZCL and/or
Z-MAP Plus:
setenv LOGOFILE /landmark/logofiles/LOGO.FILE
Appendix I.
Auxiliary Files
Another set of files present in the home directory make it easier for you
to save and resume your work on a project when you run your next
session of the program: the LASPRM.ZCL, LASPRM.ZCL2, and the
POSMEM4_0 files.
LASPRM The LASPRM files save all the parameter settings you
specified and saved in your most recent session. On startup, a new
Z-MAP Plus session uses the settings from the LASPRM files. For
example, the LASPRM.ZCL is responsible for remembering which
MFDs you attached during the most recent session, as well as which
gridding algorithm or system switch settings you chose before you last
ended the session.
You can customize and save parameter files that are project- specific.
Z-MAP Plus can locate only those parameter files that have the
extension .ZCLPARMS.
POSMEM4_0 The POSMEM4_0 file remembers where you
placed the various menus and panels that appeared during your last
session. This enables you to position the panels according to your
personal preferences.
Two files may be created in connection with running processes that rely
on ZCL (Z-MAP Command Language): the ZMAPPARM file and the
TEMPMACRO.ZCL file.
The ZMAPPARM file maps ZCL parameters to Z-MAP Plus
dialog boxes.
The TEMPMACRO.ZCL file is created each time a parameter
processes a call to a defined macro. Whenever you execute a
macro, the last macro ZCL stream used to call the macro is saved.
Editing the TEMPMACRO.ZCL file, you can use a text editor to
generate a call to a ZCL process.
Glossary
abort
The improper or unexpected termination of a computer run prior to normal completion.
A-format
The FORTRAN format for converting characters into internal codes or vice-versa. The
general form is Axx where xx is an integer indicating the number of characters to be read on
input or the number of spaces to be allocated for output. On output, the characters are left
justified in the xx positions.
algorithm
An unambiguous sequence of instructions, such as a portion of a computer program, which
gives an answer to a problem within a finite number of steps.
alias
The ambiguity in surface shape resulting from too widely spaced control data. If a surface is
very rough or wavy and the control points are widely spaced relative to the highs and lows
of the surface, then it appears to be a much smoother surface after gridding. It is not possible
to accurately reconstruct a surface when it is undersampled and aliasing occurs.
alphabetic character
A letter or other symbol, excluding digits, used in a language. A blank is also considered an
alphabetic character.
alphanumeric data
Data composed of alphabetic and/or numeric characters. Generally, any data that is keyed or
displayed directly to a computer terminal or printer is alphanumeric data. When alphanumeric
data are stored by the computer, each character occupies one byte (8 bits). The two standard
internal computer representations of alphanumeric data are called ASCII and EBCDIC. See
binary data.
altitude
The height above a reference plane, usually mean sea level.
annotation
Descriptive text, scales, legends, etc., that are drawn on a map to identify and locate features,
describe the function of the map or features, and generally make the map useful.
anomaly
A deviation from the uniform character of surrounding information. For example, an anomaly
might be a structure of interest or a feature that might be associated with petroleum
accumulations or mineral deposits.
apparent dip
Any dip not measured at a right angle to the strike. It is always less than the true dip. Cross
sections, which cut a surface at any angle other than 90 degrees to the strike of the surface,
reveal the apparent dip.
application program
A program written by or for a user that applies to the user's work, for example, a mapping
application program.
array
An arrangement of elements in one or more dimensions. Contrast with scalar.
ASCII
American National Standard Code for Information Interchange. The standard code, using a
coded character set consisting of seven-bit coded characters (eight bits including parity
check), used for information interchange among data processing systems, data
communications systems, and associated equipment. The ASCII set consists of control
characters and graphic characters including some that are not represented on the keyboard
keys.
azimuth
The horizontal direction measured clockwise from the meridian plane or north. It ranges from
0 to 360 degrees.
back interpolation
An operation that is somewhat like the reverse of gridding in that Z-values can be interpolated
from a grid at irregularly spaced x,y locations. A local interpolation scheme is used to compute
the Z-value from grid values surrounding the x,y location and the resulting Z-value is added to
the data location to yield x,y,z for each of the input x,y points.
background
1) The area that surrounds the subject; in particular, that part of the display screen surrounding
a character or line data. 2) Behind the scenes, e.g., background processing. Contrast with
foreground. See also batch mode.
bandwidth
Method of selecting wells to be placed on a cross section. If the user specifies two endpoints
and a bandwidth, the computer picks the wells falling within the area.
barrel
The volume of 42 U.S. gallons or 144 liters. Sometimes incorrectly called a drum, which
actually holds 55 gallons.
baselap
A case of onlap where the bases of younger strata lap onto an older surface. In modeling
baselap, you would use one of the Merge operations. See onlap.
basemap
A map showing the names and locations of map data such as seismic lines, shotpoints, well,
culture, and other basic geographic data.
base plane
The two-dimensional x versus y plane used to display map data, contours, and other non-relief
map information. The base plane is defined so that the positive X-direction is east and the
positive Y-direction is north.
batch mode
A mode for executing computer programs when no operator intervention is required. Batch
processing is usually scheduled so that it does not interfere with interactive processing. Batch
processing is sometimes called background processing. Contrast with interactive mode.
binary data
A way of encoding numeric data to make best use of the computational and storage facilities
of computers. Numeric data are converted into binary data as they are loaded into the
computer. Most numeric data are converted to binary data unless they are strictly for display
purposes on a map or other type of graphics. Then they would be retained in alphanumeric
form.
blanking
The operation of changing valid Z-values within a designated area into null values so that it
appears there are no data within the area. Data blanking nulls a specified field of all x,y,z data
points within an area. Grid blanking nulls all the grid values of a specified grid within an area.
border ticks
Short lines drawn perpendicular to map border and used to divide the border into distance
intervals. Longer ticks are used to indicate major intervals while shorter ticks are used to
subdivide major intervals. Major ticks are usually labeled with their respective coordinates.
boundary
A line or closed curve that delineates one area from another. The line or curve is usually
represented by a series of x,y points at its vertices. Boundaries between private properties are
called property lines or lease lines.
boundary polygon
An enclosed multi-sided area that limits data processing, such as regridding, to either inside or
outside the marked area.
byte
Usually eight bits (binary positions) that are used to represent a character.
catalog
The listing of available information that is keyed to a well. Data must be cataloged prior to
manipulation and analysis. If data is not cataloged, the computer does not know it exists.
call
The action of bringing a computer program, a routine, or a subroutine into effect, usually by
specifying the entry conditions and jumping to an entry point.
centered symbol
See symbol.
CGM
Acronym for Computer Graphics Metafile. CGM files are a standard way of storing graphics
information. You can use the File Print CGM option in the Z-MAP Plus window to
save pictures as CGM files. You can use CGM files in graphics applications outside of
Z-MAP Plus.
character
Any one of approximately 100 different symbols that appear on a computer keyboard. Each
character occupies one byte of storage. See also ASCII.
character string
A series of characters such as a word or other useful text that might be used to annotate a map.
class
The color and display format for text items on a map.
class size
The number of elements grouped into each of the histogram bars.
clipping
The operation of limiting or truncating data that is beyond specified limits. Grid clipping is
performed to truncate grid values that exceed or fall below specified thresholds; values above
or below the threshold are set to the threshold. Data clipping of Z values is similar. Map
clipping cuts off all graphic information that would otherwise be drawn beyond a clipping
boundary, typically the map border.
closure
The property of a structure that means it is enclosed by a closed contour. In a structural trap,
vertical closure is the vertical distance between the lowest contour that closes and the highest
point on the feature. Areal closure is the area contained in the lowest closing contour.
color index
A number assigned to a color in the Z-MAP Plus Color Table.
column
A vertical arrangement of characters or other expressions. Contrast with row.
concatenate
To link two or more datasets into a single dataset, generally so the data from one precedes the
data from the next in the combined dataset.
conformable
An unbroken stratigraphic sequence in which the layers have been formed under conditions of
uninterrupted deposition.
constant
A fixed or invariable value or data item.
contour interval
The difference in value between two adjacent contour lines. Generally, the contour interval is
constant across a map; however, the interval may be decreased in flat areas or increased in
high-slope areas to maintain a fairly uniform density of contours across a map.
contour line
A line separating all points that are higher than the contour value from points of lower value.
Alternatively, the contour line is the locus of all points on the surface having the same value as
the contour value. Computer drawn contours are approximations of true contours. They are
produced by computing closely spaced points along the true contour and connecting them by
line segments.
control grid
An existing grid that is used to control how a new grid is generated. In gridding, the most
frequent uses of control grids are to: 1) default the gridding control parameters for the new
grid to match those of the control grid, 2) limit gridding to locations where the control grid is
null, or 3) limit gridding to locations where the control grid is not null. Control grids also
provide the second and third functions during filtering.
control points
Known points on a surface that are used to control the interpretation of the surface. Control
points minimally contain x,y,z information, where x,y is the horizontal location of some
measured information represented by z such as depth or time values. Control point files can
also contain other Z values, textual descriptions about the data, symbol codes, and other types
of measured information. Control point files are used to store well data, seismic data, and other
types of data that are recorded at discrete locations. A typical control point file may be of the
form
X, Y, symbol, API, top 1, top 2
where symbol denotes the symbol used to spot the well on a map, API is a text string, and top
1 and top 2 are subsea elevations.
conversion factors
Scale factors used to convert one set of units to another. The following is a table of useful scale
factors for mapping work.
coordinates
Numbers that identify a location on the display.
cross section
A geologic diagram showing the vertical relationship between formations and structures that
are cut by a vertical plane. The vertical scale is typically depth while the horizontal scale is
distance along the section baseline. Z-MAP Plus displays cross sections of grid surfaces.
culture data
The term used to refer to man-made map data such as roads, property lines, cities, pipelines,
etc. It sometimes includes geographic land grids.
cursor
A movable marker used to indicate a position on the display screen.
curvature
The rate of change in the slope of a surface. The curvature at any grid location can be
estimated using a finite difference formula that relates the grid value to 12 symmetrically
surrounding grid values. The total squared curvature is the sum of the squared curvature at all
grid locations.
curve identification
The names used to designate log curve types. These names are usually the same as those
commonly used to identify log curves.
cylindrical projection
A map projection made by projecting geographic latitude and longitude lines onto a cylinder
that is tangent to a spheroid, then by unfolding the cylinder into a plane. A cylindrical
projection is generally used for mapping large areas.
data field
A portion of a data record that is allocated to store numeric or textual data. Data fields are
qualified by the type of information in the field, the position of the field within the data record,
the range of values for information stored in the field, and the null value for the data in the
field. The position of a specific data field must be the same for all records in a dataset.
data record
The grouping of all data fields for each independent item (control point, vertex, fault trace
point, etc.) in a specified order. The format (contents and order) of the data record is defined
by the specifications for each data field in the record.
data reduction
The process of removing unnecessary or redundant data from the dataset.
dataset
A collection of data records. Typical mapping datasets include x,y,z control point data, grids,
polygons, profiles, fault traces, and map text.
decimation
A controlled deletion of data entities or posted attributes. For example, the Post Seismic Data
(New) process under Add Features, Post Data/Grids allows for decimation of shotpoints,
shotpoint labels, and Z-Attribute labels. Seismic lines can be selectively eliminated from 3D
seismic surveys.
default value
Any automatically assigned value/answer to a process control question. It is displayed on the
screen in the response field for the parameter or question to which it applies. Default values
are appropriate for many standard mapping tasks. Static default values are the same from run
to run. Dynamic default values depend on other parameters, processing steps, process results,
or combinations of these. Default values are sometimes called defaults or standard values.
delimiters
Key names (lease or part of lease), or numbers (part or all of API number or well number) that
limit the number of wells retrieved during a well search.
derivative map
A map of one of the derivatives of a surface, usually the second vertical derivative of a
potential surface. The objective of a derivative map is to areally emphasize small anomalies.
dialog
In an interactive system, a series of interrelated inquires and responses. A dialog is composed
of programs and panels that together provide an interaction between the computer and the user
of that application.
digitize
The process of converting documents (such as maps or graphs) into datasets for mapping. For
example, to digitize contours, a map is taped to a digitizer and registered, then each curve is
followed manually with a special stylus or a cross hair device. The path the stylus follows is
automatically converted into x,y locations. Additional information is entered at a keyboard,
such as Z values or text.
dip
The angle of inclination from the horizontal of any planar surface. True dip or full dip is
measured at 90 degrees from the strike of the surface. Measurement at any other angle is
apparent dip. The term dip normally refers to true dip.
dip vector
An arrow on a map pointing in the direction of the dip. The length of the arrow may be
proportional to the magnitude of the dip.
display area
The part of the terminal screen used to show the picture.
display attribute
A particular property that is assigned to all or part of a display; for example, low intensity,
green color, and blinking.
downdip
The direction of the surface dip vector from higher to lower surface values.
downlap
Downdip termination of strata against an unconformity at the base of a depositional unit. In
modeling downlap, you would use one of the Merge operations.
downward continuation
The process of inferring the shape of a deep surface using the more reliable shape of a shallow
surface and the nature of the interval between the two surfaces.
drift
The deviation of a borehole from the vertical. The drift angle is the angle between the borehole
axis and the vertical; the drift azimuth is the angle between a vertical plane through the
borehole and north.
dynamic
Occurring at the time of execution.
editor
A Z-MAP Plus task used to edit data or text.
element
A single member of an array.
engineering units
The units for measuring the source data, such as feet, meters, miles, or seconds. Engineering
units are not plotter units or other special units used by a computer program.
equatorial projection
Any cylindrical map projection with the polar axis vertical and the center point at the equator.
The Mercator Projection is the most well known example.
exaggeration
1) The use of a vertical scale that is larger than the horizontal scale to make subtle structural
detail more evident. 2) The ratio of the vertical to horizontal scale factors in the aspect ratio.
extrapolate
A mathematical procedure to estimate surface values in areas beyond the spatial limits of the
data. How the data are extrapolated is dependent on the specific algorithm chosen to model the
data.
exploration mapping
The use of mapping procedures in the search for commercial deposits of useful minerals,
hydrocarbons, geothermal sources, etc.
extension
The part of a file name that follows the last period and is used by Z-MAP Plus when filtering
for a type of file at the system level.
facies
The composite properties of a sedimentary rock that relate to the conditions of its origin and
distinguish it in relationship to adjacent rock within a stratigraphic unit.
fault
A displacement of rocks along a shear surface. The surface along which the displacement
occurs is the fault face or fault plane. The dip of the fault face is the angle it makes with the
horizontal. The fault throw is the vertical displacement of a surface across the fault face. The
heave is the horizontal separation of a surface across the fault. The trace of the fault is the
curve formed by the intersection of the fault face and the surface that is faulted. The fault zone
on any surface is the area enclosed by the fault trace. See merge operations.
fault data
A data file type, signified with the FALT extension, that graphically represents a fault.
field
On a panel, a specific input, output, or test area used for a particular named data item.
filtering
A mathematical process to remove certain types of surface information from a gridded
surface. In many applications, filters are used to smooth a surface, which is equivalent to
removing rough character. Filters can also be designed to remove trends and leave the local
variation. In general, grid filters are implemented by convolving the grid with a set of weights.
flexing
A special type of grid filter that is used to remove unwarranted surface variation between data
locations while retaining a precise fit at the data locations. One type of grid flexing uses a
biharmonic filter to produce a grid that is smooth between data locations while honoring the
data.
flexing pass
Grid flexing generally must be performed several times to achieve the desired smoothness and
accuracy. This term is used to indicate how many times the input grid has been flexed.
foreground
1) The part of the display area that is the character itself. 2) Evident on screen, e.g, foreground
processing. Contrast with background. See also interactive mode.
format
The way and order in which data are arranged within data records; or a Fortran control
statement telling the computer how data are arranged. The format precisely defines where
each field is positioned within the data record, the number of characters in the field, and the
type of information (integer, decimal, or text). The A, F, E and G formats are used most
frequently.
formatted dataset
A dataset that has been prepared for input into a specific application program. It is in
alphanumeric format; therefore, it can be displayed and edited at a computer terminal
independently of the mapping program.
FORTRAN
A computer language used for most scientific computer programs. The term is short for
Formula Translator.
forward projection
A mathematical scheme for converting geographic latitude and longitude coordinates into
northing and easting coordinates.
function pool
A collection of variables that are known only within the currently active function. See also
profile pool, shared pool, and variable.
geodetic coordinates
The quantities that define the horizontal position of a point on a spheroid with respect to a
specific geodetic datum. This datum is usually expressed as latitude and longitude. The
elevation of a point is also a geodetic coordinate and may be referred to as a height above sea
level.
geoid
The undisturbed, mean sea level equipotential surface to which the direction of gravity is
everywhere perpendicular. An oblate ellipsoid (spheroid) that approximates the geoid is the
reference for geodetic latitude determinations.
gradient vector
A vector on a surface that always points in the direction of most rapid increase. The gradient
vector is composed of two components: the slope in the X direction and slope in the Y
direction. The magnitude of the gradient vector is the square root of the sum of the two
squared slopes. The direction of the gradient vector is the arc tangent to the ratio of the
Y-slope to the X-slope. The gradient vector can also be expressed in terms of the dip angle and
the direction of dip. (Note: The direction of dip is at right angles to the strike angle.) The
magnitude of the gradient vector is the tangent of the dip angle and the direction of the
gradient vector is the direction of dip.
graphics file
A disk file that contains individual picture files. Also referred to as a ZGF (the graphics file
extension) and as a Z-MAP graphics file.
graphics primitives
The lines, text, symbols, and polygons used to generate a feature. See also logical graphics
block.
grid
A set of surface values located at the intersections of grid lines that span a rectangular area and
that run parallel to the sides of the rectangle. The grid line spacing is called the grid increment.
Usually the increment is constant across the entire grid. The grid line intersections are called
grid nodes. The smallest areas enclosed by grid lines are called grid cells. The surface values
of a grid are called grid values. Since the grid covers a rectangle, the grid limits are given by
the coordinates of the lower left and upper right corners of the area.
gridding
The mathematical process used to estimate values at the grid nodes from control points,
digitized contours, shotpoints, etc. The result of gridding is a grid.
hachured line
A line or curve such as a contour formed by drawing short and equally spaced line segments
perpendicular to the curve. The line segments are typically about 0.1 inch long and 0.5 inch
apart. Hachured contours are used to indicate the dip direction, closed low areas, elevated
areas, or steep slopes depending on the conventions established for the map.
hardcopy
A paper or other tangible media copy of a map or other types of graphic products as opposed
to an image of the map on a graphics screen.
header
Information that is inserted at the beginning of a dataset to identify the data and assist in
loading the data into the computer program.
herringbone
A systematic distortion in contours made from roughly parallel seismic or flight line data. The
distortion is caused when a line is mislocated or has a systematic bias relative to the other
lines. The result is a herringbone pattern in the contours as they bend away from their
predictable trend to cross the corrupted line.
hexadecimal code
A numeric code with a base of 16, in which the digits 0 through 9 and the letters A through F
represent the numbers.
horizon
The surface at the intersection of two different rock layers or a surface associated with a
seismic reflection when the reflector covers a large area.
hydrocarbon saturation
The fraction of the pore volume filled with hydrocarbons as opposed to water saturation.
inclination
The angle between a surface and the horizontal. See dip.
index map
A reference map, usually of a large scale, showing the location of another small-scale map. An
index map is frequently drawn in the margin of a small-scale map near the map title block.
initial dip
The slope angle of bedding surfaces at deposition.
interactive mode
A mode for executing computer programs where the operator must respond immediately to
requests for information and decisions in the order they are presented by the program.
Operator responses and instructions are entered at a computer keyboard.
Contrast with batch mode.
interpolation
A mathematical process for estimating surface values at locations where the surface values are
not known. The estimates are made from known data, such as control point datasets. Grids are
produced by interpolating control points. The interpolation procedure employed to grid a
dataset should be selected to best fit the characteristics of the data and the specific application.
inverse projection
A mathematical scheme for converting northing and easting coordinates into latitude and
longitude coordinates.
isochore
1) The vertical thickness of a rock unit. 2) A contour map of vertical thickness for a rock unit.
isochron
1) The difference of two time horizons. 2) A contour map of the reflection time differences for
two time horizons.
isofacies map
A map that uses pattern symbols to show areas of distributions of a rock type, facies, or other
areally distributed features.
isogram
A contour line.
isolith
A line connecting points of similar lithology.
isopach
1) The stratigraphic thickness of a rock unit (measured perpendicular to the top and base of a
unit). Isopach thickness is less than or equal to isochore thickness. 2) A contour map of
stratigraphic thickness for a rock unit.
iteration
The repeated execution of a sequence of operations. Some mapping algorithms such as
filtering iterate or repeat a sequence of steps to produce their results.
justify
To align characters horizontally to fit the positioning constraints of a required format.
kriging
A geostatistical method of modeling a surface that takes into account the inherent variability in
the data being mapped. According to Jones, Hamilton, and Johnson, Kriging is a complex
weighted average that takes into account spatial relationships between data points and from
them to the grid node.
latitude
The distance measured north or south of the Equator. Latitude is usually expressed in degrees
ranging from 0 at the Equator to 90 degrees at the North Pole and 90 degrees at the South
Pole.
library
A collection of related files.
line of section
A map line indicating the location of a profile or cross section.
line resampling
1) Creates points at regular intervals along the lines in a dataset.
2) Through attribute propagation, finds the value for a given field of an intermediate point by
using the known values of the points on either side.
lithofacies map
A map showing the variation in some property of a rock unit. Examples include percent of an
element or fossil in a given geologic unit.
longitude
The distance measured east or west from the Central Meridian. Longitude is usually expressed
in degrees ranging from 0 at the Central Meridian to 180 degrees east or 180 degrees west.
The central meridian is an internationally recognized line that passes through Greenwich,
England.
magnetic declination
The angle between magnetic and geographic meridians.
magnetic meridian
At any point, the direction of the horizontal component of the earths magnetic field.
map grid
Geographic grid lines that are drawn on a map to provide spatial references for other map
features. Map grid lines can be latitude and longitude lines, northing and easting lines, or other
types of geographic grids.
map projection
A mathematical procedure for mapping latitude and longitude grid lines on the surface of the
earth onto a plane surface, such as a map that enables the systematic transformation of
spherical coordinates into planar coordinates and vice versa.
map scale
The ratio of the distance between any two points on the map to the distance between the same
two points on the earth. Map scales are expressed as 1:2000, 1:10000, etc.
map symbol
See symbol.
masking grid
See control grid.
master file
A disk file that contains a collection of datasets. Master files are used by Landmark geological
mapping systems and often have the extension .MFD.
mean value
The average of all data values. Null values are not included in the mean.
menu
A list of options that are displayed by a computer program.
Mercator projection
A cylindrical type of conformal map projection where meridian lines are parallel to the
equator line and are spaced according to their distance apart at the equator. The latitude lines
are parallel to the equator. This is a conformal map projection, thereby maintaining the true
shape of the land masses. It is more often employed when mapping large areas.
merge operations
A general class of dual grid operations that act to combine intersecting and sometimes
unrelated surfaces, such as unconformities, onlap, faults, etc. The hybrid surface resulting
from such a combination usually serves to define a geologically distinct body of rock. The
operations involved are MIN, MAX, CMIN, CMAX, MERGE LOW and MERGE HIGH. See
the Operations section in the Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual to determine which operation
best fits the specific circumstances.
meridian
A longitude line. See longitude.
message
A comment that provides special information to the user. It may alert the user about what to
expect next, confirm that a user-requested action is in progress, or provide a report of some
error condition.
metafile
A special graphics file that is used to drive various output devices (i.e., plotter, monitor).
missing value
See null value and ZNON.
mis-tie
The difference of values at identical points on intersecting seismic lines.
modeling
The use of computer programs and available data to develop a more complete understanding
of the data source. For example, a reservoir model can be constructed from seismic and well
data to estimate reserves or predict future production.
modulation
A process of varying a graphics feature to reflect a variation in the value of a field. Modulation
tables for symbol and label size and symbol color can be built using Post Seismic Data (New).
NADCON
A geodetic conversion process. A geodetic datum is a direct measurement of the earths
surface in a given geographical area. The NADCON acronym stands for North American
Datum Conversion. NADCON is currently available in Z-MAP Plus as a macro. NAD27 was
the reference system of measurement for latitude/longitude coordinates in North America.
Improvements in measurement equipment and techniques have resulted in the development of
a new datum for North America, NAD83. NADCON allows for conversion in either direction
between NAD27 and NAD83.
negative volume
Volume bounded by a surface and a datum plane when the surface is below the datum.
Negative volume is a measure of the amount of fill required in a cut and fill computation.
See positive volume and net volume.
net volume
The difference between positive and negative volumes.
normalization
A means of transforming from one value range to another using linear regression techniques.
notation
A set of symbols and rules for their use, for the representation of data.
null area
That portion of the gridded area where valid grid values were not computed, generally because
of insufficient data.
null value
A special number that is encoded in the place of Z-values to indicate that the Z-values are
missing or unknown. The null value must be different than any possible Z-value it replaces.
Typical null values are 999, 9999, 1.0E+30, etc. Null values are used to indicate areas where
grid values cannot be determined and when Z-values in a control point dataset are missing.
Landmark geological products call the null value ZNON.
numeric character
A digit from 0 to 9.
oblique projection
A conformal map projection that is centered on either the equator or a pole.
offset
The number of measuring units from a starting point in a record or other area to some other
point.
onlap
Successive landward termination of strata at the base of a depositional unit. In modeling onlap,
you would use one of the Merge operations. See also baselap.
operand
An entity to which an operation is applied; that which is operated upon. An operand is usually
identified by an address part of an instruction.
operations
Mathematical or logical (Boolean) operations that are performed on grids or other types of
datasets. See dual grid operations and single grid operations.
output dataset
The dataset produced by gridding or some of the other mathematical operations.
overlay
The process of taking a set of graphics, such as contours, and superimposing them onto
another set, such as a map.
pad
To fill a field with dummy data, usually zeros or blanks. Padding is usually performed with
zeros at the left of a numeric field and with blanks at the right of an alphanumeric field.
paleo section
A cross section showing attitudes of bedding and structure as it is assumed to have been at
some past time. The cross section may have been constructed by flattening one of the
structures and applying the same shifts to deeper structures.
parallel
A latitude line. See latitude.
parameter
A number, text string, or other information that is required to control a process. Parameters are
the values assigned to variables within a computer program.
perspective display
A 3D display of a surface that is geometrically similar to how the surface would appear if it
could be photographed. The display is constructed relative to a specified viewing point that
must be some distance from the surface just as a camera must be away from the surface to
make a photograph. The dimensions of surface features are decreased with distance from the
viewing point.
picture
A generic term for a map, cross section, or other type of display that can be produced by a
mapping system. A picture is a named collection of graphic features. It can be recalled by its
name, displayed and edited.
planimeter
A mechanical or digital instrument used to compute areas and volumes of mapped features
manually. The instrument consists of a small wheel and a counter. Revolutions are converted
directly into distances when the wheel follows a contour or other closed figure.
plotter units
Units of distance used to specify plotting locations as opposed to actual data units. Most
plotters manufactured in the United States use inches, while most foreign plotters use
centimeters. The plotter units are given relative to the lower left corner of the picture and
include space for map margins.
point to point
Method of selecting wells to be displayed on a cross section. User is required to pick (one at a
time) the desired wells.
polygon
A closed planar figure with three or more sides. Polygons are used to specify property
ownership boundaries, areas where special grid operations such as grid blanking are to be
performed, the horizontal limits for volume calculations, and other map data.
pool
A storage place for names and values of variables.
porosity
Pore volume per gross volume of rock. Porosity is determined from cores or from neutron or
resistivity logs.
positive volume
The volume formed between a surface and a datum plane when the surface is above the datum.
Generally the volume is limited to a bounded area.
posting data
Placing data on a map on its correct geographic position. In some programs, posting data is
referred to as spotting data. See spotting data for additional information.
process window
A computer terminal screen display used to list process control parameters and their current
values or processing options. The Z-MAP Plus process window is known as the Status/Report
window.
profile
A file stored on disk that contains variable names and values to be used in future Dialog
Manager sessions.
profile pool
A collection of variables that are contained in the application profile and automatically
retained from one session to another for the user. See also function pool, shared pool, and
variable.
projection
A planar representation of the Earth's surface made by passing lines from points on the surface
to the intersection with the plane.
prompt
In an interactive program, a message from the program that requires a response from the
operator. The type of response should be evident from the message.
range
1) The interval between two numbers or coordinates. 2) The designation for the north-south
sections of a township. The north-south boundary between townships is called a range line.
record
A logical set of data for one item in a dataset. Each record is partitioned into two or more data
fields, all records within the dataset must have the same number of fields, and all records must
have their fields in the same order. When the records are constructed, all fields must contain
their appropriate values or the null value.
reference crosses
Also called grid increment ticks. Crosses (+) that are drawn on a map so that it can be overlaid
and aligned with other maps. Reference crosses are usually drawn at the intersections of major
geographic grid lines. They are drawn large enough (approximately 1 inch) to be distinguished
from other types of posted data.
reference spheroid
A theoretical figure whose dimensions loosely approach the dimensions of a geoid.
refinement passes
Recalculation passes on a grid that have the effect of smoothing contours. The calculation
interval becomes smaller and smaller with an increasing number of passes and the processing
time increases.
reserved word
A word that is defined in a programming language for a special purpose, and that must not
appear as a user-declared identifier.
residual
The small scale regional variation of a surface. The residual is used to locate important surface
detail that might be obscured by large scale surface trends. See trend analysis.
return code
A value that indicates the outcome of preceding instructions.
row
A horizontal arrangement of characters or other expressions. Contrast with column.
scalar
A quantity characterized by a single number. Contrast with array.
scaling factor
A multiplicative factor used to alter the values of a specific curve.
scratch file
A disk file that is automatically attached to each Z-MAP Plus program run. All intermediate
files created during the run are stored on the scratch file and deleted when you terminate the
run, unless you specify otherwise.
scrolling
In computer graphics, vertically or horizontally moving a display image in a manner such that
new data appears at one edge as old data disappears on the opposite edge.
search radius
The radius of the data collection circle that is constructed around each grid node during
gridding. The circle defines the area from which data can be collected to be used to interpolate
the grid value. Data outside the circle are not used to interpolate the grid value.
selection panel
A type of panel that presents a list of options (a menu) to the user, who must then make a
selection to proceed in the dialog.
semi-variogram
The statistical tool employed by the gridding method called Kriging. The semi-variogram
relates variation to distance. The semi-variogram assumes that we expect nearby data points
on a surface to be more similar than distant points.
set points
Positions on the display marked by the user using function keys [F9] and [F10]. These
positions are marked to provide reference points for some subsequent function to be
performed by the SDF Program.
shared pool
A collection of variables accessible to different functions belonging to the same application.
See also function pool, profile pool, and variable.
shotpoint (SP)
For mapping purposes, the shotpoint is the location where seismic reflection times are
recorded.
spotting data
The process of drawing data locations and data values on a map. The dataset can be either grid
or control point data. The data locations are indicated by special centered symbols while data
values are written in designated locations around the symbol. The data values may be numeric
or text strings. See posting data.
standard deviation
The square root of the variance.
strike
The direction of a contour of a surface; the horizontal direction at right angles to the dip.
structure
1) The general disposition, attitude, arrangement, or relative position of the rock masses of an
area. 2) Any physical arrangement of rocks such as an anticline that may involve the
accumulation of oil or gas. 3) A subsurface area with a closed high.
support data
Frequently used in conjunction with control points or grids, support data includes fault traces,
polygons, digitized curves, etc.
symbol
One of 964 different graphics symbols that can be drawn on a map at designated x,y locations.
The symbols are constructed so their centers are positioned at x,y. Symbols range in graphic
complexity from a simple plus sign to complex combinations of shaded circles and lines. The
different designs are used to indicate different types of data or states of the data. Any of the
symbols can be used to spot a dataset.
township
1) A square area, six miles on each side and divided into 36 sections numbered 1 to 36. In the
United States the section numbers start in the upper right corner and lap back and forth and
down. In Canada, the numbers start in the lower right corner and lap back and forth and up. 2)
A designation of the east-west row of townships. United States townships are specified
relative to standard reference parallels that often are not stated explicitly; T2NR3E identifies
the township that is 2 rows north of the reference parallel and 3 columns east of the reference
meridian.
trailing
Located at the end of a string or number. For example, the number 1000 has three trailing
zeros.
transfer
The process of moving a dataset into or out of the mapping program.
trend analysis
The fitting of a smooth analytical surface to data points to represent the large scale regional
variation of the data rather than a precise fit that honors all the data. The objective is to detect
trends in the data that might mask small and important local features. The difference between
a precise fit to the data and a trend fit is called the residual. This is the local erratic or random
component of the data.
truncate
1) To remove the beginning or ending elements of a string or number. 2) To cut-off or remove
a part of a geological structure.
unconformity
A surface of erosion or nondeposition that separates younger strata from older rock.
Frequently, the strata above and below the unconformity are not parallel. In modeling an
unconformity, you would use one of the Merge operations.
unique identifier
A number (the API number or its last 5 digits) used to establish the uniqueness of a well.
value to shift
The amount to be added or subtracted from a curve. Results in an overall shift of the curve
values.
variable
A character or group of characters that refers to a value in a computer program; a quantity that
can assume any of a given set of values.
variance
The average of the squared distances from the data values to the mean of the data values.
When the variance is small relative to the mean then the data are clustered around the mean
value. When the variance is large, the data are scattered away from the mean.
vertex
An x,y point where two line segments of a digitized curve join.
volumetrics
A mathematical procedure for computing the volume between two surfaces. The volumetrics
module also computes planar and surface areas.
water saturation
See irreducible water saturation.
weighting function
A mathematical equation that is used in gridding to decrease the significance of control point
data with increasing distance from the grid node being interpolated. The justification for a
weighting function is that the similarity in surface characteristics at any two arbitrary points
typically decreases with increasing distance between the points. Weighting function equations
are designed to approximate the way that similarity decreases.
wildcard
A designated character such as * or % used to set up a search or a mask. Usually the wildcard
is used in the middle or at the end of a partial string. For example, AUS* searches for any
character string beginning with AUS. Wildcards are used in Z-MAP Plus to construct textual
masks for selective posting, as well as for file extensions and directory path definitions.
window
1) A rectangular portion of a graphics display that is extracted from the current display and
enlarged to the full viewing area of the display. Windows are used to examine portions of a
map or other type of graphic display in greater detail. A window is defined by using the
graphics cursor to mark two opposite corners of the rectangle. The terms windows and zoom
windows are functionally the same. 2) A rectangular area that is used to extract a subset of a
dataset by selecting only the data located in the window. See unwindow one level.
X-coordinate
1) The horizontal (left-right or east-west) component of a rectangular cartesian coordinate
system used in mapping. The x coordinate increases to the right or the east. 2) The first
component of a 3-dimensional rectangular system.
X-field
A portion of a data record that is allocated to store the x coordinate. See data field.
Y-coordinate
1) The vertical (up-down or north-south) component of a 2-dimensional rectangular cartesian
coordinate system. The y coordinate increases to the north. 2) The second component of a
3-dimensional rectangular system.
Y-field
A portion of a data record that is allocated to store the y coordinate. See data field.
Z-field
A portion of a data record that is allocated to store a Z-value. See data field.
ZNON
A name for the null value. See null value.
zoom
The process of displaying a small area of a picture so that small features are made visible. See
window and unwindow one level.
Z-value
1) The third component of a 3-dimensional coordinate system of x,y,z points.
2) A measured or computed value for a surface at a corresponding x,y location. Z-value is used
to refer to grid values or the numeric data components in control point datasets. Measured or
computed values of elevation, thickness, porosity, pressure, and seismic time are typical
Z-values.
ZGF
Z-MAP Graphics File. See graphics file.
Index
Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
Numerics algorithms
also see: gridding algorithms
2D Seismic option (Features menu) 321-337
Carter-Good Iterative Depth 664, 665
3D Fishnet Plot option (Features menu) 246
Douglas Poiker (curve thinning) 706
3D Seismic option (Features menu) 338-362
Extended Fault Contouring 238
3D Time-to-Depth Conversion macro
Profile Contouring 238
shown on menu 740
Williams (curve-scanning) 706
3D Velocity Grid (Time Slice) macro
alias, defined 905
shown on menu 740
Altitude Of Sun setting
Shaded Relief dialog box 248
A Always On Top option (System Window) 773
American Petroleum Institute (API)
ABS (absolute value) function
substitute numbers defined 932
Single Data Operations 561
well number defined 906
Single Grid Operations 541
American Polyconic projections
adding
Z-MAP Plus 885
AOI/projection information 369
Antilog Base 10 (from Data) operation 569
DLS data (Create & Post) 366
Antilog Base 10 (from Grid) operation 548
DLS data (Township/Section/Range) 367
antilogarithm see: Antilog Base 10
DLS/NTS lines/labels on a map 365
AOI
DLS/NTS survey data 365
adding (Projection Box option) 369
fault dip symbols 670
definition 907
fields (Data Operations) 633
DLS/NTS maps 364
grid node symbols/values 275-276
resetting with resample grid 552
lines to map 252-270
source for dual grid 548
logo to title block 899
specifying AOI type for new map 36
NTS data (Post National Topo) 368
specifying for new map (from file data) 37
NTS data to map 366
specifying for new map (from user input) 38
points to lines (Line Resampling) 675
Append X-Y to Seismic Time File
polygons to map 277-279
Operations: Geophysical Operations 647
text to map 271-274
area of interest see: AOI
Advanced tab
Area/Depth Plot option
Point Gridding Plus window 413
used in volumetrics 767
A-format, defined 905
areas
Albers Equal Area projections
Edit Area dialog box 173
Blue Marble 889
Scale Area option 663
Z-MAP Plus 885
Scale/Bias Line or Area operation 662
Albers projection, defined 905
volume scale 753
ASCII data B
creating from ZGF data 74
back interpolation
exporting grids to OpenWorks 863
Back Interpolation (Operations) 677-680
File menu options, overview 31
summary 676
importing .DAT file (File menu) 120
using in Calculator 538
importing to MFD/OpenWorks 860-864
background display color
limitations of import file format 118
setting as black/white 778
listing printing formats (File: Info) 97
Balancer option (Operations: Faults) 668
previewing before importing 123
base plane value
Save As option (File menu) 70
Volumetrics dialog box 757
workflow for importing 117
baselapping surface intersections
ATAN (arctangent) function
Surface Intersection operation 735
Single Data Operations 562
baseline files
Single Grid Operations 541
constructing a cross section 226
attaching
Basemap Features dialog box 223-225
Attach MFDs icon 48
activating tabs/fields 223
Attach ZGFs icon 49
buttons 225
new ZGF attached automatically 34
Basemap option (File: New): workflow 35
X,Y values to seismic time file 647
basemaps see: maps
attributes
bathymetric surveys
color assignments 804
using in Line Gridding 487
color attribute of primitives 208
Bias (Trend) ratio: Point Gridding Plus 415
modeling with Trendform Gridding 475
BIAS function
propagating (Line Resampling) 710
Single Data Operations 561
Auto Display option
Single Grid Operations 541
redrawing display automatically 383
Bias mode
auxiliary files for Z-MAP Plus 901
biasing a line/area 663
Azimuth Of Sun setting
bifurcations
Shaded Relief dialog box 248
Balancer option (Faults) 668
azimuthal projections
Biharmonic filters
Azimuthal Equal Area (Blue Marble) 889
described (Point Gridding) 445
Azimuthal Equal Area (Polar Aspect - Blue
shown in flexing workflow 520
Marble) 889
template described 521
Azimuthal Equidistant (Blue Marble) 889
using in Contour Gridding 461, 485
Azimuthal Equidistant (Polar Aspect - Blue
using in Flexing 524
Marble) 890
using in Line Gridding 497
Azimuthal Gnomic (Z-MAP) 884
using in Point Gridding Plus 413
Azimuthal Orthographic (Z-MAP) 884
Bipolar Oblique Conic Conformal projections
Azimuthal Stereographic (Z-MAP) 884
Z-MAP Plus 886
Orthographic (Blue Marble) 891
dip distances
reflected in Trend Fit Gridding 502 Distance-to-Vertex Grid macro 467
dip angle Distance-to-Vertex Grid macro (menu) 740
calculating in DIPAZM function 542 DISTINCLL (Distance Increment
used in Calculate Fault Fields 669 Latitude/Longitude)
Dip Symbol Generator (Operations: Faults) Line Resampling method 714
670-671 DISTINCXY (Distance Increment X/Y)
Dip Vector Map macros 739 Line Resampling method 713
DIPAZM function distortion in projections, explained 689
Single Grid Operations 542 DMS (Degree-MInute-Second)
DIPMAG (angle tangent) function converting data to/from 701
Single Grid Operations 542 Dominion Land Survey (DLS)
Directory Paths (File menu) 108-115 adding DLS data to map 367
color tables 115 adding DLS lines/labels 365
data files 112 using DLS AOI to create map 364
format files 114 using DLS data to create/post map 366
importance of file name extensions 109 dotted lines, pattern illustrated 802
macro files 115 double parallel Lambert projections
MFDs 110 Z-MAP Plus 883
overview of options 31 Douglas Poiker algorithm 706
session/parameter files 112 downdip
workflow 108 using in DIPAZM function 542
ZGFs 111 drag-and-drop operations
discontinuity codes/fields in the File Manager 64
discontinuity fields (line thinning) 607 drawing
Discontinuity Flags (file conversion) 684 curves (Contouring) 243
setting flags (line resampling) 719 hacured lines in polygons 279
Disk File to ZGF option (Import) 130 lease polygons 278
DISPLACE (Displacement) lines 252-270
Line Resampling method 715 polygons 277-279
display area DTS files
separating from menu bar 778 importing, creating .dts Z-MAP files 57
displaying Dual Data Operations 565-568
Auto Display option (View menu) 383 Operation options listed 567
Display List option (View menu) 376 Dual Grid Operations 544-548
fault dip symbols 670 Operation options listed 545
file information: workflow 93 duplex text, illustrated 801
Full Display option (View menu) 382 DX function (Single Grid Operations) 542
grid statistics (File: Info) 105 DX2 function (Single Grid Operations) 542
Re-display option (View menu) 381 DY function (Single Grid Operations) 542
statistics for .data file 104 DY2 function (Single Grid Operations) 542
View menu options 375-384 dynamic, defined 916
ZGF information 105 DZ/DX field (Point Gridding) 448
Distance gridding algorithm DZ/DY field (Point Gridding) 448
Point Gridding 434
Point Gridding Plus 405
interpreters L
column heading (Grid Statistics dialog) 15
labels
definition (OpenWorks) 21
adding DLS/NTS labels to map 365
described 20
adding to contour map 243
project access levels (OpenWorks) 21
adding to map 223
interrupting
Curve Drawing and Labeling Parameters
redrawing process 377
dialog box 244
intersections
Lambert Conic projections
Surface Intersection operation 735
Blue Marble 889
Intrinsic hypothesis
Lambert projections
kriging in Point Gridding Plus 408
double parallel (Z-MAP Plus) 883
Isopach Contouring (Profiles) macro
single parallel (Z-MAP Plus) 883
shown on menu 739
Laplacian filters
Isopach gridding algorithm
described (Point Gridding) 445
Compression Factor parameter 435
shown in flexing workflow 520
Point Gridding 434
template described 521
Point Gridding Plus 405
using in Contour Gridding 461, 485
isopach grids
using in Flexing 524
using from StratWorks 467
using in Line Gridding 497
italic text, illustrated 801
using in Point Gridding Plus 413
iterative depth algorithm (IDA) 664, 665
LASPRM files, described 902
Lat/Lon (DMS) to Decimal Degrees option
J Operations menu 701-703
J-curve data latitude
storing (Water Saturation Averaging) 765 adding labels to map 223
converting to Y 692
Latitude Scale Factor (projection setting) 42
K Reference Latitude (projection setting) 42
key field 779 using to define new map AOI 36
key text 273 LATLONGPROJECTED AOI type
kriging specifying for new map 36
defined 923 LCK files see: lock files
hypotheses (Point Gridding Plus) 408 leases
included in Point Gridding Plus 397 drawing lease polygons 278
parameters 425-429 least squares fit, defined 923
semivariograms (Point Gridding Plus) 426 Least Squares gridding algorithm
Kriging gridding algorithm Point Gridding 433
Point Gridding Plus 406 Point Gridding Plus 404
Trendform Gridding 473
LGBNAMES.DAT files, described 904
M macros continued
POST-NTS-DLS: calling via command 365
macro files
POST-PIC-STATS 369
inaccessible in File Manager 60
QUICKVOL-FORTYPOLS 770
setting directory paths for 115
QUICKVOL-TWOPOLS 769
macros
SPAWN-PROCESS 772
ANTILOG-TEN-DATA 569
SURFCORRECT 761
ANTILOG-TEN-GRID 548
TRANSFORM-COORDS 700
APPEND-XY 647
TREND-ANAL-GRID 507
Area/Depth Plot (on menu) 739
using ZCLMAC extension for 737
AREA-DEPTH 768
VERT-TO-DGRID (Distance-to-Vertex Grid)
Bubble Map Posting macro (on menu) 739
467
COLOR-BAR 251
ZGF-SUMMARY 107
Color-filled Contours macro (on menu) 739
Macros menu 737-742
CTOG 201
Execute Macro dialog box 741
ENVELOPE 760
Geophysics options 740
ENVELOPE (reservoir envelope volumetrics)
Graphics options 739
760
Operations options 739
EVALUATE-CONGRID 516
Quick-look options 738
EVALUATE-POLYN 517
User Macros option 737
EXPORT-CPS-FILE 73
Utilities options 740
EXPORT-ZGF-FILE 74
main window, described 4
FASTCONTOURMAP 246
mantissa
FAULT-BACKFILL-F 670
changing to .0 562
FAULT-BALANCER 668
map projections see: projections
FAULT-DIP-SYMBOL 671
map scales
FAULT-MIGRATION 672
Scale Type option (new map) 37
FAULT-PROFILE 673
maps
FAULT-SHRINKER 674
adding 2D seismic surveys 321-337
FISHNET-PLOT 246
adding 3D seismic surveys 338-362
GRID-LT-EQ-GT 515
adding AOI/projection information 369
GRID-TO-SEISMIC 648
adding color scale bar 251
IMPORT-CPS-FILE 131
adding control point symbols 280-290
IMPORT-GRID 129
adding features/labels/border 223
IMPORT-ZGF-FILE 130
adding grid node symbols/values 275-276
LINEGRIDPLUS 477
adding lines 252-270
LIST-CPS-FILE 107
adding text 271-274
NADCONV: calling via command 367
adding/editing polygons 277-279
NIV-DATA 664
Contouring options 238-251
NIV-GRID 665
creating a map 34-44
overview (Macros menu) 737
creating data file from 198
PIC-POST-DLS: calling via command 366
Delete Fill Area (Graphics Editor) 173
PIC-POST-NTS: calling via command 366
deleting (Delete Pictures) 151
POST-DLS: calling via command 367
displaying automatically (System Switches)
POST-NTS: calling via command 368
777
POST-NTS-DLS 364
minutes N
converting data to/from minutes format 701
NAD state plane projections
Mistie Reduction
for new map 43-44
Geophysical Operations 653-655
NAD 27-NAD 83 Datum Shift 367
mistie, defined 925
using in Coordinate Transformations 698
Modeling menu 385-530
Name Output dialog (Merge Data) 620-623
Boolean Grid option 515
Name Output files dialog box
Constant Grid option 516
Migration, Reverse Migration 651
Contour Gridding option 451-466
naming conventions
Flexing option 520-530
color tables 115
Line Gridding option 487-500
for data files 112
Line Gridding Plus option 477-486
format files 72, 114
Point Gridding option 430-450
imported SeisWorks files 58
Point Gridding Plus option 394-429
National Topographic Survey (NTS)
Polynomial Grid option 517-518
adding NTS data (Post National Topo) 368
Trend Fit Gridding option 501-506
adding NTS lines/labels 365
Trend Surface Gridding option 507-514
using NTS AOI to create map 364
Trendform Gridding option 467-476
using NTS data to create/post map 366
User-Defined Filter option 519
Nederland Stereografische projections
Modified Polyconic projections
Z-MAP Plus 887
Z-MAP Plus 885
net pay
Modulation Parameters options (3D Seismic)
importing data from PetroWorks 29
Symbol Size Range Creation Parameters
New Map Creation dialog box 34-44
360-362
AOI from Grid, Data, Picture or Contours 37
Molleweide projections
AOI from user input, Offsets, and Scale 38
Blue Marble 891
Picture Name, AOI & Scale Type 36
monitors
Projection Parameters option 39-44
setting system switches 776
New menu 32-47
Switch Screen option (View menu) 384
New Zealand Map Grid projections
moving
Z-MAP Plus 886
fault centerline (Migrator option) 671
NIV see: normalized interval velocity
files/pictures (File Manager) 62
NMINCREM (Numerical Increment)
map/cross section in graphic display 380
Line Resampling method 714
text (Edit menu) 162
node see: grid nodes
text (Graphics Editor) 165
non-opaque faults
Moving Plate gridding algorithm
processing in Point Gridding Plus 400
Point Gridding 435
NORM function
Multi-Surface Map macro
Single Data Operations 562
shown on menu 739
Single Grid Operations 541
Normalized Absolute Standard Deviation of the
Residuals Graph (for trend surface grid)
510
Operations options (Macros menu) Plot a Picture (CGM) dialog box 132
menu illustrated 739 Plot A Picture (Other) dialog box 137
Orthographic projections plotters
Blue Marble 891 color variation on 809
Overlay Pictures (Features menu) 233-237 WDFILE defined 904
oversampled data 708 Point Density gridding algorithm
OW button 16 Point Gridding Plus 406
Point Gridding 430-450
P briefly described 385
control grid methods described 389
Pan icon 380 Data Distribution Statistics option 448
parameter files see: session files data hull methods described 390, 391
parameters Extrapolation Distance parameter 392
changing for text (Edit menu) 162 purpose of flexing described 393
map features: Edit All Features option 173 reducing grid interval with Refinements 393
resetting by opening session file 48 search radius for initializing nodes 392
unlocking automatically 776 Point Gridding Plus 394-429
pasting Advanced tab 413
files/pictures (File Manager) 62 briefly described 385
Patch-grid Posting macro control grid methods described 389
shown on menu 739 data hull methods described 390, 391
patterns Extrapolation Distance parameter 392
line patterns illustrated 802 Point Gridding Plus icon 395
perspective maps purpose of flexing described 393
creating 246 reducing grid interval with Refinements 393
PetroWorks search radius for initializing nodes 392
description of 23 smoothing (flexing) parameters 413
importing data from 29 XMin, XMax, YMin, YMax coordinates 411
photographic representation of grid 247 points
physical records, defined 828 adding with Line Resampling 675
Picture Assembly (Features) 370-374 deleting with Line Generalization 675
Picture Name, AOI & Scale Type dialog box reducing in cartographic features 704
using to specify name for new map 36 pointsets
Picture Statistics macro importing from Stratamodel 27
shown on menu 740 importing/exporting to/from OpenWorks 22
pictures see: maps and cross sections saving Z-MAP data into 16
plain text, illustrated 801 StratWorks 27
planar projections Polar Stereographic projections
polar, equatorial, oblique 876 Blue Marble 892
planimetric data Z-MAP Plus 887
setting line generalization tolerance for 708 polyconic projections
American Polyconic (Z-MAP Plus) 885
Latitude Scale Factor option 42
Modified Polyconic (Z-MAP Plus) 885
Polyconic (Blue Marble) 892
vertex files W
creating 198
Water Saturation Averaging
creating a subset of 575
overview 762
cross section baseline 46
Water Saturation Averaging dialog 766
editing data (Data Editor) 174
WDFILE files, described 904
reducing file size (Line Generalization) 705
Weighted Average gridding algorithm
structure of 854
Point Gridding 433
using to blank grids 550
Point Gridding Plus 405
vertical separation data
Trendform Gridding 473
required for Point Gridding Plus 396
weighting function, defined 935
used in Calculate Fault Fields 669
Well Overposting macro
View menu 375-384
shown on menu 739
Auto Display option/icon 383
Well Symbol Editor 791-792
Display List option/icon 376
Well-penetration Coordinates macros
Full Display option/icon 382
shown on menu 739
icon button counterparts illustrated 6
wells
Pan option/icon 380
adding deviated wells 291-320
Switch Screens option 384
importing well data from Stratamodel 27
Window option/icon 379
merging surface/picks (Surface Correction)
Zoom Out option 377, 378
761
volume scale 754
OpenWorks symbols 791
VOLUMES.OUT files, described 903
wildcards
Volumetrics 745-759
used with thinning editing 610
Base Plane setting 757
using to create data subset 609
constraints 758
Williams algorithm 706
Quick Volumetrics (2 polygons) 769
Window option (View menu) 379
Quick Volumetrics (40 polygons) 770
Windowed Contour Map macro
report fields 752
shown on menu 739
Reservoir Envelope Volumetrics 760
workflow icons see: icons
Slice Thickness setting 757
workflows
volumetrics defined 934
blanking a grid 549
comprehensive 17
creating a cross section 45
creating a map 35
Faults (Operations menu) 667
Grid Listing (File: Info) 101
integrating w/other Landmark products 23
SeisWorks/Z-MAP Plus integration 24
setting directory paths 108
Write option
Edit Color Table dialog box 216
Wrong Item Found (Graphics Editor) 164
X Z
X fields ZCL Command Language
converting to longitude 692 overview of macros 737
X gridding increment using to create macros 115
Line Gridding Plus 480 ZCL processes
X scale formula logging 774
AOI of new map 38 ZCLMAC files see: macros
X,Y values ZCLPARMS files
back interpolating from grid location 677 creating 68
X,Y,Z Point Data (Features) 280-290 opening 48
XMin, XMax, YMin,YMax parameters ZEQ files
Point Gridding Plus 411 accessible in File Manager 60
XMin,XMax saving equation as (Calculator) 538
Line Gridding Plus parameters 481 ZGFs
xterm window compressing 155
described 4 copying 142
XY AOI type creating 34
specifying for new map 36 deleting (Delete Pictures) 151
XYPROJECTED AOI type displaying contents 105
specifying for new map 36 displaying headers (File: Info) 106
displaying list of features (File: Info) 106
Y File menu options, overview 31
Graphics File Summary (File: Info) 107
Y fields headers in flat files 75
converting to latitude 692 importance of correct file name extension 156
Y gridding increment importing disk files to 130
Line Gridding Plus 480 naming conventions 34
Y scale formula no locking for ZGFs 901
AOI of new map 38 opening 49
YMin,YMax opening/closing 49
Line Gridding Plus parameters 481 Rename Pictures option (File: Rename) 148
saving ZGF data as ASCII file 74
Select-Picture from ZGF dialog 596
setting directory paths for 111
working with (File Manager) 60
ZINC (slice increment) setting
Volumetrics report 748